UNUM (BxB•YoonMin)

UNUM

written by Brictorique.

A Fanfiction not intended for people that are homophobic. The incidents and places are product of the author’s wild imagination, and are not to be construed as real. Any resemblance to another story is entirely coincidental and unintentional. I hardly advised not to copy my work as all people have different mindset and ways of imaginations that they wish are real so please, create you own story line.

This is going to be my sixth YoonMin fanfiction inspired by Taylor Swift’s song featuring ELVIRA entitled Willow - Dancing Witch Edition. Originally, this should have been posted on the day of Yoongi’s service but decided to postpone and publish it instead on Jimin’s birthday because why not, right?

That’s all. Stay weird and I love you all!

Date Created: September 18, 2023

Prologue

“So… what does it say? What do you see?” Jin asks, excitedly, as he keeps glancing between the witch and the scrambled dices lying on the table before him.

Taehyung groaned, “This is stupid.”

“Is there something wrong?”

“Yes, there is definitely something wrong here, hyung!” 

Taehyung collected the scrambled dices with a huff and began shaking it quite harder than earlier. Throwing it for the third time around between his closed fists on the round-like compass tablet corresponding to location and elements.

He almost want to hit his head on the table.

Yep, still the same as earlier and for a while now. It keeps on giving him the same numbers, the same elements, and the same reading for the past six full moons no matter how harshly he shakes and throws the dices.

For starters, Taehyung isn’t a well-rounded witch (as he wants himself to be) and he is the only witch that Yoongi could rely on in the Kingdom of Leukos. He hates to admit but it is a pain in the ass to be the only one left in Leukos out of many since most that had survived, all fled to Erebos for protection from Yoongi and those were all skilled witches Aidios could ever have.

As much as he wants to learn from a skilled witch, who can teach him whatever specialty one has to offer so he can somehow strengthen his knowledge, he can’t.

He don’t want himself to get killed yet either by Yoongi (thinking he’s betraying him) or in the Avgrund.

Avgrund is the biggest, largest, deepest, and scariest body of water to ever exist in Aidios and the only one too. Said ocean keeps the two kingdoms separated from each other.

Those who dared to set sail were never seen again. Even with the most perfect ship one can make, didn’r stand against the currents of Avgrund.

Even the witches from Erebos can’t suppress the raging currents of said ocean. It acts like a barrier between the two Kingdoms and none can break through that barrier so, whenever trouble is being sent their way, it will take a while for them to receive it. It gives them ample time to think about how they will be able to counter-attack the hexes.

The only way a witch can travel to either kingdom is through a spell portal, but that would consume too much energy which seldom a witch would do.

And them having ample time, doesn’t mean they always win against them. Like what was said, Taehyung is the only witch in the Kingdom. He is considered a beginner witch by most, even by the witches themselves and because of that, he lacks the knowledge to break complicated hexes. Sometimes the damage on those hexes were big enough that some end up dying on the streets and/or their homes and he can’t help but feel useless at times.

Good thing was, Jin and the rest of his friends are there to cheer him up. Including the villagers of Leukos who understands how hard it is to be a witch especially if you weren’t a natural, or born one.

Yoongi hates the race of witches, every single one of them, but Taehyung was an exemption after saving his son’s life during the war that the king himself initiated and because of that, the King spared his life.

As much as Yoongi wants Taehyung to learn more about being a witch, to hone his knowledge and skills, he can’t be much help. He doesn’t know how witches’ spells work nor does he has some books spared for the younger to learn as he burned all of those during his rage with the witches.

Well, except for the books that were on the Palace’s grounds which he forgot (or maybe not) to burn but that’s for another time to discuss.

“It’s been giving me the same thing for the past six full moons and I still don’t get it or rather, I don’t want to believe that this could all be true because this is scary enough for the future of Leukos.”

“Why?”

Taehyung pointed to each one of the dice in their respective positions on the round-like compass with a deep sigh.

“It says here that one will arrive by the time when the Kingdom of Leukos is on the verge of collapsing,” he starts.

“… It may probably has something to do with our enemy and this person right here,” Taehyung states and points to one particular dice as if Jin himself can see who it was, nods in understanding,“… will give us wisdom to which new beginnings may blossom. Their contribution will provide such breakthrough on our side which will give us completion to whichever or whatever we are trying to accomplish for the past years and because of that, we will finally have balance, unity and…”

“And?”

Taehyung looks at the dices again, hesitant to even say something impossible knowing the King.

“I’m seeing lovers. An Emperor and an Empress which means, this person the dice keeps on saying, might be the King’s new love interest.”

“So it’s a female?”

“That, I cannot confirm, hyung.”

“But why? You said this person might be his new love interest, right? An emperor and an Empress so, that means a female, no?”

“Fire sign showed up three times paired with twice of air to which both elements represent masculine energy. However there’s one for earth and water which is for feminine energy. Normally, in determining the gender of said mystery person, it should only show one or two elements but this… I have never seen this in a reading before and I’m not sure even if this is a clue on how they will meet.”

“Must be a tomboy then? Some female villagers acts masculine. But it’s good to know my brother wouldn’t end up dying alone.”

“But again, hyung, we can’t just assume this mystery person is a female. What if he is a male? Then what?”

Jin was about to reply but noticed Taehyung was eyeing the door behind him so he turned his head to see what the younger was looking at and saw a familiar black blob hiding behind said door. Jin hides a smile upon seeing the creature.

If there’s one positive thing the Erebos witches did for Yoongi, that was to give him a cute (debatable) and scary blob that they had created out of his brother’s own body that acts like his twin/child that has no emotions (as what they all thought) that eventually became the ear and eyes of Yoongi inside and outside the Kingdom.

Originally, the witches created the creature to kill Yoongi so it would be a clean death for him without getting their hands dirty on the deed but for some reason, said blob rat-out making the witches angry.

They attempted to kill the blob out of frustration but Yoongi didn’t let them and kept them. He was too mesmerized by the odd being.

“Oh hi, Boongi!” Jin happily greets. The blob realising they was found out, immediately runs away to hide somewhere.

Taehyung chuckled.

“He really does acts like a toddler.”

“You’re right. I wonder if the said mystery person on your reading will like Boongi too. They may look terrifying at first glance and is kind of aloof too, so it’ll be hard to gain Boongi’s trust even though that fluffy blob doesn’t have any emotions to begin with.”

Taehyung nods in agreement before looking back at the scattered dice on the table.

Chapter 1

“What the hell?” were the first words that came out of Jimin’s lips as soon as he woke up from his slumber.

He looked around, only to realize that he wasn’t dreaming. Albeit the place looks ethereal, dreamy, or perhaps a product of his imagination.

Everything around him is sparkly, fresh, and serene. He could even hear the wind though it wasn’t windy. He could hear the stream of the river nearby even thought it doesn’t look like it’s moving. He could hear the birds chirping but saw none flying. He can feel the warmth of the grass although they look dewy similar to the leaves of the surrounding trees.

The trees are big and tall but no single bearing fruits can be seen on one of them. However there are a couple of flowers surrounding each of the trees and they all seem to be glowing.

He almost stumbled on the ground when he tried to get up and was confused and concerned at the same time when he realized that his clothes had changed from a regular to a shiny, clothed fabric that was long enough to reach the grass and cover his toes. That was when he realized too, that he is barefoot. His shoes are missing which adds up to his concern.

But on the other hand, the cloth looks majestic! Ethreal like the place he’s at.

Yet he is not sure if this should be called a dress, a gown, or a costume because by the looks of it, this could be very, very expensive.

Why does this fabric seem to be glowing though? he thought. But the outfit only adds more reason to his curiosity to where he’s at.

What on earth is exactly going on and how did I end up wearing this majestic thing?

He swore to all the beings that could hear or see him right now that he had never worn something like this in his entire life nor dreamt of wearing one. He is more of a shirt and jeans boy and if formality calls, suit and tie are his friends.

He tried to check if it has any pockets on wherein he might have had his cell phone in inside of it but alas, he didn’t.

How could he asks for help if he don’t have his phone with him? Maybe Mr. Bang was right all along. He should have always put his phone in his pocket and not leave it anywhere around the house like it isn’t even needed at times like this.

He huffed in confusion when he realized he had been walking on for half an hour now but only to go back to the same spot where he was earlier— infront of the big, tall oak tree. Jimin groaned. 

“What in the world is going on?” he sat on the grass and tried not to cry out of frustration.

It seems to him that he is the only one in this big ass forest. No animals, no other people to see or talk to. Only him.

How did he even get here in the first place when he has no recollection of making plans to go here? What he could only remember was fire.

Fire?

His eyes widened, remembering a piece of information but it also made his head throbbed in pain.

Yes! That’s it!

He was caught in a fire… in his own home because…

… someone tried to kill him when he didn’t give them what they wanted because for Jimin, it is something that could banish the entire humanity which, he doesn’t want to happen but the bad guys wants to.

Because of this, he realized that being the smartest of all wasn’t a good thing after all.

Yes, being the best and smartest provided him anything he had asked and wanted for in exchange for his wisdom but it also became the cause of his death.

Death…

And that is when it dawned on him.

He gulped. Shook his head in denial and fear as he slowly stepped backwards.

Alas , he remembered it now and probably that was the reason why he is here.

His butler, Mr. Bang, the only person who cared for him like a parent does after his parents died in a mysterious accident, the one who had been with him ever since he was born, died in his arms protecting him against the bad people who tried to get what they wanted from Jimin and because of his anger towards them of what they did to his butler/caretaker, he decided to burn the whole mansion. Where all the books, all the hidden knowledge of the world has to offer that only he knows about, he burned it all with him and left nothing to anyone from that world he left behind.

The last thing he remembered was, him doing a sigil using his own blood as he utters an impossible wish wherein his existence to be needed truly in a world he belongs to or just by someone, not just because of his liability before everything turns into ashes.

Now that he remembers it, he isn’t sure whom to ask now if this place where he is at right now is what most would call Heaven or perhaps Hell dressed as paradise since he could see no one besides himself loitering around.

Is this his punishment for killing himself? His punishment was isolation? Does this mean he has to repent of what he had done to himself alone for eternity just because his emotions got the best of him when Mr. Bang got murdered by those greedy men?

Ddaeng, he doesn’t know what is worse anymore. Having your caretaker/butler killed (which the man didn’t deserve to happen to him), killing yourself or staying in an ethereal place as you repent alone for eternity?

He heaved a deep sigh.

“I need something to eat,” he spoke to himself, as he roamed his eyes around to look for a possible food to eat but found none. Not until he saw a single big, green, and juicy-looking green apple.

He gulped in doubt and hunger. The apple he just saw was from the big oak tree. He is sure to himself that he didn’t saw that earlier and how come an oak tree bears an apple?

Suspicious.

He rubbed his eyes to check if his eyes were just playing tricks on him but after doing so, the apple remained hanging on the oak tree.

He heaved a sigh.

“Nope,” he scrunched his nose and decided to just lie on the grass and looked at the deep blue sky. Perhaps it is nighttime already but it doesn’t feel like it, as there is a balance between the light and the dark and he is lying in between. He can see shooting stars falling here and there in different colors as the stars twinkle but there is no moon or sun that he could point in the sky.

He fell asleep in exhaustion and hunger. With all the unanswered questions running through his head included.

By the time he woke up for the second time around, nothing had seem to change. He wasn’t dreaming. He’s still in the unknown, enchanted forest wearing the same silky, sparkly, majestic white cloth. He sighed.

He decided to go back in front of the big oak tree and stared at the hanging green apple.

“I’m not that hungry but looking at you makes me hungry,” he uttered, as he tried to fight the urge to pluck the apple from the tree and eat it.

The reason why he is adamant to pluck the apple was because it someohow reminds him about the Adam and Eve story.

He remembers how a damn single apple caused mortals to be sinners even after they were just born. All because Adam and Eve decidee to eat the apple the snake persuaded them to do so.

Upon realizing this, Jimin immediately checks on the tree to see if there’s any snake hiding, lurking, and waiting for him to sin.

Nope. He might be ‘dead’ already but he is not going to make the same mistake Adam and Eve did. He can’t afford to add another grave sin to what he had already done to himself. Jokes on the snake, hunger isn’t a problem for dead people like him or so he thought. Because why is he hungry then?

He jumped in horror when the big oak tree infront of him magically opened its trunk at the center. Acting like a door, inviting him to get inside.

Of course, he didn’t.

He just checked what’s inside of it from the outside. Scared to dare a step or the tree might eat him or something.

However he gulped when he realised the inside of the oak tree resembled a library.

Uh-oh.

Books are his kryptonite.

He suddenly wants to get in but again, something was stopping him. Like, it was his intuition telling him not to. That it wasn’t his time yet to do so. So he turned his back away from it and huffed like a sad, big bad wolf.

It reminded him of another story though. Similar but not exactly as exactly he’s going through right now with his situation.

It’s always because of that damn curiosity and temptation that they mortals sin.

He remembered the story of Pandora. She shouldn’t have opened that damn box as she was told not to do! Now, look. The world is full of greedy people. Yes, there is knowledge but really, fuck those people who want more. It all started because of that damn curiosity.

He once again laid on the grass and looked at the stars above. He wonders how long could he last the temptation against the apple and the ‘library’ inside the oak tree which mind, is still open to tempt him.

By now, he was slowly drifting into sleep when he suddenly heard screams of fear that made him get up to his feet and search for where the scream was coming from.

He could see no one but the screams were terrifying. Like it was just there next to him. Screaming at him. He can feel it and the screams were getting louder and louder. Asking anyone or someone to help them with the chaos going on. Yes, it is not just one, two, three but many voices combined pleading for help. He was sure he even heard a child’s voice in between.

He gulped and panicked.

Yes, Jimin is scared but, he is someone to forget about his state when someone needs help and he is mad that he couldn’t do anything about it because of his situation.

But then he realised, it probably might be just hallucination or that the forest is playing tricks on him.

He angrily stomped his feet.

“You’re not funny!” Jimin yelled, and raised a middle finger in the air.

He shook his head when the screams didn’t stop as he wanted them to. The best thing he could think of was, to ignore it and relieve himself by washing his face with cool water from the river nearby. That would probably wake his senses up and he kind of feeling thirsty anyway.

He scratched his head when he noticed how the river wasn’t moving at all. It is very still and so calm that he remembers how dangerous still waters are. Not only that. The water was so clear that even the mirror would be envious by how reflective it is.

Jimin warily stepped near the river and dipped his pinky to inspect the water. What he didn’t expect though was for it to be hot which made him stumble backwards in shock.

“The fuck was that? You almost burned my skin!” he accused. Kissing his pinky, hoping the burning sensation would go away.

He huffed and went back to check the river again, face to face.

He can’t see any bubbles forming on the edge nor any smoke coming from the river itself indicating that the water is hot so, why does it almost burned his finger? It also doesn’t have any funny smell in it to cause the water to be that hot.

Jimin decided to just stare at his reflection when he realized that being mad at the river wouldn’t solve anything.

He blinked once. Twice. Thrice, before his eyes widened in surprise.

He screamed so loud that it felt like the whole forest grumbled by the loudness of it.

“What the fuck! What the fuck! What the actual fuck?!” he harshly ruffled his hair in hopes it would turn back to normal and in complete shock when his previous jetblack, short ass hair magically turned to a long, orange with a hint of red hair.

He looked at himself again and noticed how his physical features became more vibrant than he ever was. He had always been aware he is pretty— a lot of people had told him that, but by the way he looks now, he doesn’t know what word could match his looks. Ethereal? It’s something hard to explain even to himself. Uh, incomparable?

Ah, never mind!

There’s too much questions piling up in his head but no answers to be supplied.

He needs to know how dying could change someone’s appearance making it look like he is a god/goddess from the books he had read.

And there it is again. The screams. It comes not just from one but from many different people asking for help making his head hurt.

“Stop! Stop!” he pleads, yelling, covering both of his ears and a single tear from his eyes rolling down his cheeks.

“ Nevermind! I can do this alone!“ a man’s voice said. Interrupting the screams.

Jimin turned his head abruptly to look for the mysterious man who just spoke those admirable words. He can feel the will and determination behind the man’s voice to protect the people around him and Jimin can’t help but to be curious about him.

Nevermind…

It’s just a plain, perhaps simple word and yet, a lot is going on with that one word.

“But it’s impossible to do it alone. You need someone to help you out.” he muttered, “… someone like me perhaps.”

How can this man say that word when everything around him seems to be in chaos? However he admires his bravery.

He held his palm on his chest. Something isn’t right. It’s like there’s something tugging his heart and it beats so angrily. It’s painful. Like there’s longing and it wasn’t because of his old life or because of Mr. Bang’s death.

He took a deep breath before staring back at the river, hoping it would give him answers to his questions or see the mysterious man that made an impact on him with those words of his just now, but was met by the forest behind him burning from the reflection on the river water.

At first, he thought it might be just another illusion by the enchanted forest but then when he finally decided to turn around, he was easily reminded of his own burning home. It was big, scary and unforgiving.

“Hell no! What the hell is going on now?” he asks, annoyed that no one could answer his question.

“I’m in no way gonna die again for the second time around!” he stomped his feet before running towards the river to somehow save himself from the forest fire, embracing to be burned by the hot river water instead of the raging fire but he was wrong and jumping onto the river was a big mistake.

“Wait! Hold on! Hey! Wait!” he yells, as he tries to swim back to the ground.

The river, for some magical reason, began swirling and tries to suck Jimin in and it terrified him, to say the least. He doesn’t know how to swim for goodness sake!

He tried getting out of the water but the river seemed to be getting deeper and deeper, and then suddenly a big wave of water hit his face.

“Help!” he screamed, hoping someone would finally hear him and help him get out of the river, until the very end that he could hold his head above the water, but no one did.

But before he got completely pulled down by the whirlpool of water and loosing his consciousness, he saw a familiar figure sitting inside the big oak tree between his blurry vision looking at him.

Oh, to die again for the second time isn’t really on Jimin’s bucket list.

Chapter 2

“What the fuck!” Jimin complains and tries to keep his head above water level. Until now, he is still confused of what was happening to him, on how he ended up being in the middle of the ocean after being sucked by the river from an enchanted forest moments ago.

Surely, this couldn’t be afterlife, right?

This cannot be his never-ending punishment for killing himself when all he wants was to get away from those greedy people.

The slow exiting of adrenaline from his body is now making him feel tired and it seems luck is not on his side when one of his legs started to cramp. He could feel himself crying in desperation.

For the second time around, he wants to live so bad! He wants to get himself on the ground and get going. He hopes everything that is happening to him right now or what has happened to him has a purpose or else. But this isn’t the time to plan for revenge on anyone especially if that anyone or someone is unknown.

Just when he was about to think of a plan how to save himself, he hears it again.

The screams of terrified people from the other side of the ocean caught his attention and that was when he realized, those screams were coming from a…

“Oh c’mon! Seriously?” he exclaimed, not knowing what to do, he paddled with all his might against the current to the burning Kingdom.

The cries of the people from Leukos grew louder in Jimin’s ears as he got near the shore. He can see the villagers scrambling here and there, trying to save what they could. Kids clinging to their parents, some are crying, others are clueless but there are those who thinks that it is a game initiated by the elders as he could see them laughing.

Jimin mentally slapped himself.

He swore he could have touch the shore by now and got himself out of the ocean but someone isn’t just letting him do just that when a powerful force landed just a few meters away from where he was, making the ocean mad. He could feel his body violently being tossed around like a cloth inside the washing machine.

“Fuck you whoever the fuck you are!” Jimin yells and throws a middle finger in the air. He angrily wipes the water off his face with the palm of his hand. He almost choke by the way, thanks to the great force of bad luck.

He looks around to see if someone could help him get out of the water. Maybe if he shouts for help, someone will rescue him but all he can see are people running from here and there hurrying to do more important things than save a drowning person in the middle of chaos, burning houses, and some fireworks.

Wait… fireworks ?

He looks up again and saw a couple of colorful lights being tossed around the burning kingdom like it’s a plaything.

Lights that he now realized are not fireworks but rather similar to fantasy movies that involve magic like Harry Potter, The Magicians, and the likes.

“Am I at the Olympus or something? What the actual fuck,” he thought.

But if he really was at the Olympus, why is it burning then? Olympus is the home of the gods and goddesses! It should be impossible to be destroyed by a mere mortal rebel not unless it is one of their kind who started the fight or a demi-god would be much acceptable. However Jimin couldn’t comprehend why on earth one would start a fight when it could affect the people living with them?

While he is in the middle of saving himself and analysing where he could be at and from whom the magic came from, he felt something or someone rather grabbing his waist and pulling him out of the water.

He immediately checks on himself to make sure there’s no funny business going on after being in the water for so long (or so he thought). Starting from his head down to his toes. He is indeed alive! Hooray! And no missing limb, of course. Thank heavens!

“I am alive!” he screams in glee, jumping up and down amidst the chaos that is happening, but then, who took him out of the water? He didn’t see anyone coming up to him to save him aside from the feeling that someone grabbed him.

He looked around and saw no one. Well, not until he looks down.

He came face to face with a black blob staring at him with its cat-like round eyes, similar to a real cat when it sees something they are curious about or fascinated.

Jimin blinks and rubs his eyes a few times just to be sure his eyes are not playing tricks on him and yes, it isn’t.

There, standing in front of him is a black blob, a body similar to Venom that has an amorphous, liquid-like form but unlike it, this blob seems to have tentacles just like an octopus when clearly, it resembles a cat.

Jimin knows something is wrong with him because he is sure someone who is in their right mind should be scared by now seeing this creature in front of them but to him, he finds it adorable. Especially when it mirrors his move, tilting his head to the side before smiling widely at him. Oh they got fangs!

This blob is not dangerous at all, at least to Jimin, because this blob infront of him is undoubtedly the one who took him out of the water. It saved him!

How could he be scared of it? If anything, he finds it adorable.

Before he could even utter a word or touch one of its tentacles to shake it as a sign of gratitude, a scream from a terrified child nearby was heard.

Oh, right. There was chaos going on.

He knew he shouldn’t be chasing after death when his life had just been spared but he couldn’t just stand there and be left alone doing nothing when he is perfectly capable of offering his help to those in need.

He just hopes the enemy is not someone who uses magic. After all, if they do, he wouldn’t be too much of a help because he doesn’t have one to counter magic. Or so he thought.

The moment they arrived where the scream came from, he and the black blob were greeted by five men dressed as what would seem to Jimin as soldiers cornering a female lad and it made Jimin’s stomach twist in disgust. They’re not there to kill her. It was of something else. Probably use her first before killing her afterwards.

Disgusting.

“Fuck off,” he said, after they noticed their arrival. He swore he saw how the men eyed him like it was their first time seeing a human and food at the same time, it made him want to puke.

Yeah. Fuck off.

“Well, well, well… Is she your sister, young lady?” one of them snickers, eyeing him up and down like he is a piece of meat.

Jimin raised a brow at what was said to him.

She?

He doesn’t have any recollection of having breasts or a vagina at all so how come these men call him a she when he is a he?

Oh, right. The hair. How could he forget about that. Tsk. Long hair be damned.

He turned to look at the black blob and saw how the creature seemed to be angry at the men in front of them. He smiled to himself. Seems like this creature has emotions like of humans. Adorable!

One of the men tried to grab Jimin’s wrist but the creature was fast enough to block the attack, resulting for the man to stumble on the ground.

This action raised concern amongst the other and tried to stop the black blob from defending the mortal but Jimin was quick to grab a sword from one of the men and defended the creature even before the creature could defend themselves.

Good thing, Jimin learned how to use a sword in his previous life but he didn’t expect that a real sword would be that heavy. He only held a sword once because one of his clients gifted him one but it was a long time ago abd it was light not heavy like the one he is holding right now and he didn’t expect that he would be using what he had learned in real life, here, in this place where it seems the time was moved backwards. Like he was in old Korea or something but with magic involved.

“You guys get out of here. I’ll handle this,” says Jimin, as he defends them from the men, attempting to capture them to fulfull their ungodly desires.

The creature looked at him like it was trying to convey what Jimin had just said to them so, he tilted his head towards the exit for the creature to understand and the black blob was quick to wrap one of his tentacles around the kid’s waist and run towards the door, leaving Jimin behind. One of the men tried to stop them from running away but Jimin stopped them. He smirked.

“Why not play around with someone your age?” he challenged them, wielding the sword he stole from one of them, earning the men’s attention.

He hasn’t killed anyone before from his previous life but here? Maybe. Who knows?

Especially if these men in front of him are angry at him for letting one of their prospects got away of their hold which really sickens him. That was a child! A mother fucking innocent child.

“You’re too brave for a woman,”

“Maybe, but just so you know how I wish I was, so you could experience getting your asses whipped by one,” he exclaimed before charging towards them as he held the sword tight in his hands.

May it be adrenaline or after-life effects or the fact that maybe he got transported to another world, which he can’t confirm yet but he isn’t going to allow anyone to be degraded and killed just because they seem weak. He was never pleased with this kind of judgment even before and yes, until now he still isn’t.

He wiped the blood off that smeared on his cheeks with the back of his palm and sighed when he saw his reflection in the mirror.

First day in the after life and here he is, commiting another sin. Way to go, Jimin!

He got out of the house, leaving the dead bodies behind, and walked towards the scramming people trying to put out the big fire. Honestly, there was nothing to be saved as it already took a big portion of each of the houses but then, he heard screams of fear on some of the houses and he was quick to understand that there were some that are still trapped inside of their houses.

They were trying to put out the fire but it wasn’t enough because the shoreline is no way near where the fire is, so putting it out with small pails of water on intervals wouldn’t help. It only makes the fire worse than it already was, the way the villagers throw the bucket of water into the big fire.

Jimin wants to help, really. He quickly realised magic seemed to be a thing in this world but not for everyone. It seems that the villagers are just like any normal mortal. They are powerless just like him.

Or so he thought.

He almost stumbled backward when an image flashed before him. Like, it was real.

He is yet again standing in front of the big oak tree from earlier. He sees himself entering the tree but to his surprise, he was lead to his own library.

Before he could even wander around in awe surrounded by his thousands of books, his attention was caught by the sound of one of them being pulled out of the shelf and he almost stumbled in horror when he saw said book from nearby took itself out from the shelf and fly towards his direction.

It opened itself to a page that magically and theoretically could help put the fire out to the burning houses.

One of the many people who was trying to help put the fire out notices Jimin’s presence. He was surprised to see such beauty amidst the chaos. He was also curious as to why his hair color was different from theirs and then, he saw his clothing.

It was shining, shimmering and even his Father’s Hanbok who happens to be the King couldn’t compare to what the stranger was wearing, like they were pulled straight out of a dream. Like how the main character on of those books his uncle reads to him when he was young was decribed.

Jungkook felt himself being mesmerized by the stranger’s beauty. He felt wanting to walk towards Jimin but then, he was glad his brain was still working despite his admiration when he noticed blood splattered on the stranger’s clothes and a sword beside him dripping with blood.

He immediately came to a conclusion that he is one of the enemies so he took his sword out to confront the stranger but froze when he saw Jimin’s weird movements.

He moves elegantly. Like a snake trying to lure its prey, copying exactly the movements in the book that only he can see.

It was a movement that he thinks is from different mixed martial arts but enough to summon one of the elements to put out the fire. It was similar to Aang’s air bending and it is called Aerokinesis.

Jimin had to focus all his energy in doing it, so it was fair to say that he did it perfectly. Perfect enough to summon a strong gust, leading the villagers and Jungkook himself to duck down otherwise they will be taken along by the wind.

“The fire’s gone!” one of the villagers cried in happiness.

“Oh my! Did he did it! Is he a witch?”

“Is he a good one or a bad one?”

“Probably a good one! He helped us put out the fire!”

Witch?

The moment Jimin’s trance from his library and the big oak tree disappeared, he could feel himself passing out but when he saw from the corner of his eyes the same black blob that helped him, still trying to do its job, he fight his own tired body and stood to follow the creature behind to help him.

“You! Wait!” he slightly turned his head towards the voice that called him and when he saw Jungkook chasing after him, he thought he was in deep trouble because of what he did.

What if Aerokinesis is forbidden here or that a Witch, just like what he had heard from one of the villagers called him is a no-no here? Just like the old times, he thought, and turned his head back to run from Jungkook.

Luckily, he saw a red cloak lying on the ground and took it to cover himself as he tries to lead the prince astray.

Chapter 3

Jimin tried to outrun Jungkook as he tries to catch up with the black blob from earlier.

Fuck the long gown he’s wearing, it’s making it hard for his legs to run.

Fuck the cloak too, for it making it hard for him to see as he continues not to reveal his identity to the young man who insists on following him.

Why does he keep following him anyway?

“Wait! I said, wait!” yells Jungkook, as he tries to catch up with Jimin’s speed.

“Sorry, darling, but I have a lot to catch up on rather than to chit-chat with you,” yelled Jimin back.

Oh, how he wishes there will be a forest that would magically appear to separate them so he can mislead Jungkook and stop him from following him. And as if Aidios can hear his plea, a forest did appeared and so, without any further thinking how his wish happened, he ran towards the other side. Separating him from Jungkook.

Jungkook was surprised to see the forest’s appearance. He is a hundred percent sure that there was no forest there before. He is always out of the castle so its sudden appearance is questionable.

Probably has something to do with the witch that he was running after.

Said witch just ran inside the forest without a care whether it’s been there before or not. He contemplates for a minute whether it is a good idea to follow Jimin.

He noticed how tall the trees were, at this sudden forest that showed, to the point where they bent similar to the shape of a rainbow, and the leaves were all sparkly green, and there was only one straight path going to wherever the end led and though Jungkook was having doubts, he still tried to run after Jimin.

Tried.

Because the moment Jungkook’s foot stepped on the forest path, the green sparkly forest turned to a deep copper pumpkin color that resembled the autumn season, similar to the fiery, burnt orange hair of Jimin.

“Holy shit!” exclaimed Jungkook, when a fire from nowhere starts burning the trees down. Preventing him to tail Jimin. It seems to him that the forest itself is helping the witch to be where he needs to be at without any delay. He groaned in dismay.

Meanwhile Jimin turned a little to check on Jungkook when he heard him shriek and was surprised to see that the tree leaves turned the exact color of his hair and that there was now a raging fire going on behind him. His eyes widened and even though he wanted to go back to help him, he couldn’t.

He’s way too far now plus the fire won’t allow him to, so he does what he thinks is best— to follow the path where it leads him to be.

Dead leaves started falling and at first, Jimin thought it was because of the forest burning but when he looked up, his eyes widened in surprise and awe when he saw a graciously, flying Phoenix just right above him, with eyes looking down at him.

The said phoenix crowed upon meeting eyes with him and started flapping its wings, causing Jimin to cover his eyes to prevent dust or ashes from entering.

The moment the gust stopped, he noticed the Phoenix was now a little ahead of him. Like the bird wants him to follow him wherever. Of course, he had no other choice but to follow the majestic, mythical bird as again, there’s only one path too, to follow to this forest he got himself into.

It is as if he has other choices.

He had been through a couple of weird stuffs already starting from that enchanted forest where he was at probably half an hour ago. Besides what more following a mythical bird could do to him, right?

He also still has the sword with him, so if something were to happen, he could defend himself physically.

It was a long run and when he felt his legs were about to fail him, the Phoenix came to a halt and vanished to thin air, leaving Jimin alone on his own.

“Oh, c’mon!” he huffs in annoyance as he tries to catch his breath.

Before Jimin could even sit on the ground to rest, he heard a commotion not far from where he was at. It seems to him that he was led to the palace, which heavily resembled Old Korean palaces.

Did he travel back in time? If so, does that mean that the people in the future where he came from, have lost their abilities to have such magical powers? he wondered.

“What is it this time?” he muttered to himself, before deciding to get closer to where the arguing voices was coming from.

“Oh, would you look at that everyone! You’re so-called King can’t do anything to save you. A King is supposed to protect his people, the palace, right?” exclaimed the arrogant man that Jimin thinks is also a King.

So does that mean he’s in the middle of a freaking war? Perhaps. It wasn’t that hard to figure actually given the situation he was in.

He looked onto the opposite side where the arrogant King was, and searched for the other King this man was referring to.

For Jimin, Yoongi doesn’t look like a King— at all. His body doesn’t compare to the arrogant King and he thinks, he and Yoongi shares the same height.

Probably the said King was just an inch taller than he, and it wasn’t like he wants to brag about it but was instead relieved to know that someone who is referred to as King, shares the same height as him for he had always thought that to be king you need to be tall, muscular and handsome man like that arrogant King in front of Yoongi.

Yoongi is handsome than the arrogant King though. That, he can confirm.

The man has luxurious blonde hair, a cat-like eyes and an unbeatable aura in him. He wears a special hanbok fitted for a King but that wouldn’t compare to how shiny Jimin is. Even the arrogant King was no way near it.

“Oh yeah? Say that again when you’re no longer in the arms of your filthy witches!”

Yoongi’s statement angered the witches standing behind the arrogant King and in a single flip of the hand of one of the witches, a couple of commoners were thrown away violently away from the palace.

Jimin gulped in terror. Of course, he isn’t naive that there are bad witches in movies or books, but to witness it in front of him, makes his insides feel something for them— disgust. Bad witches. They are the ones that deserve to be burned at the stake.

But, Jimin has to remind himself, not to judge quickly. He just arrive here. In this world. He knew nothing about the rivalry.

Witches aren’t necessarily bad. According yo some books he had read before. Maybe it was because of what they practice that people label them as bad but really, it is hard to define what is good and bad.

But what he saw just now is an unjustified reason for a witch to hurt innocent individuals who weren’t even the one who accused them being lowly, when they could have just done that to the King himself.

This, he can consider that that witch is bad. Or perhaps all of them to begin with, but again he knew nothing of their rivalry so he’ll just have to wait and see what’s next.

“No,” he whispers to himself, almost teary. Feeling the pain of the commoners who were just thrown away violently on the other side of the Kingdom.

While the two Kings argue, some of the villagers that were left gathered behind Jin, Taehyung, Hoseok, and Namjoon. Then the prince arrrived from nowehere, trying to catch his breath, and was flabbergasted to see one of the witches that were there standing infront of them.

“Mother,” he muttered.

Jimin turned to look at the enemy’s side. Don’t know why he did that, but he had a feeling Jungkook’s mother was with the enemies side. The way how Jungkook’s eyes screams hurt and longing to the other.

Jimin’s chest ache at the sight infront of him and had to look away for a minute.

“Jungkook… son ,” says the witch who was standing right beside the arrogant King.

Jungkook hesitates whether it was okay for him to get near her, who had been tagged by his father as an enemy after her betrayal to Yoongi and Leukos.

He longs for his mother but he is not sure whether she longs for him too, when he can still remember clear as day the time he begged for her to stay, she left him without a second thought like she wasn’t his mother at all that he’d been with for quite some years.

“Don’t,” Yoongi’s stern disapproval made him stop in his tracks. He was just a few steps away from his mother to hug her.

“Appa,” Jungkook wants to cry. He knew by heart his mother betrayed them and the kingdom of Leukos but he is just a kid. A kid who’s longing for his mother’s care.

“My, my. What a bad father you are, Yoongi. Not allowing your son to be with his mother, eh?” says the arrogant king, smirking.

Hearing the arrogant King’s words made Jungkook feel somewhat humiliated even though the King who just spoke is siding with him. Probably because he can feel that it wasn’t a genuine sympathy for him.

“Stop fucking around with my son, you nitwit! You don’t understand how he feels because you always get your way to things just like how you get that bi—” exclaimed Yoongi but stopped midpart when he saw how she glared at him. Although for Yoongi what he’s trying to claim her was true.

“Watch that filthy mouth of yours if you want to have a painless death, you good for nothing of a try-hard King!” warns the King, slowly making his way towards Yoongi as he pulls his sword on the side of his pants to continue their duel from earlier.

Guess, the arrogant King himself shares no difference with how Jungkook feels when it comes to Yoongi’s ex-wife.

Probably because the two now shares a relationship, is what Jimin thinks. There’s no way Jimin sees Yoongi’s ex-wife will side to the other King for nothing.

“Appa!” exclaimed Jungkook, and quickly turned to Yoongi’s to make use of his body as a shield for his father not to get hurt. But then, Boongi arrived out of nowhere and quickly pulled Jungkook away from Yoongi.

Boongi’s sudden appearance to protect Jungkook irritated the hell out of Jungkook’s mother and with the flick of her hand, pushed Boongi away, causing him to lose balance, dropping Jungkook midair while the two Kings fell into a duel.

“Kookie!” yelled Taehyung, which caught the attention of Yoongi, forgetting to defend himself against the enemy causing him to stumble on the ground too, as the arrogant King laughed at him. He was about to hit Yoongi with his sword to kill him but then, to everyone’s surprise, Jungkook stayed midair. Earning gasps from the villagers of Leukos.

It was none of the witches doing from Erebos. Even Jungkook’s own mother didn’t thought of keep him away from harm. So why of course this scene would caused confusion and commotion amongst the villagers and a chance for Boongi to pull Jungkook safely to the ground.

“How?” asks Jungkook to himself until he noticed Jimin at the corner of his eyes. His eyes widened in realisation. Jimin helped him to safety!

Does that Jimin isn’t one of them? Does that Jimin there was still a witch left in Leukos without his Father’s knowledge? Lucky day for them indeed. They still have a chance to win. Well, if Jimin decides to help them.

“It’s him!” he yelled, excitedly.

Jimin felt his feet turned cold upon realising what he had just done without thinking.

Can you blame him though? He was mad at Jungkook’s mother for goodness sake! Who lets their kid be hurt even when said kid is no longer really a kid? That’s her son, FYI.

“Who?” asks Jin, surprised that Jungkook immediately had forgot the fact that he almost got himself hurt because of his mother’s doing. He and Taehyung looks at each other and then back to Jungkook while they nurse his wounds.

“The witch!” he exclaimed, a little too excited for the other witches liking.

Even the two Kings duelling stopped mid-fight out of surprise and curiousity of what Jungkook had just said.

Jimin’s eyes widened in horror as he stood sweating from his spot.

“Oh c’mon? Seriously?” Jimin could feel his heart about to burst from his rib cage in fear of what would happen now that his existence had been known by the rest of the villagers and er, witches but again, should he even be afraid of what was going to happen to him when he had already faced death more than twice?

“Witch?” Taehyung turns to look for the witch Jungkook had just told them. Realising that this was exactly what the divination from the past moons ago had been telling him, telling them. It means the stranger who will make a big impact to Leukos, Aidios even, and their King’s life has arrived.

Jimin has arrived.

Chapter 4

“A witch, you say? Did someone hit your head, love, or do you just have a hobby of imagining things like that witch wannabe friend of yours beside you?” asks one of the witches, whose name is Hyuna, mocking Jungkook.

Her statement earned some giggles from the two witches beside her except from Irene, Jennie, and Suzy.

“But…” Jungkook’s heart aches because although hid mother didn’t laugh at her friend’s sarcastic remark, it is obvious that she pities him. How her son that she raised turned out, as she was expecting more from him as the Prince. The heir to Yoongi’s throne and a son of a witch.

“No! He’s right. Prince Jungkook is telling the truth! I know what I saw and I know this witch is not from Erebos. This witch was no coward unlike the six of you. That witch helped us put the fire out!” exclaimed one of the villagers, supporting Jungkook’s claim.

“Why, of course. I shouldn’t be surprise,” sighed Sunmi, “There’ll always be a dumb supporter of the royal family who believes whatever claim they say is true. You do realize that this witch you’re claiming that you say is real is making us laugh right now, yes?” she turned her head towards the villager’s direction who spoke badly about them, “Have you forgotten what your King did to us witches?”

“Have you forgotten the real reason why it was just us now that was left and that some of us who were born and had lived here in Leukos had to flee and chose Erebos because your fucking of a goddamn King, killed most of our relatives, our race?” she continues, waves of anger piling up that was visible in her tone of voice before calming down with a sweet smile that broke into her lips, “So, there can’t be another witch other than us. Especially a witch that will help you and your King after what he did in the past.”

“No,” Taehyung disagrees.

“No?” mimics Nayeon before insulting him, “Oh, I see now what you mean. Another incorrect reading, witch wannabe?”

This time around, the six witches laughed at Taehyung who felt ashamed and hurt at the comment but Jin was quick to put his hands over his shoulders to comfort him.

“Well, I rather put my trust on a witch wannabe than to put it on the likes of you that hurt people,” says Jin, shielding both Taehyung and Jungkook.

Irene rolled her eyes and sighed.

“Uh, please— can we get over this already? I want to take my rest now,” exclaimed Jennie, yawning as she looks around the villagers and some soldiers gathered behind Jin, Namjoon, and Hoseok. She smirks.

“If one of my witches says so,” says the arrogant King, twisting his hand against the sword’s handle to put a bit more pressure so he could stab Yoongi with ease. It will be an instant death for him. He smiled in delight.

He can’t wait to claim Yoongi’s throne and reign over Aidios and make himself the most powerful and feared King, along side his six beautiful witches. Next to Irene, Yoongi’s ex-wife, as his Queen.

However Boongi wasn’t a fan of the arrogant King’s idea so he helps Yoongi to win his fight. The blob’s not going to let anyone sit on Yoongi’s throne other than him or his son, Jungkook. No one else’s.

“This isn’t one of your dumb games you play with your King, you piece of shit!” the man says, forcefully kicking Boongi’s body away from shielding Yoongi, “Witches! You know what to do.”

The witches nod in agreement.

“Boongi!” yells Taehyung and Jungkook in unison. Seeing that Boongi had been captured by the witches’ magic that consists of a shaped like a thread, immobilizing the blob from helping Yoongi further.

Hoseok, the soldier general, quickly pulled his sword out and ran towards Boongi to help the blob and tried to cut the thread-like magic coming from the witches.

Albeit he was able to cut through one of them, it wasn’t sufficient enough to release the blob before he felt himself being thrown away by Sunmi.

Luckily, Namjoon, Yoongi’s advisor, followed after Hoseok and was quick to catch him before he could even fall on the ground.

“You alright?” he asks.

“Of course, not! Didn’t you just saw what happened to me? I was thrown just like that! Like a dead leaf!” Hoseok huffs, earning a smug smile from the advisor.

“Oh, I’m sorry for asking ’coz I thought you had a plan before running to help Boongi.”

“Oh fuck off! As if you have one.”

“Oh, I have. I wouldn’t be the King’s advisor for nothing,” he smirks, before turning his head back to check on Jin.

Hoseok followed, and saw an arrow passed them and hit one of the witches on the shoulder, earning a painful groan.

“Who did that?” asks Nayeon, angrily.

“That is your plan? To use Prince Jin’s archery expertise? You know they’ll get back to him, right? And shooting the witches with an arrow will just anger the witches more, right?” exclaimed Hoseok in disbelief.

“Of course, I do but at least their hold on Boongi will be less now that one or some of them will lose focus on whatever shit they’re doing to immobilize them.”

Another arrow from the Prince dances on the air and hit Hyuna effortlessly.

Jin had always been skilled in archery which is why he could pass as a member of the Army but Hoseok refuses to let him join as he is the Prince. A person who needs to be protected like Yoongi and Jungkook.

“You!” Hyuna exclaimed, glaring at Jin as she held her bleeding arm before flicking her hands in the air but Taehyung was quick to pull Jin to safety as Jungkook instructed the villagers to hide somewhere safe, away from the witches harm.

Their safety comes first before them and if worse comes to worst, it should only be them to be on the battleground as it is their duty to protect them.

“Where are you? Why are you still hiding?” asks Taehyung to himself, as he tries to search for the witch that Jungkook and the villagers mentioned.

Taehyung’s pretty sure his divination was correct versus what Nayeon was trying to tell him. It couldn’t be a misread as it had been the same for the past six moons. Exactly how the runes had showed him. Their Kingdom facing its downfall. The seventh moon starting to appear in the dusk sky and it isn’t like just any regular full moon. So no, Nayeon’s insult to Taehyung be damned.

He’s pretty sure that the reading is correct and is happening now but where is this mysterious person the runes are telling him could be hiding from? Why isn’t this person showing themself? What’s stopping them?

One could argue that the moon is pretty with its different shapes showing each night, hiding or not behind the skies and the colors that it supplies that vary from white to yellow, or if perhaps the moon feels fancy, it will show colors like red or blue, but tonight, the moon blooms a different color.

And not just any color as it’s the first to happen in Aidios and probably the rarest of the rare color the moon had ever emitted for hundreds of years— the moon was orange.

The witches were in awe upon seeing the moon probably because for them, it was a sign that something good was about to happen— that, they would win tonight’s battle against Leukos.

That they will finally be able to rule Aidios along side Kai, the King of Erebos.

“Just like the color of the witch’s hair,” muttered Jungkook.

“What did you say?” asks Taehyung upon hearing Jungkook’s words.

He was about to reply to him but their attention was caught down when they got hit by Jin’s body after being tossed forcefully by Hyuna in her anger at what he did to her and strangled him with her invincible rope.

“Samchon!” Jungkook hurriedly tried to help Jin remove the invincible rope that was held by a laughing Hyuna from afar but was no avail as he couldn’t see the ends of it to cut.

Jungkook was about to dare Hyuna to a duel without any use of magic to set free his uncle from pain when Irene stopped him.

He was so confused whether his mother was trying to protect him from Hyuna or if she sees him as an eyesore, interrupting them.

He turned to look at his Father who was still fighting Kai along side Hoseok and Namjoon but by the looks of it, Namjoon’s almost at the edge already as he is not used to physical fights. While Hoseok moves a little slower than usual and if being honest, he won’t be surprised if one of the witches are using their magic against him as it isn’t a secret that he and Yoongi are very skilled when it comes to sword fights.

Yoongi looks exhausted. He had been fighting and defending the people of Leukos since the attack began hours ago. It’s been a while since they were put in a problem like this and for Jungkook, it seems to him that this might already be the end of everything. The downfall of the kingdom of Leukos.

He thinks that even if Jimin shows up and decides to help them (if he isn’t an enemy pretending to be a hero), it will still be too late for them to win. Six witches and the king of Erebos who still has a lot of stamina and energy in them versus him? Who is he joking with? Jimin’s outnumbered.

Meanwhile, there are a lot of things that are happening right now with Jimin. With all the questions he has in mind and seeing infront of him, he still can’t decide whether to help the people of Leukos or not.

If he does help, how will he help them without being seen by the others? But he guesses that really won’t matter now that he saw how devastatingly awful the black blob was becoming and how Yoongi is also being affected by it.

It didn’t take him long to realise that perhaps Boongi and Yoongi might be sort of related— physical attributes or magic wise? Who knows. He just came here in this world.

“Such a pity you won’t be able to see us reign over Leukos, Boongi,” says Suzy, smirking.

“Right, but also a good time for me to no longer see who you came from. Your death is also gonna be his death, isn’t that disgustingly sweet, hmm?” Irene made sure to put a little more strength to her magic that she and her co-witches had put, to weaken its body quickly along with Yoongi whose being stubborn and won’t easily accept defeat even if it means dying while he continuously fights Kai alone and coughs blood in between yields.

“Come, take this hyung,” says Taehyung, as he helps Jin to drink the magical water he made from the bottle he always brings with him just in case an emergency happens such as this, “You won’t die, okay? You can’t.”

“Thank you,” Jin manages a smile, bringing relief to Taehyung.

“This is taking way too long than I had imagined. Let’s finish this,” says Irene, as she eyed Yoongi from where she stands with an unexplainable feeling building on her chest as she sees his suffering.

“Eomma!” Jungkook calls, teary-eyed, “Stop hurting Boongi! Stop hurting Appa! And please … stop hurting me.”

Irene clenches her jaw when she heard his plea but before she could even feel a small amount of guilt, Suzy called her out.

“There’s nothing to worry about, dear sisters,” she reminds them before putting a little more of her magic that she had to end Boongi’s life who was now slowly accepting its death as its body begins to weaken.

“Boongi, no!” Jungkook was now full on crying. Seeing Boongi’s suffering and Yoongi’s thriving to win.

He can’t stand seeing the blob giving up, who he considers like his younger sibling since the blob practically starts living with them and seeing him slowly lose the will to defend himself against the witches who created him, it makes him mad that he has to do something to help them. But how?

By now his anger’s starting to build up towards his mother, Irene, who doesn’t feel any remorse in what she’s doing along with her evil witch friends and Kai.

He hates that he’s seeing Boongi, his Father, and all the other people that are here in the kingdom of Leukos suffer more than they should have in the arms of their enemy.

They’re all trying to win this war— fight and survive, since this whole ordeal started so why can’t he do the same? Exactly. He’ll fight, use all of his remaining energy to help those around him in need. He can’t just stand here and do nothing but cry. He rather die doing something, even if it means his chances of winning against them are low as he isn’t like his mother, who has magic than he can use, as witches can only be women and born one, he will fight and defend the people of Leukos just like what Yoongi had been doing since the war between Erebos and Leukos started.

He knows Yoongi’s already exhausted from all the fighting and helping from earlier but as the King, who had promised his people to protect them from any situations… like his Father, he must endure and fight.

He spares Taehyung a quick glance who he admires for a long time now since they were both little kids. He helps everyone in his own little way as a beginner witch and for that, who is he not to admire such pure and brave act? He smiled when their eyes met amidst the chaos that was happening around them and found a sense of comfort when Taehyung smiled back at him.

He clenches the handle of his sword before standing up, mustering all the courage and strength he has left before charging towards the witches.

Irene was surprised by Jungkook’s action and before she could even stop her son from doing something dumb (as she wanted to keep him alive), Jennie was quick to flick her hands and aim magic toward Jungkook before she could even stop and tell Jennie or any of the other witches that it should only be her to deal with him. She anxiously gulped and wish it doesn’t hit her son.

Jungkook saw Jennie’s magic going towards him, so he did his best to protect himself. He used his sword as a shield and prayed that his sword could handle her magic.

Well, it did.

Almost.

However since swords aren’t designed to handle magic, it created a small crack in its blade and before it could even receive more damage because Jungkook was stubborn to move from where he stood, as he was almost halfway from the witches to save Boongi’s life and as well as his Father, Jennie sent another magic his way to hopefully stop his will to fight.

Jungkook knew they would stop him from getting any further so he was no longer surprised by what Jennie did, but wished she let him advance a little more from his place before doing so. He tried using his sword again as a shield so that if in case it finally broke apart, the impact of him being thrown somewhere wouldn’t be that painful.

Of course, the sword finally breaks into two by the time her magic hit his sword once more and by now he was already expecting to be in midair or feel any pain in his body due to hitting a brick, a tree, or something hard after being thrown away but no.

He remained standing like someone’s behind him, keeping him in place just like earlier when he almost got thrown to the ground. His eyes widened in realisation when he came face to face with the person who he was running after earlier standing beside him. It was the beautiful witch with fiery orange hair but right now, Jimin had still kept the cloak to hides face. Only his long hair was showing.

Everyone was stunned by Jimin’s sudden appearance whereas Taehyung couldn’t hide his amused reaction and excitement. I knew it! I was right , he thought to himself.

“Is it…?” Jin asks as he turned to see Taehyung who nodded without hesitation.

“Yes! Yes, Hyung!”

“So, a witch, huh?”

“I didn’t know it was gonna be a witch but as long as this person is exactly what the runes are telling us then it should be fine. We’ll just have to convince the King.”

Jin smugly smirks at Taehyung. Of course, he remembers what his reading was.

“Took the witch long to show themself.”

“Perhaps for a good reason.”

“Maybe. You think she’s pretty?”

“Hyung! I already told you we can’t just assume their gender! What if the witch is a man like me?”

“Honestly, the witch’s too pretty for a boy, Tae-ssi. Just like you. I almost thought he was a she, as he was way more beautiful than the King’s late wife.” exclaimed one of the villagers and the others nod their heads in approval, only those few who had seen Jimin’s face of course.

“Really?” asks Jin, amused about the information.

“Yes. He is! His hair color perfectly resembles the moon right now, Prince Jin, just like the color of a bonfire during festivities.”

Jin gasps. Pleased to what he was hearing.

Meanwhile…

“It’s you! You finally showed up!” exclaimed Jungkook in glee, which made Irene and the other witches curious of Jimin’s sudden appearance. Impossible! How could there be another ‘legit’ witch left in Leukos?

“Calm down, buddy. I don’t want to gather any more of other people’s attention than I’m getting now,” says Jimin as he held Jungkook by his shoulder to stop him from jumping like a happy child.

He curses himself for acting abruptly without a plan in mind. For all he knows, he can no longer just stand there and watch and let the witches kill the blob and get Jungkook hurt and so are the others.

“My name’s Jungkook by the way,” he happily chirps, “And why are you still wearing that cloak? You’re not ugly.”

Jimin turned his head a little to Jungkook, surprised at how he perceives people wearing cloaks but again, it wasn’t like an unusual comment since even from the place where he came from, the ones wearing robes on normal days are perceived as weird (given that they are already in the modern era and if you’re ain’t a model on a runway show then there’s no exception) and those who wears hoodies are stalkers or like what Jungkook had mentioned— ugly.

But beauty is in the eye of the beholder and is subjective.

“Because I’m trying to keep my identity hidden,” he replied.

“Why? Is it because you’re a witch and you’re afraid Father might kill you?”

“No! Of course, not. I have faced death more than a mere mortal should have and enough chit-chatting. We still need to rescue that blob,” says Jimin, pointing at Boongi who seems to notice him and for some reason, tries to get out of the witch’s hold again. Like it gained some energy or hope seeing hin.

“His name is Boongi and yes, you’re right! We need to save him.”

“What are you waiting for then? Here,” he hands his sword from earlier to Jungkook and he looks at Jimin with excitement running throughout his body.

“You’re gonna use your magic?”

“No, you distract them while I get the Blob.”

“What?” before Jungkook could even ask more questions to Jimin, he was already running towards Boongi’s direction, enough for his long orange hair to catch the attention of the witches and especially Yoongi as it resembles fire for him.

“Remember not to tear your eyes off of your enemy especially when it’s me,” exclaimed Yoongi before using all his remaining strength to have Kai stumbled on the ground, leaving him swordless.

Kai smirked.

“Seems like you weren’t able to kill all the witches that you swore you hate and have one spared without your knowledge,”

Yoongi remained quiet but was baffled on how this mysterious orange-haired witch survived when he knew most of them had been long dead already, and that the ones that had survived fled to Erebos, leaving only Taehyung whom he spared was left for the kingdom of Leukos.

And why does it suddenly become a good thing that there’s still one skilled witch left in his kingdom unbeknownst to him, hiding from him? he thought.

Truthfully, Yoongi could use this witch to teach Taehyung if they’re a skilled one, but if not, and the said witch won’t cooperate with them then, might as well they end up like the first ones— dead. Body buried six feet on the ground. Rotting. Useless.

However he isn’t deaf enough to hear what his son and one of the villagers said. That Jimin had helped them. Maybe Jimin is a good witch unlike…

“Jokes on you, that witch is mine .” before he could even think of what to say, Yoongi’s possessive mouth had betrayed him. Although he hasn’t seen their face nor prove their worth towards him but still, it seems to him that he needs to have this witch on his side no matter what. So no, Jimin belongs to him. He will have him no matter what.

“Since when did you have a change of heart? You loathe them, right? Therefore, that witch is mine to have and take!” insists Kai, pulling his sword back before charging at Yoongi who was able to counter his attack.

“Unfortunately, I’m greedier than you think you are, Kai. That witch will stay here. On Leukos. On my side as long as I want. I claim that witch as mine.” Yoongi smirks.

Chapter 5

“Hiding behind a cloak, eh?” mocks Hyuna, looking at the witches beside her who were also curious at Jimin’s sudden appearance. For some reason, they can’t sense any type of aura, energy, or magic from him.

“I assume you’re also like him , a witch wannabe?” adds Nayeon, as she eyes Taehyung from afar, “There’s nothing special I could feel about you. No aura.”

“You, people of Leukos, seemed to be out of your minds already, hmm? Thinking you’re a witch that helped them put out the fire and that you have magic like us just because you’re wearing that cloak. Please— What trick did you do for them believe you’re same as us?” she challenged.

Jimin remained quiet. Just staring at Nayeon. Not because he don’t know what to reply to her. On the contrary, there’s a lot that he can say that’ll have their mouths shut but he refused because unbeknownst to them, Jimin is having yet another episode of weird shit in him that only he can see and feel.

He don’t understand why he’s seeing these but one thing is for sure, he will use it to his advantage if that means that’s his only chance to save Boongi or anyone that the witches are yet to hurt again.

“You didn’t seem to be deaf when you talked to the Prince a while ago so, why aren’t you answering to any of us? You aren’t mocking us. are you?” asks Jennie before flicking her fingers to aim at Jimin but he just dodges it with ease.

“Protect yourself, buddy. I can handle myself.” says Jimin, as he pulls Jungkook away from the ball of energy that almost hit him, “Now this is the part where you will distract them as I try to cut their hold.”

“How? You saw what happened earlier with my sword, right?”

“Use the moon and your sword’s reflection against them. That should work but only for a small amount of time. Enough for me to do what I have to do.”

“And how is that supposed to work, uhm, Mister Witch?” asks Jungkook, hesitantly with flushed cheeks as he tries to get a clear view of Jimin’s face from the inside of the cloak that he was wearing.

“Like I said, buddy, reflection . If they try to aim another magic towards you or at anyone here, use the moon’s reflection as it is gonna act like your magic from nature itself. Whereas your sword will be your medium to cast their magic back to them but be careful not to let their magic touch the sword for more than a few seconds. Their magic should bounce back as immediately as how they try to give it to you, understand?”

Jungkook nods, amused at how Jimin explains it to him so easily like a well-rounded witch is, just like his mother and the other witches that are her allies.

“How come you never showed up ’til now?”

“Because I’m not from here. Also, I’m not a witch. I’m a mere bookkeeper. “

“Bookkeeper?”

“Yes. Yes, I am.” Jimin replied before pulling Jungkook’s hand that was holding the sword to counter Sunmi’s attack and the younger was surprised how the magic that she tried to aim at them bounced back to her, hitting her and making her fall to the ground. Not only did it surprise the villagers but also the witches, making their eyes widen.

“How?” asks Suzy, baffled, before trying to shoot her shot but Jungkook tried to do it on his own and was yet again able to counter it. Making her almost have the same fate as Sunmi.

“What the hell is happening?” exclaimed Nayeon.

Jungkook turned his head towards Jimin and saw him nod. He felt happy and confident at that moment. He never thought he would be able to fight almost equally with the witches.

Namjoon, who got casts on the side, exhausted from helping Yoongi and Hoseok to fight Kai, was quick to understand how to assist Jungkook in defeating the witches just by observing what the younger is doing exactly how Jimin explained earlier.

He looks over at Yoongi and sees how eager he is to win the fight against Kai so he decides quickly to call over Hoseok who just dodged Kai’s attack on him to defend Yoongi as he knows that right at this point, the King doesn’t need their help rather it’s the prince who does.

“What?”

“Go help, Jungkook.” that is all that Hoseok needs to hear before running towards Jungkook’s direction, leaving Yoongi on his own. He knows Yoongi will understand. Plus, it’s not like didn’t hear how eager their King was to have Jimin, the witch in question, to be on their side.

Of course, Yoongi will make sure to defeat Kai. He’s a king after all and Hoseok trusts him like how the villagers trust them and put all their faith that their kingdom will not go down how the people of Erebos wants them.

“Hyung,” Jungkook happily exclaimed upon seeing him.

“Need a hand?” he asks, smiling.

“Yes, please,” says Jungkook before explaining to the General what Jimin instructed him to do. Hoseok nods in agreement and because he is the General, it didn’t take them awhile before the two of them are now ganging up against the four witches: Suzy, Nayeon, Sunmi, and Hyuna.

The four witches were furious. Puzzled by how the simple talk of Jungkook with Jimin earlier made them being rounded now by two powerless mortals and yet, they’re able to fight them almost equally just by bouncing back their magic on them making them slowly exhaust the situation.

“Pretty sure the witch did something to Jungkook’s sword when he pulled him earlier but how is Hoseok able to do what Jungkook does as well? The witch wasn’t able to touch him as he did to my niece,” Jin says to Taehyung who is obviously like the other villagers with them also hooked on watching the fight unravel with the witches.

“So you’re really a witch like us, aren’t you? Then why are you helping them? Have you forgotten what they did to us? You can’t just show up yourself and take their side like you aren’t one of us,” Jennie reasons out but the latter remained unfazed.

“Jennie, stop wasting your time. Seems like that witch won’t spare a time to answer us.” Irene scans him from head to toe and if Jimin wasn’t wearing a cloak, he’e sure he would feel insecure about how she looks at him but the good thing was, he does. She looks at the four witches’ direction and sighed.

Although, Irene’s still surprised how a man like Taehyung, the witch wannabe, became a witch and was a true one, with almost the same level as their magic for a longtime here in Leukos without Yoongi knowing he exists.

“Let me guess, your plan was to distract us so that our hold against this piece of useless blob would weaken, am I right? Did I see right through you?” she smirks.

“See, I won’t be the head witch for no reason. Unfortunately, unlike them, I’m not easy to distract once I set my mind on something like killing this blob,” she turned to Jennie and the latter nods to her in agreement before using both of their magic to fake toss the blob in the air, making Jimin panic quite in the inside. Forgetting that the witches should be the ones to get distracted not him. Especially not Jimin.

“Fuck,” he muttered under his breath when he realised his mistake, making the two witches smirked in satisfaction that he fall under their silly trick.

But then he remembered the Blob has tentacles and Irene and Jennie aren’t restricting all of its tentacles.

Right . He just needs the Blob to understand as quickly as a human does. Hopefully, the blob does. He realised how heightened its senses can be. He was reminded of how Boongi saved him from the ocean when he wasn’t even near where it was in the first place. The blob just pulled him where it was standing and it was really far from where Jimin was originally located.

Jimin doubts his plan is going to work but it doesn’t hurt to try. He’s already playing the part anyway of a mysterious stranger with magic that came out of nowhere at the right time in the middle of war type of way like in the books and movies, so why not use to his advantage?

“What do you think that witch is doing now, Noona?” asks Jennie when Jimin suddenly acts weirdly. Even Irene was curious of what Jimin’s thinking at that very moment. She isn’t sure if Jimin is now just realizing how stupid he was from challenging them or if he was trying to do something that will leave them speechless, which he is.

He slowly walk backwards without turning away his attention from Boongi who seemed to finally sense him and hear what Jimin was uttering to himself, focusing only to the blob which somehow got transmitted to Yoongi, stealing a glance at Jimin.

Kai curiously looks at Yoongi and Jimin.

Jimin focused on getting the image of the big oak tree in his mind, with its center opening, revealing his library but was a bit of a blur.

However the strength he had in left wasn’t enough to summon it the way he did the first time but Jimin’s determined to get ahold of it even if it means losing all his strength just to help the Blob and to lure the enemies away from the kingdom of Leukos.

Will it kill him? That, he doesn’t know yet.

Is he scared of death? He thinks he had faced death more than twice already so there’s nothing he could think of, other than where he could end up next after this if he, theoretically, dies and respawns again.

As he tries to focus on the intent of seeing a clear view of the big oak tree, to access the library and use it to his advantage that only he knows and can see, he keeps on walking backwards and unknowingly gets to the point where he bumped Yoongi’s back.

Yoongi immediately turned his back to Jimin and almost wields his sword against him, thinking he’s from Kai’s sife, but luckily he didn’t as he immediately recognised Jimin because of the cloak that he was wearing and the little strands of his orange hair peeking out from the robe.

“Careful, little tangerine, “ he said, with his raspy voice that almost made Jimin’s body shiver— in a good way, of course. Or not.

“I’ll take note of that, thanks,” he replied, without turning his gaze to Yoongi whereas the other was surprised at how odd Jimin’s reply to him, given Yoongi’s a King.

Kai, on the other hand, was amused by Jimin’s mysterious facade and so tried to advance himself and dare to remove his cover but thankfully, Yoongi, being quite unusually the possessive man he is to the witch, switched Jimin on the other side to protect him.

May it be the sudden arm of Yoongi circling to his waist to pull him onto the other side, or the sudden touch of Jimin’s palm against Yoongi’s chest, a spark was felt, and surprisingly that did the trick for the witch to finally get a clear image of his library inside the big oak tree.

Nevermind the way how both of their heartbeat starts beating the same way it wasn’t before. Like a connection was finally made and sealed its way between the two.

Just like earlier, Jimin’s still confused but fascinated on how mysterious things like these are happening to him. Like he was in some type of magic genre type of movie or story.

Jokes on him, he is infact, in a story.

And just like the first time it happened, he almost fell onto the ground from how powerful this mysterious force was giving him just from summoning the big oak tree and his library in his mind.

There’s still no clear explanation too, as to why these kind of things was happening to him and it seems to him that he was the only one experiencing it unlike the witches infront of him or anyone around him was.

Before he could get overwhelmed with this newfound skill/talent of his, one of the books from the many shelves he has, took itself out and went towards his direction and opened itself like how one should open to a page that theoretically could help him to get the Blob out from the witch’s hold.

Seems like his plan could work. Well, hopefully, the Blob wouldn’t plan on hitting Jimin too just because he is trying to catch a water toy that he’ll be using to distract them.

Irene’s indeed smart and deserved to be the Head to them witches as she was quick to figure out Jimin’s plan earlier.

Jimin had used Jungkook to distract them. Well, not all of them but was enough for Boongi to be able to get out of the other witches’ hold. However Irene and Jennie were still holding the thread firmly to keep Boongi from getting away.

Now, Jimin just needs water to execute his plan. Just a tiny bit. Making it hopefully visible to Boongi’s eyes only.

Once the vision of his library wears off, he quickly scans the place to look for a pail of water or pitcher. He swayed his hand just below his waist, similar to how he did with his aerokinesis, only this time it’s hydrokinesis. He kept swaying his hand to detect any water nearby until he did.

However it was the remains of the magical water that Taehyung put back in his pants pocket so it was a surprise when he felt the bottle jiggling on its own. He hastly fished out the bottle in curiosity. The liquid inside it was shaking violently until the lid pops open.

Taehyung immediately looked at Jimin and he swore it was his doing. He just let him do his thing but was curious as to why the bottle didn’t get emptied. The liquid didn’t get spend as he was imagining to happen. But that’s what he thought.

“Perfect,” Jimin muttered, smiling.

Irene and Jennie were now getting bored, waiting for something grand to happen to come from Jimin so they could finally finish the blob’s impending death.

They thought Jimin was just wasting their time, so they decided to launched magic to his way, distracting him a bit so he could show them now what he wants to show them or whatever. But Jimin just kept on dodging their magic until he finally had the perfect timing to launch his plan for Boongi.

Soon, it reaches the blob’s attention and starts to wiggle its body to try and catch the fish made of water using its tentacles which Jimin made especially for them.

The two witches was thrown violently onto the side when one of its tentacles hit them.

“What did you do?” asks Irene, angrily.

“What do you mean? I did nothing,” Jimin replied, with a mischievous grin.

“No, you did!” says Jennie.

“Are you seeing anything?”

“No.”

“Then I did nothing.”

Jennie starts launching at Jimin, followed by Irene, and since his body’s slowly weakening from the magic that he just pulled for Boongi to finally be able to free himself from the witches’ hold, he could now only think of protecting himself from the two witches but how? He doesn’t have anything to use nor strength left so summon another magic.

Well, not if he takes the spare sword Yoongi has on his other hand. It’s actually quite impressive, he knew how to use both swords. But now is not the time to simp on said King.

Kai seems to be losing his strength now too, from the time he and Yoongi have been duelling since earlier. Probably because he didn’t expect Yoongi to keep up with him, albeit there’s only a tiny, little chance for him to win this fight, given Kai has six witches backing him up.

“What are you—”

“Spare me your other sword,”

“You’re a witch, aren’t you? Witches don’t—”

“I’m a bookkeeper, your highness .” he said, mocking, “Witches don’t fight for their lives the way a mere mortal would, just like how a King like you will fight for your kingdom.”

Yoongi was stunned by Jimin’s words that it was too late for him to realise he handed him his spare sword. Making them a pair, fighting for their own individual reasons. Backs against each other under the orange moonlight and somehow it felt right.

Chapter 6

Jimin and Yoongi fought together, backs against one another. Not letting one of them get a little far from each other.

To the villagers, along with Jin and Taehyung, especially Irene, all of them can see how the two seemed to waltz, as they yield their swords together, like inseparable beings under either circumstance.

“So what does a bookkeeper do?” he asks, as he dodges Kai’s attack.

“Don’t you have those here?” Jimin replied, amused that a kingdom as big as Leukos don’t have a bookkeeper or maybe they do, just a different term. Also, why is he asking him things like these? They’re in the middle of a life-and-death situation for fucks sake and the King seem to be taking things lightly.

If only Jimin knew Yoongi’s focus was no longer on Kai but on him, amused why this witch with him speaks differently from the other witches he had met and killed, — and once loved.

“No, never heard that title before.”

“Well, now you do. Besides, even if I explain what a bookkeeper does, you won’t get to use me as planned. I don’t think I’ll be able to last until sunrise.”

“Figured you will say something like you did. Witches are not used not using magic.”

Sure Jimin’s exhausted but Yoongi, the King himself is exhausting him more with his pissing statements.

Why does he keep on labeling me as a goddamn witch? What if I am a sorcerer? What if I became a god? he asks himself as if someone will answer him.

“No!” he heard Jennie yelled, and when he looked as to why, he could sense a spike of pride in his chest.

Yes! His plan worked! He knew it’s gonna work anyways like it does for the ones who asked for his help in his world back then.

After all, he was that bookkeeper.

Boongi went straight to Jimin after escaping from the witches thread like he is their master and not Yoongi. Both kings were surprised, even the witches too, and the others who saw the whole ordeal.

“That was unexpected,” says Jin.

“Right, it is.” Taehyung nods.

Instead of Yoongi feeling betrayed and angry towards the blob, he took it as an opportunity to finally have a reason to end the fight. The battle had been for too long anyway and it isn’t like he has all the time in the world to continously fight Kai.

He has more important things to do and one of which was to get to know the bookkeeper.

The six witches finally came up with a plan and gathered themselves to cast a spell with all their remaining strength to end the battle that would lead to their victory when Jimin’s intuition somehow felt it and with all his remaining strength, given if it was ten percent remaining in his body after everything his mere human body could handle, he wants to help.

He doesn’t want to leave these people of Leukos on their own only to suffer because of the bad witches and an arrogant, greedy of a King.

A sudden sharp pain in his head made him jolt and before he could even decipher what caused it, he saw images of himself the night before the incident flashed through him.

Ah, now he realised how boring his life was before. Always reading a book between his hands beside the bigass window in his library, content with just the books surrounding him instead of people for he feels suffocated to be aroubd them. Perhaps not all, but his intuition was right after all when it was the same type of people he refused to be with caused his death. Earning him to do what he had to do, leaving a curse or wish he didn’t know that works or not.

That is when he remembered— Now, he isn’t sure if the symbols that were written in that book worked or not, but it doesn’t hurt to try. After all, it won’t be classified as forbidden if it’s just a normal ass book.

He tried remembering the images he had seen from that book. From lifting the first page to having his fingers crossed the words and symbols that fascinated him.

The memories in his head play in a back-and-forth speed until there it was, the symbol he needs.

Now, he just needs that vague memory of that symbol to be clear and remain in his head for a few more minutes for him to draw it on the ground using the edge of his sword as a guide.

“Hey, little bud,” he calmly spoke to Boongi, with its tentacles wiggling in the air anxiously anticipating any attack that may hit Jimin.

Surprisingly, the blob turned to him and gave him its attentive doe eyes.

“Could you do me a little favor and have those witches, including that bad man over there not disturb me while I draw?”

The blob tilted its head and Jimin swore they looked cute but if they didn’t understand him, they would all end up dead on the hands of the enemy.

Whether Boongi understood him or not, the blob nods its head and began walking towards the witches. Jimin took this as a yes, and starts drawing the symbol but because his body was now too weak for him to stand, he kept falling on to his knees.

Taehyung saw Jimin’s struggle and he, without a second thought, ran towards Jimin to help him.

Taehyung lifts Jimin’s shoulder and let his weight fall on his, so he could help him stand while his other hand is on his waist to keep him from falling.

Jimin didn’t comment but appreciated Taehyung’s help for him to complete the symbol he was now drawing on the ground.

“A portal spell? But that would—?” he was amused at how Jimin was bold enough to do this kind of spell amidst his body’s weakness. He knows how exhausting and dangerous it can be especially if the body of the caster is not fit to do the spell. It can lead to death.

“ Never mind, “ Jimin replied, which puzzled Taehyung but reminded him of Yoongi. That word, both of them use it like it’s nothing but really, something is behind those words that perhaps only them can understand.

Both Nayeon and Kai saw what Jimin was doing and with wide eyes, tried to stop him along with the other witches. However Yoongi and the rest, together with the villagers who somehow what they’re planning, mustered all their courage left in their bodies to help protect Jimin and Taehyung as they finished the portal.

“Thank you, but you can leave now along with the others. You don’t want any of you to be pulled with them, right?”

“But—”

“Aish, a good witch must put themselves and the people they care about first. Like how a King will risk their life to protect the kingdom. Now go, lead them to safety.”

Taehyung didn’t waste his time and followed Jimin’s order, same as he follows Yoongi’s. Believe it or not, he wishes he could be his mentor and possibly, the mother of Leukos exactly how the divination of his told him seven moons ago.

But then, Taehyung almost slapped himself in dismay when he realised he didn’t take that chance earlier to check what this mysterious witch looks like behind the cloak? Perhaps, he was just determined to help, forgetting nonsense things. He just hopes Jimin will survive after the spell.

As soon as they reached safety, the symbol that was drawn lit up and that was the queue for Jimin to order Boongi to pull the witches and Kai into the portal.

Jimin kneeled, with both hands on the ground like he is summoning all of his remaining mana on the portal as Boongi keeps them in place, wondering why the portal isn’t working like it’s supposed to.

But Jimin patiently waited along with Boongi who doesn’t care about the attacks the witches and Kai’s giving them. Standing infront of Jimin, trusting the bookkeeper.

“I’m sorry bud but just a little more. We can do this,” he said, in between heavy breaths and coughing blood, that lathered on the symbol he drew which the symbol absorbed unconsciously to Jimin.

When the spell portal finally starts working, earning screams from the witches and Kai as they’re being sucked up back to Erebos, to try to get away from it, images of the night of the incident flash through Jimin’s memory and it caused a sharp pang on his heart. He’s now not just seeing but relieving everything again all at once.

“They’re… they’re gone.” Namjoon was the first one to break the silence.

“They really are,” second Hoseok.

“Bookkeeper!” yelled Jungkook when Jimin collapsed on the ground.

Before Jungkook could even run to Jimin to save him, along with Yoongi, the Phoenix who led Jimin on the battleground appeared once again.

Flapping its big wings, creating a strong gust for anyone who dared to get near him. It was so strong that Boongi was thrown back into Jin’s arms no matter how the blob wanted to stay beside the witch and before anyone could blink an eye, a fire came out from its beak burning Jimin, leaving only the undamaged cloak with blood tinges behind.

Jungkook can’t help but to fall on to his knees, thinking he failed to save the witch who saved Leukos from the hands of Kai and his witches.

While Yoongi felt an excruciating pain in his heart from Jimin’s death and everything went black from there.

Chapter 7

A week has passed since the whole ordeal with Kai and his six witches. With almost Leukos getting defeated but luckily won because of Jimin who appeared and helped them win the fight, that eventually died because of a phoenix who showed up unannounced, burning him alive.

Or so they thought.

“He could’ve survive if only some or one of us still have enough strength to pull him out from his place before that bird appeared,” says Taehyung, still mourning the loss of his possibly good mentor that he might have had.

All six of them nods in agreement.

“He was so strong that he was able to summon a portal alone even when his body was already at its limit,” Jin adds, as he watched Boongi wobble its tentacles beside Yoongi, “He also saved Boongi like it was his own.”

“But don’t you think how everything was… I don’t know, perhaps unbelievable? I still couldn’t comprehend the fact that a witch like Jimin survived and decided to remain in Leukos instead of fleeing to Erebos like the others did. And the fact that, the moon’s color that night was the first in all colors the moon has ever shown. Let’s also not forget about the fact that a Phoenix showed up. A Phoenix that’s almost one in a billion lifetime to let itself be seen by mortals!”

“I wonder how he kept himself hidden though, after everything that happened here before and the fact that Yoongi did an extensive search to make sure no witches had survived?” exclaimed Hoseok and waved towards the kids that were waving on the palace’s window. They giggled as soon as they got their much-wanted attention from him and scrambled away.

“I beg to disagree with that, Seok. We can’t just assume he was from Leukos just because he showed up all of a sudden during the battle. What if he was birthed from Erebos and fled here thinking it was safe when it’s the opposite for his kind? Only if that happened before during the—, you know what I mean. Or, the possibility that there is another kingdom here in Aidios that none of us have discovered yet?” says Namjoon, earning a nod from all of them, especially Jungkook.

“Exactly what I remembered he told me! He said he wasn’t from here and that he wasn’t a witch but a mere bookkeeper. I don’t know what he meant by that. Perhaps, it’s a type of witch his kind is called but of a higher rank.” Jungkook chirps.

“But it’s a shame he died. We no longer won’t be able to make use of his knowledge to teach Tae and thank him for saving the villagers and Boongi,” says Yoongi, finally breaking from his silence and daydreaming of Jimin during that day.

He doesn’t understand why he was daydreaming of him in the first place. Perhaps because he was impressed of his sword skills? The way he speak to a King? His eagerness to save Boongi even though the blob and the war might nothing to do with him? But then again, he reminds himself Jimin is a witch albeit Jimin told him he wasn’t, but a mere bookkeeper.

“I doubt he’s dead,” says Jungkook enthusiastically.

“Son,”

“What? He cannot die just like that, Appa! A strong witch or, uhm, bookkeeper like him can’t die just because of a bird burning him alive. If he’s able to summon a portal spell even with his body being weak, I’m certain he’s not just some kind of typical witch.”

“But we all saw it, Kook,” Jin reminds him.

“Well, I refused to believe he’s dead. There were no ashes seen, no burnt marks tracing a body so how could you be sure he’s dead? Besides, the cloak he wore was untouched like it didn’t go through fire at all.”

Taehyung nods, taking into consideration what Jungkook had said but does not want to keep his hopes up.

Meanwhile, Jimin finally woke up from his slumber and was dumbfounded to wake up in an unfamiliar, shabby cabin.

It took him a while to realised that, he again yet survived death, or at least that was what he would want to think as he is still breathing.

However, he’s not sure if surviving after everything that had happened from that battle is a good thing or not, as he was now getting more and more confused as to how and why he had to go all through that only to end up here. In a place like this. Alone.

What he does remember though, before passing out was a gush of familiar warmth enveloping his body. Although he heard his name being called. Technically, he was called bookkeeper by that person but still. He wondered who that was. Perhaps it was the Prince or the King. Who knows? He hopes they didn’t blame themselves though if he happens to die in that world. He only hopes the bad guys wouldn’t dare to come back to their kingdom for everyone’s safety.

He sat on the edge of the bed after gathering enough courage to get up and scan the place. He could only hope he didn’t end up being transported to one world to another, definitely not to another war or he would turn someone bald— seriously .

First thing that he noticed was, his clothes had been changed. It was no longer the same elegant piece of white gown he had wore previsouly but just a simple white long sleeves and pants. Does that mean someone changed his clothes for him? Who? Albeit he’s not going to deny the embarassment of another person changing him.

Second, and most importantly, his eyes widened in surprise when he realised by the reflection in the mirror that something major had happened.

No, it wasn’t because he earned a scar from the battle nor his face change but his hair, yes, his hair— it went back to normal. It was no longer orange the first time he first woke up from that enchanted forest and he could only scratch his head in confusion.

What in the world is going on?

He ended up falling butt first, when he tried to get up to walk. It seems to him that his body hasn’t fully recovered yet from his slumber or perhaps, from the magic that he did against the witches. Of course, it would take a toll on his body. He isn’t a witch afterall like they said he was.

Even he, was still confused and weirded out as to how he was able to do the things he did there. The last time he had checked, he was a mortal and a mere bookkeeper. Nothing else. Well, not if someone will show proof that he isn’t and that he may be some sort of alien from planet B, T, or S.

However now that he’s awake, he can feel himself starving to death. Unfortunately, after searching the cabin, no food can be seen for him to eat. He sighed in defeat. He might not have died during that battle but he’s for sure will because of hunger!

He slumps back onto the worn-out bed and tried dozing back to sleep. He just hopes that once he wakes up again, there will be food to magically present itself to him. Oh, how he misses Mr. Bang’s cooking!

The second time that he woke, Jimin was confident enough he’d be able to walk even if it was just baby steps for him to find something to eat. Well, hopefully, as he was woken up by his mad stomach wanting to be fed. But, unluckily, no food can be found anywhere in the cabin. He sighed and decided to go outside which surprised him because he was greeted by big, giant trees.

What the hell?

Did he went back to that enchanted forest? But he was sure he saw it burn with his own eyes before the river sucked him in unless he was hallucinating at that time.

It was dark but not that dark. The place is bright and glowing because of fireflies surrounding the cabin. It feels magical— supposedly for Jimin.

Confused, he tried to walk around and realised this wasn’t the same place he was at before as he saw a big, blow of smoke not far from where he stood.

Huh?

There must be someone or some people there but he wasn’t sure if it is a good idea to come to them and ask for help or directions, especially since he might seem suspicious to them since it’s nighttime. He sighed.

He can’t help but sit on the dewy grass and began crying. This has to be some type of joke! Why does he has to be at some weird kind of place when he can just be at one, to that place where he was previously at?

Sure, there might be war and the King of the Kingdom he just helped win the war has some kind of grudge by murdering mass of witches (still, he is not sure whether to be scared or not because he still thinks he isn’t the type to kill out of nothing), but he would rather be there than be in this new place wherein he doesn’t know what will happen to him next. This after life is torture!

It took him a while before he finally stopped crying and before he knew it, he was already staring back at the moon with stars twinkling around it and somehow he felt like the moon.

Alone, but surrounded by twinkling fireflies.

It looks nice. It’s supposed to be nice but it wasn’t. It’s lonely and it feels heavy.

He smiled although forced.

He shouldn’t let the situation get the best of him. If anything, he will use this as a reminder to thrive.

Yes, this is the Jimin he knew of himself. It’s too early to give up. He thinks that since he had survived everything that had happened to him before ending up here, it is safe to say that there might be a reason why this is happening. Right? It can’t be just for nothing.

Maybe, just maybe, this is his chance to explore and enjoy the ‘life’ he didn’t. Maybe this is what the after life wants him to see and understand. Maybe this is how they want to teach him a lesson, his karma, from ending his life when he shouldn’t have had. Maybe whoever is watching him right now wants him to evolve into something that he never thought can be, so here he is.

He was about to go back inside the shabby cabin when a sudden gust blew where he was standing, like it was whispering to him, trying to change his plan.

Weirded out, Jimin looked around. Then, he heard faint waves of water nearby which he was sure wasn’t there before.

Curious, he followed the faint sound until it became louder and clearer. Jimin was stunned to see, standing in front of him, near the shoreline, was the Phoenix who lead him to the palace’s fortress.

It turned to him as soon as he felt his presence. Like it was waiting for his arrival.

“Y-You!” he ran up towards the bird without a second thought and the bird remained unmoved, acting like an old man so done with young people’s energy.

“Wait! Was that you or there are other birds just like you? But you’re exactly the same as that big bird who led me to the palace! Don’t you dare deny it wasn’t you if you were that bird! You’re lucky I didn’t die or— wait! What if you’re also the one who healed me? Well, can you?…. Why aren’t you talking? Are you literally just a bird? You’re not gonna transform into some higher being like Gandalf or such?”

Jimin quickly ducked his head when the bird lifted both of its wings, thinking it was going to attack him but no. It didn’t attacked him, although the bird hit him on his head with its big, left wing like it was trying to knock him out of his senses.

“Ouch!” Jimin glared and pouts at the Phoenix, “That was rude!”

The bird turned to look away from him, earning a much bigger pout from Jimin.

“Y’know, it will be good if you stop pretending not to understand me and talk. Trust me, I won’t be surprised anymore after all the things that have happened. I just— I just need someone to help me understand this new life I am in, I think?”

Jimin turns to look at the bird and was surprised to see the Phoenix was already staring back at him before it started flapping its wings and soaring in circles in the ocean but not far from where Jimin’s at. Like the bird was inviting him to join in.

Jimin gulped in worry. He’s not sure if it’s a good idea to do just that. The last time he was in the ocean he almost died.

Good thing, the blob showed up and saved him. He wonders if the blob is doing okay.

Of course, Boongi is. The blob’s currently snoring beside Yoongi, who was so deep in his sleep too, it was so deep that he was finally dreaming about Jimin.

He had Jimin in his head for quite a while now but never in his dream. This is the first.

In his dream, not far from where he was standing, he saw Jimin sitting underneath the cherry blossom tree. Wearing a white robe embossed with shimmering gold sequin that resemble the sun rays. A couple of pearl white necklaces that hangs around his neck which makes him even more gorgeous and appealing that he could ever be from the eyes of everyone especially Yoongi.

However his head was hanged low and Yoongi took this chance to somehow peak at the witch’s identity which he wasn’t able to do the last time because of the cloak that Jimin was wearing during that night.

“I must say, I am impressed with how delicate you are with those flowers but not of the cloth you are wearing. Especially since it’s white and you’re sitting directly onto the ground.”

But the witch remained silent like he didn’t hear Yoongi. Still, the King kept his head high but with one eyebrow raised. Amused by how the witch was unbothered by his presence. Even his ex-wife didn’t dare to do this type of act in front of him, being he’s the King. He cleared his throat.

“I guess, you’re really not a witch after all like I said you were. Witches do have a lot to say, just like Namjoon, my advisor and the top of all scholars,” he adds, while simply looking at Jimin but boy, the witch still did not bother to even nod to what he just said.

“This is stupid! Nobody dares not to show respect to me,” he says, before he angrily walks towards Jimin but before he could even get near him, the flowers on the ground set aflame. Yoongi panicked especially when Jimin remained unfazed.

“Fuck! Get over here, you witch! Are you trying to kill yourself? Come, hold my hand!”

He tried to reach for Jimin but it was too late. The fire was already big and he could do nothing but watch the flames burn him.

“No! No! No!” he yells, until he was woken up by his own yelling. He gulped when he realised he was having a nightmare.

But was it really, when he was able to somehow see Jimin again even in his dream?

Meanwhile, Jimin walks back to the shoreline after the Phoenix decides to leave him yet again without notice. He just realised that the sun was already peeking behind the clouds and it was his queue to get back in to the shabby cabin.

“Who are you? And why are you there? Don’t you know it’s dangerous to be in the Avgrund?” Jimin turned to look at the person who just spoke and was surprised to be met by three young men who he thinks share the same age as he or perhaps, a little older or younger than him.

They all looked at him with worry because he is, as they said, at the body of Avgrund. The most dangerous part of Aidios.

“Uhm,” he made sure to come up with a credible lie as soon as he made it to the shoreline, “I was looking for food.”

He gave himself a tap on the shoulder for sounding so confident and not questionable because in reality, he needs to start looking for food or he might die from hunger later on once the starving feelings comes back.

“In the Avgrund?” one of the three asks, suspiciously looking at him without its cheeks turning pink.

“Yes? It doesn’t hurt to try especially when you are starving,”

“But why during the hour when the sun is still not fully set?” another one asks, feeling proud of himself that he didn’t stutter.

“Because it is a shame for someone like me to do that in broad daylight. Is it not?”

One of them cleared his throat before answering, “Yes, it sure is, for a beau like you to be doing that. Lost a home during the war?”

War .

He nods. They too, understanding Jimin’s situation. Why he ended up doing what he was doing when they saw him.

“What were you doing before the war?”

Should he say he was a bookkeeper? Nah. He bets that just like the King from the other world, these three won’t know too. They suddenly might find him suspiscious if he does tell them. He must think of another.

“I’m a— performer … I perform whenever there is a celebration or festivities.”

Their eyes widened in surprise. Why, of course, a beauty like Jimin, why won’t he be?

They bet even the king of Leukos won’t be able to get away to admire Jimin’s beauty but how come they haven’t seen him from before?

Surely, they will all remember him unless he wasn’t put to be the main performer which is a shame honestly.

Never mind though as it seems that the opportunity for them to perform at the palace had now been answered.

“Do you, perhaps, want to join our band?”

“I would love to,” he smiled, not knowing he would be meeting Yoongi again who had been yearning for his witch with orange hair since the night of the war.

Chapter 8

If there are two things Jimin had realised during his stay with his now newfound friends/family, it was how liberating it was and surprising that he was able to adapt very quickly in this new world he was in. He thought it would take a while for him to adjust but no. It only took him a week for him to adjust and learn to his new life.

He also learned that he didn’t get transported to another world, or another timeline as he remained in Leukos which he was thankful for.

It’s just that, the place where they lived was a bit far from where the palace is at, and luckily, his friends are trying to get into the palace as performers for the upcoming festival that is being celebrated every Harvest Season so, naturally everyone is excited about who is going to perform or have a big participation during the said festival.

Even Jimin who had never attended a festival before (blame his excuse for not wanting to get out and talk to strangers, and would rather stay indoors instead), is excited.

Perhaps because a big part of it was because, besides they’re band was quite popular now to the villagers since they started performing in the streets of Leukos and are getting recognition for it which still up until now they’re getting overwhelmed especially the witch himself, he was also curious to how Boongi and Jungkook was doing after the war. Perhaps he wants to see the other Palace’s people too. Like the palace’s witch that he forgot the name of, or Yoongi himself. Who knows.

Jackson, Minhyun, and Jae are his three new friends/family who happenned to be musicians by night and a regular worker by day. Luckily, none of them questioned Jimin about his previous life. Perhaps because it is a sensitive topic to talk about especially if you lose a family or material stuff that you worked hard for because of the war.

However they make sure to keep Jimin entertained by telling their stories of how the three of them met and their dreams in life as individuals and as a band.

And since Jimin gets bored whenever the three will leave for their morning work, Jimin decides that he should work too. Thankfully, the three were supportive and gave him options where he could inquire.

“Are you sure you want to work here, lad? This bread house isn’t that well and you’re too pretty to be baking bread,” says the old woman, smiling dearly at him.

It’s not like Jimin is doing it out of pity but he genuinely wants to help the sick, old woman living near the market with his granddaughter.

He may or may not also overheard their conversation the other day that they will need a big amount of money if the granddaughter wants to help the old woman be nursed back to health as there are only a few physicians that could help her.

The granddaughter is only six and has no parents at all. Just her and her grandma. But thankfully, her granddaughter was bright for her age.

“Yes,” he nods, “You don’t have to pay me now. I’m just wanting to ease my boredom whenever my friends are not at home.”

“What a silly, high-spirited lad you are,” the old woman laughed and offered him bread.

Jimin didn’t hesitate to take a bite and realised why the bakery wasn’t doing well. It was not because it was not made of pure effort and dedication but perhaps how he could assume is how it was made or with the ingredients perhaps as to why the bakery isn’t like the ones that are popular to the, what he would label as average villagers, that could afford decent food to their table.

Luckily, for him, he was taught by Mr. Bang how to bake after he went on bugging him numerous times. Curious how easy it was from the books as described. There’s really nothing he should worry about in terms of skill except for, of course, the ingredients.

It’s not like he will have those readily available in this world. The one that he uses and such. He may have to produce or find them on his own for him to be able to bake good bread. He bowed to the old woman before leaving and as soon as he returned, he decided to rest for a bit before preparing for their dinner tonight, before his friends returns home.

“So are you really going to teach me now, Mr. Bang?” asks an overly excited seven-year-old Jimin, bouncing up and down beside his butler with a book clutched between his arms.

“Mm, might as well so you don’t have to complain doing nothing aside from reading,”

“And bugging you!” he adds, giggling.

The butler ruffled his hair earning a pout from the younger but remained excited anyway. He quickly opened the book he was holding to figure out which one he was going to teach him to bake.

“Fruit cake?”

“No, dear.”

“But there are fruits over there,” he points at the basket full of tangerines, apples, strawberries, and blueberries “Are we not going to use those?”

“Yes, we are.”

“Then it’s a fruit cake!”

“No, Jimin. It will not be a fruit cake rather we call it, a tangerine pound cake because we are only gonna be using just the tangerines.”

“Huh? Who eats those? Aren’t tangerines designed to be either juice or jam?”

“Yes, but there are also people whose love for tangerine is over the top that one made a cake out of it and that’s what we are going to make today.”

“Alright then but I swear Mister, whoever eats tangerine must be incomparable. Imagine a person eating an unusual fruit for a cake.”

“Oh, Jimin. If you only knew how many unusual ingredients can be added to a cake,” exclaimed a laughing Mr. Bang.

Jimin’s eyes fluttered in confusion when he saw Jae in front of him, who had shook him from his sleep to wake him up when he saw him crying as soon as he gets home.

“You alright, Jimin?”

“I— uh, hello?” Jae laughs at his confusion and carefully pats his hanky to Jimin’s eyes and cheeks to dry off his tears.

“You were crying in your sleep. I’m wondering if one of your loved ones visited you in your dream ’coz mine does too and it makes me sad and happy at the same time.”

After dinner, his friends immediately went to rest since they don’t have any scheduled performance for the night, and Jimin can’t help but stare at the ceiling with Jae’s words replaying in his head.

Jae said he was crying in his sleep but he couldn’t remember if the dream itself was sad, because he knew it was one of his happy memories with his butler, who also stood as his guardian when his parents died.

He wonders if Mr. Bang is proud of him now that he is learning to socialize without the butler’s help and that might be the reason why he had visited Jimin in his dream. He heaved a sigh and placed a hand on his chest. Tears starts to well up in his eyes and before a single tear could drop and touch his cheeks, he feels Jackson hugging him.

Jimin was surprised by the timing but didn’t comment. Might have been a coincidence since he noticed that Jackson and Jae are the ones who keep on moving to their sleep whereas he and Minhyun are the ones that sleep like a stone. And yes, they all sleep together in one bed.

Jackson snuggled Jimin in his sleep until Jimin felt calm enough to finally rest and forget about the heavy feeling in his chest.

“You guys don’t have to follow me to the bread house. It’s not like I’m going to get lost,” Jimin laughed, as his three friends tried to secretly followed him from behind but failed.

“How did you know we’re following you?”

“You all are not discreet enough not to be noticed!”

“But we are!”

“No, you aren’t.”

When he turned to face his three friends, they were all pouting at him like a kid that got busted on their cover and it made Jimin laughed a bit more before he ruffled each of their hair with a smile.

“Alright, enough of you following me. Go get to your work and I’ll go to mine. I promise to bring you leftovers of the bread I’ll be making.”

“Promise?”

“Promise.”

The moment Jimin arrived at the bakery, he was stunned to see a sack of tangerine beside the brick oven inside the house/bakery of the old woman he would be helping.

He just dreamt of tangerines yesterday, did he not? Oh wow, what a coincidence.

“Quite a lot of tangerines we have here,” he comments, as he starts to ready the utensils and ingredients he will be using.

He was planning to do just a simple old-school butter and sugar pull-apart bread but it seems that someone wants him to do different. Why?

He don’t understand why but he can’t stop checking out those tangerines in the sack and somehow the old woman noticed.

“Me and Sera won’t be able to finish those in a week, so you could bring some with you or to your friends otherwise it will just rot.”

“How come you have a lot then?”

“A friend of mine came to visit and since it was tangerine season, a lot was harvested on the first week and my friend decided to give us some.”

“Oh,” he looks at the sack again, “Do you mind me using those tangerines for the bread?”

“Sure, but… did I hear you right? You will be using these tangerines on the bread? How?” the woman seemed doubtful however approved on Jimin’s idea.

“Yes, you heard me right.” he replied and starts picking a couple of tangerines from the sack and putting them on the table, “From the place where I grew, my butler, or you could say guardian, he was the one who thought me of this recipe. I grew up eating this and I can assure you it tastes good.”

The woman nods and smiled while looking at Jimin who seems to recall a happy memory from his childhood. Of course, it is a happy memory for him. He considers Mr. Bang more than a butler. He stood up and raised him like a parent would.

“May I help you then?”

“Yes, of course.”

It took them about three to almost four hours to finish three different types of bread to sell for an estimate of one day and a half as it takes a while for all the bread to be sold as per the owner.

However what both of them didn’t realised was, while they were making the pieces of bread they will be selling, the aroma spread out like wildfire amongst the villagers and most were trying to figure out where the heavenly scent was coming from.

“Thank you for today, Jimin. It was a pleasure to learn new things from a lad like you,” says the old woman, with her smile reaching up to her eyes and Jimin couldn’t be more proud of himself.

“Thank you, too. I’ll be back tomorrow,”

“And I’ll be waiting for you.”

Jimin bowed before leaving with a few pieces of bread to bring back home to his friends as promised.

Unfortunately, since he went home as soon as he was finished with work, he weren’t able to see the sudden flock of villagers that came rushing to the old woman’s bakery as soon as they found out that the delicious smell was coming from the said bakery.

Even the old woman and her granddaughter was surprised by the number of people that were buying. It seems that the bread they made won’t last a day like the normal days for them to finish their products. It was just two hours since the bakery opened and now almost half of the bread was sold.

“Can you smell that? Does it smell familiar?” Hoseok asks.

“Yeah, it smells citrusy like— tangerine?”

Jin was quick to noticed the flock of people on one corner of the area they were roaming on and immediately pulled Hoseok with him.

“We need to see what the commotion was about,” he says in finality, as they also fall in line along with the others. Some took notice of them and tried to make them the first in line but they declined saying that it wasn’t necessary as they needed to see what the flock of people was all about.

What they didn’t expect was to see three mouth-watering breads displayed in front of them which they hadn’t seen on other bakeries they had visited before.

The old woman smiled and bowed at the two when she realised infront of her was Prince Jin, the King’s older brother and the General, Hoseok.

“These are all made fresh by my new baker.”

“These look so delicious!” Jin commends.

“And they do. I can give these to you for free, your majesty to bring to the king too if you may.”

Jin and Hoseok’s eyes glistened in happiness.

“Yes, please! But we will pay of course.”

As soon as the two came back to the palace with the pieces of bread they bought, Taehyung was the first to noticed the aroma, next to him was Boongi who tried snatching the paper bag but did not succeed as Jin yelled to his brother for help.

“What’s that, Hyung? It smells good.”

“It also looks good,” Hoseok adds, followed by a grumble of his stomach, earning giggles from Taehyung and Jungkook.

Yoongi eyed the bread suspiciously that was handed to him by Jin to eat with the others. But he’s not going to deny how inviting the aroma of the bread was, knowing it smells just like his favorite fruit.

“It smells… tangerine?”

“Yes, because it is a bread made from tangerine. That was at least what we remembered being told by the old woman when we bought it from her bakery.” replied Jin, “The bakery was far from here though.”

Yoongi curiously raised an eyebrow while inspecting the bread in his hand but as soon as he saw his son, his brother, Hoseok, Taehyung, and Namjoon happily eating without an ounce of misgiving, he took a small bite and was surprised at how overwhelming the bread tastes.

It was no doubt delicious but the bread will also make you feel warm, like it was made by a loving mother to her children and that is exactly what everyone feels upon eating the bread made by Jimin, which he also got help from the old woman who owns the said bakery.

For some odd reason, Yoongi can’t help but smile as he eats the bread, not only because of the feeling the breads lets him feel but because it suddenly reminded him of Jimin.

Odd, really.

Chapter 9

If Jimin will count how long he has been here since the first day he arrived in Leukos, or Aidios rather, he believes it had been three months already, and to him, it was quite surprising that he didn’t have had a hard time adjusting to his new environment when he came from the future.

Aidios, in Jimin’s perspective, resembles the Gojoseon Era but with a twist. Of course, it would. There are witches with powers that exists here like in the books and movies.

In his opinion, it wouldn’t take a while for the people of Leukos to upgrade their lifestyle if they were taught of knowledge from the future which a.k.a Jimin has.

He wonders if he can be a teacher here as well in this era. However since he was labeled as a witch before, he don’t think people would want a witch to teach them knowledge as they might think it is either scary to even think about or that he is crazy.

Now that he thinks about it, since witches is real in this world with magic, he wonders how advanced the kingdom of Erebos is, given that Kai, the arrogant King, has all the remaining six witches in Aidios has.

All because thanks to Yoongi, killing most of their kind, the advanced, skilled witches fled to the side of the enemy and now, those witches no longer feel any guilt in hurting anyone even when those people they are hurting did nothing to them when truly, it should just be Yoongi that they need to punish because of what he did to their kind.

However Jimin couldn’t just blame Yoongi single-handedly from the hearsay without knowing what made the king do what he had done to the witches.

Perhaps there’s got to be something that had triggered the Yoongi’s decision that no one knew, including Jimin but him. If given the chance to know, he wants to learn about it. He wants to know where Yoongi’s coming from. His anger. His madness that made him murder most witches.

Sure, Kings in books or movies are often portrayed as the good ones, the supporting characters, and the protagonists, but did one asks what made them bad? The villain?

Also, if he remembers it correctly, while he was fighting beside Yoongi, there wasn’t any itch he had felt with him like he was supposed to, when he feels something off against another individual who reeks of being rotten in the inside.

Jimin’s not sure whether it was a facadè but c’mon, it was during in the middle of a war.

Who would even think of putting on a two-face act especially when you are beside the kind that you hate the most and you had the chance to kill them? Perhaps, the crazy ones but not Yoongi. No, he didn’t.

While everyone inside the house was already asleep, Jimin preferred to stay awake a little more as he sat beside the window and tried to access his library by imagining himself in front of the big oak tree. Kind of, meditating, because he figured just yesterday that books are mostly available to scholars which can only be found at the palace.

What a bummer , he thought.

Not that he is surprised. I mean, there are only two reasons why education is not for everyone regardless if he’s in Aidios or in his case, from the future.

One, learning can either be subjective or objective. We, humans learn first through trial and error, through curiosity, and not directly from books. Like where the hell do you think books come from without their creator? Its author whose experiences and output are being provided to share understanding and knowledge with another?

Subjective in a sense wherein an individual can and will try to learn to gain personal benefit whereas objective because one will use the knowledge for practicality and skill-oriented goal.

Two, learning is expensive . In a sense, an educator per se won’t just give away their knowledge to another without receiving anything in return which in this case is money or rank in the society. Thus, only the people with money can afford to learn, or perhaps as how Jimin terms it— education.

However what he noticed was, since his hair went back to normal, the sudden images of the big oak tree or his library itself no longer flashes through his mind and he thinks it is because, in a nonhuman sense, he exhausted all the mana in his body that is why he ends up being powerless just like the regular human he was before and all he can think of, just like the protagonist in books and movies is that, he needs to learn how to gain those powers back. And, the first thing he needs to do to regain it, was to meditate. He needs to focus on calling his power.

Also, he don’t understand why the people of Leukos don’t remember him. Perhaps because the villagers at the time was busy putting out the fire from their houses, or because his hair that can only be seen at the time for them to remember was no longer long or orange in color or pehaps, because only Jungkook has the opportunity to see his face. Well, not sure if fully but yes, Jungkook did saw him and knew what his face looks like but really, no one can see right through him even when there are some times that his vocabulary slips then and there, or how advance he acts or thinks. Perhaps because there are scholars here so it’s normal for them to hear such things?

If only they knew Jimin was that person who helped them, he wonders how would they react especially his friends?

But welp, people’s faces and aura changes whenever they do something different to their physical appearance so maybe, just maybe, even if Jungkook knew what he looks like, he might not be able to remember him unless he had his orange hair back which still doesn’t make sense to Jimin how it happened and returned back to black.

He sighed after spending an hour and a half with no results. He really can’t have a clear picture of his library in his head.

Like he got a brain fog or something, even though he had already exerted a big amount of focusing on remembering how it looked like because why, of course, he should have remembered how it looked like, he’d been in his home, in his library, for more than one should stay there and read especially when it mostly had acted as his bedroom too.

Perhaps there’s a trigger and he just needs to figure out what. Just like how it got triggered when he first arrived in Leukos.

Or maybe, just maybe, he just needs to be in an actual library,and the only place he could think of having a library accessible to him is at the Palace. Where the king who hates witches resides at.

He wonders if he’ll be able to access the Palace someday by pretending he is a scholar. That could work. However there’s one, major issue with his plan.

The King might have his name check first by the guards from the list of scholars Leukos has, nibefore he could even step inside the library and then, they will find out Jimin’s lying. And the last thing he wants to happen to him in Leukos is, to be beheaded by the King in public where everyone watches.

Before he could even think of getting up to sleep with his friends onto their shared bed, Jimin fell asleep on his seat. Tired from today’s work as he had spent two hours more after his shift to bake more bread since they almost immediately ran out of products to sell once the bakery opens at noon.

Albeit tired, he’s happy to see that the old woman whose name he learned was Balam, happy too as well as her granddaughter, Sera, that occasionally helps them and is the one checking their savings if it’s enough for her grandmother to be check by a physician.

And since he starts earning money from his day job as a baker, aside from his sideline as a performer along with the three musicians now and then, he started contributing to the expenses at their shared home.

He feels fulfilled to be an adult when in reality, he really is an adult not some teenager. It is just that, this is something he wasn’t able to do before in his previous life. He was so used being inside his home and Mr. Bang was the one taking care of everything including Jimin’s money.

And just like every single day, Jimin was about to leave the bread house as soon as he finished baking, when he heard a familiar voice calling him.

“Jimin hyung! Jimin hyung!” he quickly turned his head towards the person who had just called him and was met by a bone crushing hug from Sera. Jimin can’t help not to smile at her while she giggles.

“Woah! What’s going on, young lady?”

“Your band made it to the list!”

“Huh?”

“Your band is included to the list of performers the Palace chose to perform there tomorrow! I can’t wait to see you perform live since I can stay awake whenever until festival ends! Isn’t that great, hyung?”

Jimin was surprised and happy that their band made it to the list and so, out of pure joy, he held both of Sera’s hands and they started jumping in circles while giggling until they have to stop to catch their breaths.

“So do you already have something special to wear for tomorrow’s festival?”

“Uhm,” Sera’s question made him realised that no, he doesn’t have any. In fact, he hasn’t gone shopping yet since he started living with the three and working at the bread store. Old clothes that somehow look okay that were given to him by the three are the only ones that he wore since then.

“Oh no! You can’t go to the festival with just what you usually wear, hyung! How will the King notice you? Of course, you also need to look presentable not just pretty!”

Jimin blushed. It’s not like he’e trying to get Yoongi’s attention anyway but he can’t set aside the fact that the king is handsome, even with his scar that he has across on his right eye. He mentally slapped himself and cleared his throat.

“It’s fine. I’ll just ask my friends if they have any spare clothes that they no longer use that I can wear for tomorrow or I can buy from shops that sell clothes for a low price. It’s going to be a one time thing anyway and I don’t think Palace people would be particular of their performers clothes.”

“No! It’s a festival and festivals only happen rarely! Plus, the King also seldom comes out of the Palace so it is a great opportunity for you, hyung to get his attention. Y’know,” Sera says while blushing and fiddling his fingers.

Chapter 10

“What’s the matter, Boongi?” Taehyung curiously eyes Boongi, when the blob stops following them and starts looking around as they wiggles their tentacles in the air, like they were looking for someone they knew.

The blob couldn’t be mistaken, they’re a hundred percent sure that that was the witch’s voice— Jimin’s.

But why was the blob not finding him even after squinting its eyes and using its tentacles like a radar in the crowd to search for him?

Meanwhile, Yoongi, who was busy doing his daily work together with Namjoon suddenly stopped reading the scroll he was holding.

What was that? He heard a familiar laugh which surely, Boongi was sharing to him and he felt goosebumps all through out his body.

“Hyung?”

Yoongi shook his head and ignored what Boongi had just tried to informed him on.

“It’s not about the clothes you will be wearing tomorrow night that you’re worrying about, am I right?” asks Minhyun, eyeing Jimin, who were looking at the charms Sera picked up for him to see.

“N-No! It’s not that. I mean, kind of. All those clothes we had checked, they’re all pretty but I think those clothes are a bit too much for someone like me,” he explained, shyly.

Sera gasped.

“What do you mean, hyung? The clothes are pretty; You are pretty! I don’t see where the problem is.”

“Maybe I’m just not used to wearing fancy clothes. Besides, I don’t think fancy clothes will matter if I do not do my best to perform well to the King’s liking,”

Minhyun nods, “I guess, I do get where you’re coming from. This is also going be our first to be able to perform at the Palace, in front of the King, all thanks to you Jimin so I’m also nervous to make a mistake rather than what I would look like in front of him. But I think it’s not a bad thing to dress something fancy once in awhile especially since tomorrow is the festival. I, and the rest would love to see you in a different light. You know what I mean.”

Sera clapped her hands in excitement.

“So are we going to pick your clothes now for tomorrow, hyung? I think I might have already seen something that will suit you the best!”

“Then what are we waiting for?”

As soon as Jimin was pulled to the other side of the street by Minhyun and Sera, Taehyung and Jin stood where the three just left off.

“Is there anything else that we’re supposed to buy?” asks Jin, holding a couple of his parcels wrapped in a silk cloth that acts like paper or some could call it a shopping bag. They just spent three hours at the market looking for things they could use for tomorrow’s festival. Mainly are accessories.

The area where they shop is kind of far from the Palace but somehow they like it best here for some reason to rome around.

“I think I’m all good too,” Taehyung replied.

“Then let’s head back. My brother might start looking for us if we stay here a bit longer than he anticipates,” says Jin, laughing.

“Ah, hyung! Stop using the King as an excuse. We all know you just want to go back as soon as you can so that Namjoon hyung won’t get worried if he tries to look for you.”

“Tae!” Jin pouts, “I hate that you’re right though.”

They were about to leave when they noticed Boongi’s acting weird again similar from earlier. They kept turning left and right, like they were anxiously looking for someone who isn’t with them.

In turn, Taehyung also did the same. Thinking there must be something that the blob is seeing or sensing that they don’t but in the end, he wasn’t able to find anything or anyone the blob was trying to search through the crowd.

However his gut feeling from Boongi’s odd behavior never went away, even after they reached back to the Palace so, he did the best  he could think of doing.

Taehyung scratches his head.

It showed up again.

Again.

But this time, it was a little different. The part of the kingdom being on the verge of its downfall was no longer being mentioned but of the King and the Witch’s meeting remains on the scenery the dice was showing to him.

Oh, wait…

His eyes widened in realization.

He remembered the conversation they all had months ago and what Jungkook insisted, about the possibility of the witch being alive.

Why of course, it could really be a possibility but not just a hundred percent reality. After all, said witch was able to summon a portal spell even when his body was in the verge of breaking and yet, the witch was able to do the spell without a miss.

Then that means…

What if Jungkook was right all along? What if the witch was still alive and was just hiding after saving them from Kai and his six witches? To spare his life from being killed by Yoongi?

Because… right. Right. Exactly!

Why didn’t he realised it sooner?

Boongi, the blob, whose ninety-nine percent of the time aloof to people, only showed their loyalty and clinginess to Yoongi, had choosen to stand beside the mysterious, orange witch during the battle. Ignored its master’s presence. Even helped said witch to keep the enemies in place while he draw the symbol of the portal spell onto the ground to send them all back to Erebos.

Right. Maybe there’s something about the witch that only Boongi could see or feel and it shouldn’t be a surprise to him really, if the reason why the Blob was acting strange earlier was because he could feel the witch’s presence nearby.

Which in fact, was true.

A sudden thrilling feeling enveloped Taehyung and he couldn’t help but to feel excited on the fact that the witch, Jimin, might show up again anytime soon at the Palace grounds.

What he did miss though, was the fact that the second meeting will happen tomorrow at the night of the festival. The night wherein the lanterns, the whole Leukos itself, will resemble the fiery, orange hair of the witch.

Chapter 11

Morning came and it was dead silent the moment Jimin woke up that he thought it was still night and he was just in a peaceful dream but when he realised that he wasn’t dreaming and that it was indeed morning, he was dumbfounded.

“Sleep a little more, hyung! Were you planning to sleep immediately after we perform at the Palace?” exclaimed Jae, who he thinks just finished attending his nature’s call. The boy still looks sleepy to him.

“What?” he asks, curious.

“Ah, I think you’re one of those people who seem to forget that we start preparing for the festival at dawn. Remember, our day during the festival is at night and it only gets better the longer it becomes. So go back to sleep hyung or you might get tired easily later and we don’t want that to happen. Me and the others were planning to roam around to indulge throughout the night.”

Jimin nods and watches Jae go back to his sleep along with the other two who seem to be enjoying their stay in dreamland.

He scratches his head and went to look at the improvised hourglass he made that was at the window for him to determine what time it is of the day. Of course, they asked him what that was he made and he simply told them it was just an accessory he made to make their house interesting but warned them not to touch it or he would lose track of time.

Fortunately, they obeyed his instruction.

Maybe Jae was right as it is still 8 a.m. in modern time, and if he said that the preparation won’t start until 6 p.m. he should probably go back to rest otherwise he will get sleepy just like Jae told him and he don’t want that to happen.

He wants to experience his first festival in Leukos in good condition and not in a sleepy, tired mood.

He wonders if it’s exactly what he sees in some fantasy genre movies, or what he imagines it to be as described in the books or maybe it is more beautiful in reality, which is a possibility and that makes him more excited for tonight’s festivity.

Of course, he had experienced attending festivals and other kinds of celebrations with Mr. Bang but unlike before, he used not to participate unless his butler forces him to, in a way that the old man will asks him to join him dancing in a crowd full of people.

He suddenly felt a pang of nostalgia and he can’t help but ache at the memory he had spent with his butler.

He craves that exact, happy memory he has with Mr. Bang. He wonders if he will feel the same later as he spends his time at the festival with his new found friends/family.

He hopes so, and he knows if Mr. Bang is with him, watching him, he knows that he will be proud of him for attending the festival without being forced.

“Hyung, wake up! Aren’t you supposed to go to Sera’s?”

That statement made Jimin jolt from his sleep. His sleepy eyes quickly looked for the hourglass and it was indeed, already 6 p.m.

He could now hear a couple of noises from here and there outside their home. Ah, everyone’s already awake and busy to prepare for the festival.

“C’mon, get up now! Come join us to eat these food shared to us by our neighbors,” says Minhyun excitedly, probably drooling in front of the delicious food that was given to them and he can’t help but smile.

Jimin could associate the festival similar to Thanksgiving Day, Christmas, or perhaps New Year. He could feel everyone’s excitement and happiness from where he stood.

They all sat in front of the table and started digging in to the various foods given to them  by their neighbors and Jimin could feel his tongue melting by how delicious the foods are. The tastes is something comparable to some of his comfort dishes way back from his previous life and he was thankful that somehow he can tastes it again. They were almost done eating when Jackson placed four apricots to their respective plates.

“For the King, the Prince, his brother, and friends,” Jackson starts, holding the apricot in his hand like a glass of champagne waiting to be toast.

Jae nods and raises his apricot too.

“For another memorable festival with you two and Jimin hyung in addition,” adds Jae and eyes Jimin, queueing for his turn to speak.

“Thank you for adding me to this crazy family,” he giggles, and the three nods, pleased with what he had just said, “May we have the most memorable performance at the Palace tonight that the King will asks for us again.”

“And for the witch that saved Leukos from its downfall,” exclaimed Minhyun, which made Jimin winced secretly.

Ah, they will hundred percent be dumbfounded once they find out he was the witch they and the other villagers are thanking for, along with the people from the Palace that saved them from Leukos’s downfall.

Good thing, no one saw his face aside from the Jungkook however he wasn’t a hundred percent sure if he was the only one as he wasn’t wearing the cloak not until Jungkook tried to ran after him after he put off the raging fire that burned almost half of the houses of the villagers that day using his weird magic that somehow disappeared after sending of the enemies back to Erebos.

The three decided to stay at home first and practice their performance for later while Jimin went out to go to the bread house where Sera and his grandmother were waiting for his arrival.

“Oh there you are!” greeted Balam, already dressed for the festival.

“You look lovely, halmeoni,” he commends before she asks him to sit on the stool in front of the little dresser so they can start glamming him up for the festival.

Jimin doesn’t need to have a makeover. The boy already has a face everyone could envy but a little more enhancement won’t hurt.

Well, perhaps, for the gods as he can make them wonder why on earth they made him a mortal when he can be with them, up above, just for themselves to see.

As Balam and Sera busy themselves dolling up Jimin, the witch himself tries to hype himself by remembering pump-up songs Mr. Bang used to play to him whenever he get himself ready to go to a celebration, party, or festival after a couple of convincing from the butler.

He starts swaying his body a little, trying to follow the beat of Woman by Doja Cat. He ain’t a woman but the song does the job to summon his feminine side and damn it always works!

To him, if he wants to give the villagers and the King himself a performance to remembered, along with his bandmates, he needs to have all the confidence he can muster and be as feminine as possible.

He needs to leave an impression just like how they do it in the books and movies. How a mysterious woman, a dancer, will show up at a ball and dances in front of the King to catch his attention, and once it happens, the King himself will plead like a dog for the woman to get her into his chambers. It is exactly what Jimin wants to happen. Minus the chamber part of course.

Oh, to have the upper hand like a woman , he thought.

When they were finished, the grandmother and granddaughter duo could only stare at Jimin with awe and disbelief.

Man, the ex-queen could never with Jimin’s beauty. He’s beyond ethereal. Bet the King or anyone wouldn’t be able to take their eyes off him, and those women who are trying to woo the King will be jealous of Jimin.

How unfair the gods are to make Jimin a beauty no woman can compete when he is indeed a man.

“Uh, is there something wrong?” a blushing Jimin asks, fiddling his fingers, nervous about the overwhelming attention he was receiving from them.

They nodded in response and left him for a while to check for himself what the ‘wrong’ was in his face which was, none of course.

Jimin stared at his reflection a bit too much than he had intended and he almost didn’t recognised himself.

Clothes do change your appearance , he guesses.

He ran his palm over his blue hanbok and damn, the fabric is really made of good quality material. He turns a little on his side to check his body curve and the illusion of the belt giving him made out of a tassel. Yep, definitely a good purchase.

Next, he checks out his face. He wonders how natural makeup can make him look so good like a baby dumpling fresh out of the steamer. He then proceeds to check on his earrings, the fan, and the mask.

Yes, sadly, the witch seemed to be having fun giving mysterious vibes to everyone especially to the King. Making their unofficial game of hide-and-seek, a little difficult for the King to win.

Jimin’s jaw almost dropped as soon as they left the house and went to the capital where the festival would take place.

The scenery looks like it was stripped out of the fantasy movies— but better. The whole Leukos was so bright, enough that it could equal the illumination coming from the moon.

Lots of paper lanterns can be seen from here and there, and a lot of people are dressed fancily like no one had seen previously.

All smiles and are anticipating for the performances tonight of each individual and bands that will perform at the Palace and outside.

Jimin suddenly felt nervous but it didn’t take too long as he thought it would, when he realised it just might be due the cold gust of wind circling the Kingdom.

It’s nighttime anyways and it is not unusual for the weather to be cold during the night compared to the morning.

On their way, as expected, Jimin received a lot of stares and compliments from people they passed by, and he can’t help but feel like a small kid caving in for someone to hide him on their back.

Suddenly, he remembered how he used to do that with Mr. Bang and wished he was here to do that but no. He should face things like this and not do the same thing he did before.

He just kept on bowing, giving, and throwing a couple of thank yous and compliments here and there to whoever they met and admired his beauty.

“We’re almost there,” says Jackson.

“Are you guys ready?” asks Jae, excitedly.

“Always,”

“Never been so ready for this day.”

“How about you, hyung?” asks Sera, and all eyes were on Jimin. He cleared his throat.

“Yeah, I’m ready just a bit nervous.”

They all nod in agreement.

“Well, it’s normal given you’ll be the main person performing in front of the King. His eyes surely won’t leave you, hyung,” says Jae, teasingly.

“Aish!” Jimin braced himself as soon as they arrived at the capital, where the other performers and Palace people are, getting ready for the festivity to officially start.

“Where are you going, Boongi?” asks Jin, when he notices the blob walking away from them inside the Palace.

“Just let him be, hyung. He’s not one to leave the Palace anyway,” Hoseok replied, before attending to Jungkook who was calling him.

Jin shrugged and followed Hoseok’s advice.

Meanwhile Taehyung was conflicted about whether he would follow Boongi because his gut feeling was kicking in again, but perhaps he was just concerned about Yoongi looking for the blob if Boongi suddenly decides to leave the Palace for the first time— which will be hard for them to look for Boongi given the loads of people that will be coming in and out of the Palace tonight.

Little does Taehyung know that his gut feeling was indeed correct.

“Oh, Boongi’s here!” says Balam, smiling before patting the blob’s head but the blob shivered with the contact and quickly turned away from her.

However Balam didn’t take it personally and it just earned quite a few giggles from the others since its shiver was, a cute wiggle of its body and of course, everyone knew Boongi only allowed one person to touch him and it’s the King.

“Boongi?” Jimin’s eyes widened in surprise when he came face to face again with the being that saved his life. Before he could even move to the blob to touch them, Boongi had already hugged or pretty much straddled his body with its tentacles.

“Yoongi? Are you alright?” Jin calls when he noticed his brother acting strange. Or not really. It looks like he was just searching for something or probably for Boongi.

Yoongi didn’t answer him. Instead, he tried to focus on sensing the blob to know who and where the blob was. Unfortunately, the blob’s not giving him any details.

Chapter 12

“Oh so that’s your name,” Jimin whispers, while rubbing the blob’s face lovingly with his thumb who just purred at him, surprising the friends he was with.

Everyone knows how elusive the blob was to everyone not unless it is the king. He may be seen with the King’s brother, son, and friends but they won’t straddle them the way they do with the King and now with Jimin.

Now that’s odd.

Especially when Boongi was the perfect example of, if not friend why friend shape? .

“Boongi seems to favor you, hyung. You must be on the clouds right now. Not everyone can be as lucky as you are, you know that,” says Jae gleefully.

“Huh?” he looks up at them, while Boongi’s still attached to him, not wanting to let go of the witch in its hold.

Balam chuckled, “There must be something in you that only Boongi could see and feel that we don’t. What a lucky child you are, Jimin-ah.”

Sera’s eyes widened upon hearing her grandmother’s words and with mischievous smile on her lips said, “What if it’s a sign from the heavens, hyung? Boongi likes you! I bet the King will like you too! It’s destiny!”

It earned some oohs and aahs accompanied with giggles and some more eading from his friends.

“Aish! Sera!” if Jimin stood next to a tomato right now, no doubt the riped tomato would be jealous of him. His cheeks are much vibrantly redder than a tomato could ever be!

Now, to Jimin, this was something he still and does not want to take seriously however whenever the King will be inserted into a conversation that he and his friends are talking about, he feels… weird .

Every time the King will be included in their conversation, his heart aches, and then, there will be this sudden spark of electricity that runs through his body, earning him goosebumps, and every time that happens, he will long more for the King’s presence when in fact, he had only met him once and had a conversation for a short while and that was in the middle of a battle between the enemies. Thankfully, Jimin haven’t experienced yet dreaming of him or it will be more troublesome just like what the King had been experiencing for a while now since they had met at the battleground.

But then again, he won’t deny the King is handsome. Even when he has a fairly medium vertical scar on his right eye. He wonders how old the King is, as it is normal for someone who belongs to the royal family to take such a high position at a very young age and die at a young age too. To him, Yoongi and he seems to share the same age but he could be wrong.

“So where do you guys want to go? I think there’s still enough time for us to roam before we perform,” Jackson says as he tries to look for an alehouse where he could have a drink or two just to pump himself up before they perform at the palace grounds.

It’s going to be their first time performing in front of the king and a whole lot of audience, all thanks to Jimin, so he does not want to wastes their effort by messing up a few tunes from his instrument just because his hands are shaky from nervousness.

“Halmeoni and I will check some stalls to buy some sweets for us to take home. How about you? Do you want to join us Jimin hyung?”

Jimin turned to his bandmates and they all nodded at him. He smiled and stood next to the two.

“Let’s just meet at the palace entrance,” Jackson replied, with Minhyun beside him.

“I’ll go with Jimin hyung,” exclaimed Jae, as he gleefully hopped next to him with a big smile on his face.

Jae seems to be so fond of Jimin. All his bandmates are. It’s just that Jae seems to be the clingy of the three, not that Jimin minds. He sees Jae as the younger brother he didn’t get to have in his previous life.

After they part ways, one thing Jimin noticed was a lot of kids seemed to be enjoying the celebration. Who wouldn’t? Most celebrations are made entirely for children. To see their beautiful smiles, to hear their hearty giggles. Oh to be young and carefree .

“Are you okay, hyung? You seemed quiet.” Jae whispers, as they walk side by side with Sera and Balam in front of them who were busy looking at each stalls they passed by.

“I am. I just remembered something.”

Jimin was surprised when Jae held his hand and offered him a warm smile.

“Family?” he inquires.

“Yeah.”

“Oh, Bang nim?”

Jimin nods and Jae immediately understood.

All three of them, including Balam and Sera, whenever they see Jimin getting quiet, offers him a kind smile. Because they knew how it feels to lose someone close to you. Especially if that someone was a family member or considered family and Jimin, he often feels melancholic about his past so they allow him to feel things instead of telling him that it’ll soon past because it never will. People just learn how to cope with it but not pass it.

“Ah, hyung!” Jae pouts and wraps his arm around Jimin as they continued to walk. Jimin chuckled and ruffled Jae’s hair.

They stopped at one of the stalls selling sweets, near a group of kids who seemed to be bothering cutely a few adults who passed by them and Jimin can’t help but giggle at their antics before he stopping as Balam was offering him songpyeon .

Oh this , this is something he was familiar with. The tastes might be a little different given this wasn’t the world he grew up with but still good.

He also had yakuza and dasik and was already finishing it with some sikhye that he shares with Boongi, whom was pretty much like his baby right now as he held them in his arms when someone tugged the ends of his hanbok.

He looks down and smiled when he recognizes it was one of the kids who were bothering the adults that were passing by.

“Hi! What can I do for you, my darling?” he asks, and he felt Boongi’s hold tightening. He can’t help but turned his head towards the blob while chuckling. Boongi just leers their eyes at the kid, trying to scare him off. It did work though because the kid held on Jimin and tried to hide himself on his leg.

“Boongi, no,” he warns, softly and the blob turned their head away from the kid and hides themselves on Jimin’s chest instead.

Unaware of his surroundings, his three friends including the stall vendor who saw what just had happened were all in awe.

Boongi does look like Jimin’s child.

“It’s okay now, darling. What can I do for you? Are you hungry? Do you want something to eat?” he asks, kneeling, so he and the kid could speak eye level.

Well, it’s not like the kid is that small, and Jimin is that tall.

“My friends and I are having a bet,” he starts, points at his friends who pull their tongues out to tease him and pout when Jimin catches them in the act, earning a giggle from Jimin, “We’re betting at those who passes at us who’s who that’s going to perform at the Palace tonight and I saw you and bet on you. Please tell me you do otherwise they will ask me to make fun of myself later in front of the King and I don’t want that.”

He saw the kids friends walking towards them and he smiled. Silly bet.

“You’re not cheating, are you?” asks one of the kids once they reached them.

“N-No, I am not!” the kid blushes and looks at Jimin. The witch smiled because technically it could be called cheating by the way the kid asked him to say yes.

Luckily for the kid, he’s really one of the performers for tonight’s celebration so he doesn’t have to lie but even if he’s not, he is willing to for a kid.

What’s the harm in lying to save a kid from a bet?

“Yes, I am one of the performers tonight.”

“Really?” the kid who asked him earlier had his eyes go wide in surprise but some of the kids aren’t convinced yet. They think Jimin was lying but he isn’t.

“Could you prove it to us, hyung?” one of them chirps.

“Hey, that’s not a way to talk to someone older than you. He already said yes. You can watch us later if you want to make sure,” Jae butts in but Jimin stops him.

“It’s okay,” he exclaimed and turned to look at the kids, he tried to think of a song that won’t be the same one he would be singing later in their performance or it would ruin the surprise for the King and the audience.

“Sure, but you have to tell me first what you want to be when you grow up?”

“I want to be strong like Hobi nim!”

“Hobi?”

“Yes! The soldier’s General!”

“Me too! My appa is a soldier ! I want to be like him too! Brave and mighty!”

“I want to be a scholar like Namjoon-nim! He is so smart and I want to be friends with the King too!”

“How about a poet ?”

The kid shook his head, “No, a scholar. What’s a poet?”

“Me! I want to be a king just like I am in my dreams! Just like King Yoongi! Hardworking and caring of us villagers and everyone admires him even when he is a snob at times but still!”

The last statement from the last kid earned some few giggles from some of the kids and the adults who heard it but to Jimin, it reminded him of a song Mr. Bang used to sing to him whenever he wants to lighten up Jimin’s mood and they would dance in circles in the big living room even when it was just the two of them, and to Jimin, at that time Mr. Bang was enough. He doesn’t need anyone else’s.

He turns to look at Jae who in turn is already looking at him.

“Is it okay if you—?”

“Whatever you want, hyung!” he smiles.

Jimin nods and turns to Boongi. He asks the blob to let go of him for a few minutes while he performs for the kids and surprisingly they obeyed him but made sure that the witch was close by to their grasps.

He turns to look at Jae again and starts humming, giving the musician the signal to follow the tune and the young was quick to strum his wolgeum

, earning the attention of the passerbys roaming around, especially the ones that were with their kids.

The witch walked a few steps away from the kids to ready himself. It’s like getting himself into character in a theatre play.

There will come a soldier

who carries a mighty sword

he will tear your city down

oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

Jimin dances interpretatively like he is a soldier telling a story and almost immediately the passerbys, the vendors around stops to what they were doing and watch him perform.

He will tear your city down

Oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

The kids repeated the last line and it made Jimin smile. Meanwhile, Taehyung had just gotten out of the palace as he volunteered to be the one to look for Boongi who had been missing for half an hour now.

Yoongi by now was worrying about the blob’s whereabouts and was about to sneak out of the Palace when his brother saw him and stop him from going anywhere as he is the main person everyone will be looking for during the celebration.

Unbeknownst to him, Boongi was having the time of their life with the witch.

There will come a poet

whose weapon is his word

he will slay you with his tongue

oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

The adults bob their heads from left to right as they help add beats by clapping their hands in sync with every word Jimin says as he turns to each kid with a twirl.

He will slay you with his tongue

oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

Taehyung heard the commotion from afar and got curious as to what it was all about and began rushing to the place where the voices were coming from.

He was surprised to see Boongi there watching the most beautiful man he ever had laid his eyes on. Don’t get him wrong, Jin might be handsome but the man singing was beyond just handsome.

Taehyung can’t believe what his eyes were seeing but he too can’t help but bob his head, following the villagers who were enjoying the witch’s performance.

There will come a ruler

whose brow is laid in thorn

smeared with oil like david’s boy

oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

The villagers turns to look at each other, wondering who the hell David’s boy is but shrug their shoulders and continue enjoying the performance nonetheless.

Smeared with oil like david’s boy

oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

The kids held each other’s hand and formed a dance circle with Jimin completing the chain while Boongi was carefully placed at the center by Jimin, wobbling its tentacles and wondering why they formed a circle around them but when the blob saw the witch’s smile, Boongi let it go.

Why of course, Jimin wants Boongi to be included in this silly thing with the kids.

Oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

he will tear your city down,

oh lei, oh lai, oh lord

When Jimin stops singing and the music died down from Jae’s wolgeum, the kids happily catched their breaths and asked Jimin for one more song.

The adults followed but Jackson and Minhyun came running and stopped their requests. The two were panting.

“It’s about to start,” exclaimed Minhyun.

The kids pouted and were saddened when they heard Minhyun but Jimin was quick to remind them that they would be performing at the palace grounds so they immediately scrambled to get to the venue and find a good spot. Jimin chuckled.

They were about to leave as well but Jimin remembered Boongi. He was about to pick carry him when Taehyung finally got out of his trance and called the blob, earning their attention.

They bowed at him but Taehyung seemed not to get his eyes off of Jimin who was staring back at him.

Of course, he remembers Taehyung.

He wonders if he remembers him, even when he doesn’t have any idea if Taehyung saw what he looks like underneath the cloak he was wearing at that time when he came to help him.

“Come on now, Boongi. The King’s already worried about you and he won’t be happy if I return alone,” he exclaimed, as he tried to get Boongi to go with him.

But the blob’s making it hard for Taehyung. Jimin saw it. His friends saw it. Everyone knows how stubborn Boongi is. He only listens to Yoongi and perhaps now, to Jimin.

Taehyung turns to Boongi, who seemed adamant to let go of Jimin’s leg. Wrapping their tentacles as tight as they can, but not to the point of hurting Jimin, or leaving marks to his skin. Taehyung sighed in defeat.

As much as Jimin also does not want to lose sight of the blob, he has to. He and his band have to get themselves ready before they perform at the palace grounds. Hopefully, Boongi will listen to him.

He leaned down and carefully took one of Boongi’s tentacles to help them get up so he could carry them in his arms which the blob quickly obliged. It likes the feeling being held by the witch.

“Will Boongi be a good fluff and follow his hyung? I’m pretty sure your Father’s already worried sick about you and you don’t want to see him sad, don’t you?” he asks, softly caressing their cheeks.

The blob just stares at him, and so does his friends and Taehyung between their interaction. Boongi only tightened his hold on Jimin though.

“Boongi,”

The blob shook its head and tried its best to present the best doe eyes it could give. It always works with Yoongi but not with the witch. Jimin thinks Boongi needs to learn when not to be stubborn and listen to what was being asked of them.

“Again, do you want your Father to be sad?”

The blob slowly shook his head.

“Then do you want me to be sad?”

The blob hastily shook its head, surprising Taehyung. He hasn’t seen anyone have a hold of Boongi like Yoongie does, besides the witch who unfortunately died the night they won the battle against their enemies.

Then it dawned to Taehyung. Goosebumps prickling his skin when he yet again took a good look at Jimin and Boongi’s interaction.

It can’t be. His hair is black! There’s no way he is that witch. However he cannot just set aside the fact that Jimin’s beauty is ethereal. Even the ex-queen herself won’t be as beautiful as the man in front of him is.

“There you go,” Jimin smiled as he guides Boongi to Taehyung’s arms who was surprised as his friends was that indeed, the blob listened to him. Funnily, one of its tentacles is still tangled on Jimin’s wrist.

“I think this fluff likes to be carried that much. You need to tell the King not to do that all the time. Boongi’s way too spoiled,” he says, smiling at Taehyung and the other just nods in agreement because it was true.

Yoongi always carry Boongi like a baby.

“Alright, you be good now with your hyung. We’ll be going now but I’ll see you there at the palace ground, okay?” he exclaimed, removing that one tentacle that was still attached to him and kissing it before the blob pulled it back to itself defeatedly.

Boongi nods.

Jimin sighed to himself as soon as they part ways with Boongi and Taehyung.

It seems like the young witch didn’t recognize his voice. Perhaps because their interaction together was so short that it wasn’t enough for the other to remember him or his voice but that’s fine.

Jimin thinks he’s not that ready yet to out himself that he was indeed, the witch that helped them with their victory against Erebos. Not yet. At least for now.

“He’s not that witch that night, was he?” he asks, upon turning to Boongi but the blob just sticks its tongue out towards him, teasing him and in turn, he made a face at the blob turning it to a silly, petty fight as they walk back to the palace ground where the King had been impatiently waiting for their arrival.

Wondering what Boongi saw or heard that made his heart warm yet confused at the same time, earning him this weird surge of possessiveness to something or someone.

Chapter 13

“I still can’t believe you were able to tame Boongi that easily,” commends Minhyun, as he adjusts the strings of his seul .

Jimin blushed, while he fiddled the strings of his dangjok with his fingers.

“Just got lucky this one time with Boongi, I guess,” he replied, to deflate any suspicion his friends may have right now with him.

“Even so, that was incredible for you to be able to do that aside from the King himself,” butts Jackson as he too, adjusts some strings on his kayagum , “The last time he did just that, was during the war with the Kai and his six witches. I remembered them siding with the orange witch like they were its master and not the King. It was cool though,”

They were, as Jimin would like to call it, backstage, while Sera and Balam were already with the others watching other performers perform their piece in front of the King.

Jimin almost choke with what Jackson had told him. So Jackson was one of those villagers who were there to witness his magic. Although he can’t remember seeing him there, which was a good thing. Otherwise he wouldn’t have come with them if he knew they were, but it’s too late for that now and he just hopes none would figure it was him who that which was. Not that he remember doing something bad to them.

“You sure you’re still going to wear that, hyung? You don’t want the king to see your beauty?” Jae was referring to the half-face mask that was sitting on the top side of his head. He nods.

“It’s part of our performance. Besides, It’s not like I want him to focus on my face,”

“Yeah, you’re right. We don’t want the King to act like how Boongi was with you earlier. We aren’t ready to see you get married so soon.” Jackson teases, earning giggles from Minhyun and Jae and a deep blush from Jimin.

“Hey! Stop with that nonsense! We might get beheaded if someone from the Palace hears you. Besides, I’m pretty sure he is into women only. He has a son, has he not?”

“Well, it’s not like the King can’t change his mind the moment he sees you.”

Meanwhile, while everyone was enjoying the show the performers had put on for everyone, with some of them, trying to woo the King, to hopefully make Yoongi fall in love with them, Yoongi turns to Taehyung who was sitting next to Jin on his left side.

“So where did you find Boongi?” he asks, while the blob sits on his lap, squinting its eyes, trying to look for Jimin amidst the big crowd.

“I saw them near the market along with some kids and performers for tonight. They were… uhm… dancing with them.”

“Dancing?” Jin and Yoongi asks in unison.

Of course, they’ll be surprised. Everyone knew how aloof the blob was to everyone. Children are no exception. Well, except if there’s an emergency that requires its help just like from the previous battle.

“Yes. Dancing.”

“With the kids?” Yoongi warily looks at Taehyung and the young witch sighed. He can’t keep this information a secret to the King, can he not? But nah, he doesn’t want to face the consequences, especially if the king we are talking about was Yoongi himself.

“Yes and some performers, althought there’s this particular performer that he seemed to be fond of.”

“Will that performer be joining us tonight?”

He nods, “Yes, but I’m not sure how soon they will be performing.”

“Good. I want to see that performer who Boongi had spent their time with.”

And as if the blob knew who Yoongi and Taehyung was talking about, Boongi turned themselves to Yoongi and gave them their biggest and cute doe eyes they ever had given him.

Yoongi softly smiled at them and caressed its head, earning soft purrs from Boongi.

Taehyung winced remembering what Jimin had told him about Boongi. Uh, so spoiled.

“Were you able to get her name?”

Taehyung shook his head.

“Our interaction was cut short because they had to rush here, and it was he not a she. “

Yoongi sighed although surprised.

The King himself’s getting pretty impatient to meet the person who Boongi felt comfortable with other than him.

Of course, it’s a big deal to Yoongi. The blob, who he considers like his second child next to Jungkook, just interacted with yet another person who wasn’t him or someone close to him. Of course, it will spike his curiosity against said person.

Somehow Jungkook’s idea of the witch being alive is getting to him. What if his son was right all along? But then again, it can’t be.

No one survives getting burned by the Phoenix. Everyone knew that. Everyone saw how nasty the fire that came out from its beak to burn Jimin alive. Also Taehyung said it was a he and everyone knew a powerful witch can’t be a man but a woman.

However the idea is still pretty much there due to the facts Jungkook laid to them- the cloak, and the witch’s single strand of orange hair (which was surprisingly in his possession) that remained untouched during the burning of the witch by the Phoenix.

Including the fact that were no ashes nor traces left when the witch was burnt alive, and no matter how crazy that fire was that the bird had created, enough for them not to be able to save Jimin, there should have been ash traces, like Jungkook had mentioned, and the robe and the witch’s hair that should have been included to be burned along with its body but mysteriously didn’t.

Yoongi heaved a deep sigh and massages his temple. Why was he worrying over that simple interaction Boongi has with this particular performer? He shouldn’t have had. Like Taehyung said, it was a he.

Jungkook, who was sitting in between Namjoon and Hoseok on the right side of Yoongi, turned to look at his father, concern’s visibly written on his eyes.

“You alright, Appa?”

Yoongi slightly smiled at his son and nodded.

“Mm, ’was just thinking, son. That’s all.”

“Something bothering you, hyung?” asks Namjoon, eyes still on the performers.

“Boongi seemed to find another person he’s comfortable with besides me.”

This time, Namjoon turns to look at him and at Boongi before simply glancing at Jin who he thinks was extra pretty tonight.

He had to reminds himself to tell that to the prince later on during their dance. He’s sure Jin will appreciate it. He always does. Jin loves being complimented and he thinks the prince deserves all those compliments too.

“Really? How?”

“Taehyung said he saw Boongi dancing earlier with some kids and performers for tonight outside the Palace. Althought they seemed to be fond of this particular performer.”

“Oh, isn’t that great? Perhaps Boongi is now starting to learn to interact with other people besides you. Don’t you like it?”

“I will appreciate if Boongi remains aloof with other people besides me for good reasons. It’s not like our enemies are dead and the witches cannot use them to their advantage against me. Boongi is not like Jungkook who can actively protect himself when there is danger. Most of the time, he acts like a baby that needs protection from me.”

“Well, not to go against you, hyung but Boongi’s pretty much acts like a baby because you also treat him like one.”

Yoongi glared at him but did not take Namjoon’s word that hard because he knew his advisor’s right. Well, could you blame him when Boongi acts cutely towards him? He is such a fluff! No one can resists aside from Jimin but he doesn’t need to know that yet is what Taehyung thinks.

“I think you will no longer need to worry that much once Boongi has someone who can teach them. Like how a parent does to their child. Someone who can be like a… I don’t know, perhaps a mother figure to Boongi. It already has a father figure in the form of you but not a mother.”

Yoongi smirks, unamused by the suggestion.

“Are you telling me to find a new wife? To make the same mistake I did with Jungkook’s mother?” he asks, bitter memories playing at the back of his head like it was just yesterday. The supposedly happy and lovely marriage soon turned into a nightmare.

Namjoon cleared his throat.

“I didn’t say you find another woman to replace the late queen. At the end of the day, it’s your decision if you want to find one or not. Not mine, hyung. Jungkook is already old enough to understand if you want to marry again. However it doesn’t mean having a new wife means she will be able to tame Boongi. It takes a huge amount of luck to get Boongi to even listen to anyone besides you.”

Yoongi smirks, “Yes, you’re right.”

Namjoon was about to reply but stopped when the audience starts murmuring excitedly for the next performer.

The last performer had just finished so, naturally a new one will be next but what they noticed was, some of the audience that were there were pretty much had been waiting and anticipating for this next particular performer for tonight.

It seems that the next one is kind of popular, especially with the children which is surprising because normally, children easily gets bored of watching performances like these. Interesting .

Boongi’s eyes widened in recognition and start wiggling its tentacles, surprising Yoongi who had his chin resting at his palm.

The King turned to Taehyung.

“Yes, King,” Taehyung nods and Yoongi can’t help but frown when he notices that the main performer covers half of his face.

Why would he do that?

How could he figure who Jimin was? How could he see how ethereal the man is?

Before a few more questions get into his head with no possible answers coming from the witch himself, the music begins. Thus making the bonfire at the centre burns a little bit brighter and bigger than earlier only for Jimin and his friends.

I’m like the water when your ship rolled in that night

Rough on the surface but you cut through like a knife

And if it was an open-shut case

I never would’ve known from that look on your face

Lost in your current like a priceless wine

Everyone in the audience was quiet. Not because they do not like it but because there was something as to how Jimin is setting the mood of their performance.

The more that you say

The less I know

Wherever you stray

I follow

I’m begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

Man, the moment Jimin turns to look at the Yoongi while saying those lines, it feels like he was going to have goosebumps all over his body but thankfully, he didn’t but the King sure did.

Life was a willow and it bent right to your wind (oh)

Head on the pillow, I could feel you sneaking in

As if you were a mythical thing

Like you were a trophy or a champion ring

And there was one prize I’d cheat to win

The witch, albeit wearing a mask, can’t help but blush for he knew that with everyone looking at him, only Yoongi’s burning gaze at was making him feel things and somehow the song’s also doubling the feeling it is giving him. He can feel his heart racing and wanting to rip itself out of his chest.

The more that you say

The less I know

Wherever you stray

I follow

I’m begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

You know that my train could take you home

Anywhere else is hollow

I’m begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

Jimin gulped. He is starting to think that the song he chose to perform tonight was a mistake. What if the King misunderstood it by thinking Jimin’s trying to woo him? He isn’t ready for the consequences yet.

Even without the witch trying, Aidios had already written it out for the two of them. That one will fall first until the other reciprocates and their love will blooms so beautifully, exactly how Taehyung’s dice had been telling the young witch for the past six moons and counting.

Life was a willow and it bent right to your wind (oh)

They count me out time and time again

Life was a willow and it bent right to your wind (oh)

But I come back stronger than a ’90s trend

Jungkook, although enjoying and mesmerized by Jimin and his band’s performance cannot help but get distracted by some of the lines the witch was saying.

Like what in the world is an open-shut case? Train? Champion ring? And most especially a 90’s trend?

He then starts thinking about the performer’s identity, the one who was singing with his instrument.

Is this someone who was born and raised from Leukos? And even so, he isn’t and might be from Erebos, the words coming out from Jimin aren’t something that he had heard from before.

Now there’s only one thing. One thing that he has in mind however he was afraid that he might be wrong because from what he can see, the performer’s hair is black which he remembers Jimin isn’t.

But again, in his head, no matter how much Jimin claims he is a bookkeeper, a witch could pretty much do anything. His breath hitches as his excitement bubbles up.

Jimin, on the other hand, starts dancing around the bonfire as he glances at Yoongi from time to time, trying not to meet his eyes but just enough to see how he was doing.

If the King was getting bored or anything, but he was proven wrong.

Yoongi was extremely fascinated by the person performing behind the masks more than he had ever with, from the other performers they had for tonight.

Their eyes met and Jimin almost forgot his line. Almost.

Wait for the signal and I’ll meet you after dark

Show me the places where the others gave you scars

Oh, those lines surely triggered something within Yoongi. Never had he heard someone sing something that spoke to him the way the mysterious performer did and Jimin noticed that. Blame Taylor Swift for making such wonderful, soul-speaking songs. The last thing he wants to happen tonight was to really end up to Yoongi’s bed chambers.

Now this is an open-shut case

Guess I should’ve known from the look on your face

Every bait and switch was a work of art

The more that you say

The less I know

Wherever you stray

I follow

I’m begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

You know that my train could take you home

Anywhere else is hollow

I’m begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

Whoever in the crowd that may have had started it, thanks to them, the entire Palace ground turned into a ball

even before the actual dance could start.

Each dances with their partner, as Jimin continues to dance around the bonfire, and the children somehow made their way to Jimin and followed his dance steps.

Hoseok, impressed, asksed Taehyung to join him to dance along with the crowd, to which the young hesitates at first, but eventually gives in since Jungkook himself was too busy daydreaming when he turns to look at him which the Prince wasn’t.

He was trying to analyze everything that is happening. That he is hearing and seeing.

Jin and Namjoon followed after Hoseok and Taehyung, leaving him, Yoongi, and Boongi to their seats.

His father seemed to be under the performer’s spell.

Spell?

He then turns to look at Jimin again.

Surely, it couldn’t just be such simple spell if he did put one, to make them and his band to be the best performer for tonight, because then why is he the only one who wasn’t fazed? Although yes, he enjoys their performance but he’s not one of those that were lile currently put on a trance like his Father does. Perhaps it was just something of Jimin’s aura that got everyone to be like this, which was true.

He was about to sneak a glance at Taehyung when he noticed the bonfire forming a familiar shape. Something that he knew he had seen before.

He turns to look at his father but Yoongi’s eyes seem to be fixated to Jimin and Jimin only. Nothing else.

The more that you say

The less I know

Wherever you stray

I follow

Begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

You know that my train could take you home

Anywhere else is hollow

Begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

Hey, that’s my man

That’s my man

Yeah, that’s my man

Every bait and switch was a work of art

That’s my man

Hey, that’s my man

I’m begging for you to take my hand

Wreck my plans

That’s my man

It took a few minutes for everyone especially the next performer to realised that Jimin and his band were already done with their performance and are now leaving center stage. Jungkook immediately rose from his seat to follow the band, to see the performer’s face behind the mask and almost wasn’t able to catch them as the crowd starts to scramble back to their places.

His eyes widened in surprise and excitement when Jimin finally decides removed the half mask covering his face.

He couldn’t be mistaken! His hair color might have changed (and for all he cares, the witch can have many different hair colors as he pleases) but he knew it! He knew the witch was still alive! Jimin is alive!

Chapter 14

“And where do you think you’re going Min Jungkook?” asks Jin with both hands on the side of his hips, one brow raised and suspiciously eyeing his niece with Taehyung beside him.

“O-Out,”

“Out? Don’t you have studies today with Namjoon-ssi?”

“Oh, uh, I forgot? Thanks for reminding me Jin-samchon.” Jungkook immediately bowed to Jin and ran in the opposite direction of where he was originally planning to go with the scroll between his arms.

He sighed. At least they didn’t notice what he was holding.

To be honest, he felt like a thief right now— an accomplished one, by successfully getting the lists of performers that had performed at the celebration of the Harvest Season.

In reality, he could have just asked anyone he’s close with to get the list for him but he knew they will get suspicious, especially his Father. As he had never ask anything like this before. Yoongi might mistaken his request of him finally finding someone he is interested in when in reality, he already found one and it had been a while now since he realised he liked that person and that was no other than Taehyung. He sighed.

“What’s with you today, Kook? You seem kind of strange,” says Namjoon, who was continuesly writing on the scroll he’s working on without looking at the younger. But he knew, he knew something was off with his godchild/student. Especially when Jin asked him to check up on Jungkook when they met earlier at the Palace’s hallway.

“Strange? Me? I think I’m okay just like every day, hyung. Why?” he replied, puzzled.

“Are you sure?” this time Namjoon looks at Jungkook and stared at him. The young tried his hardest not to do anything funny or his hyung would tell Yoongi about it and he wasn’t ready yet to get another lecturing from him.

“Yes, hyung.” he nods. Namjoon sighed and rubbed his temple. The action made the younger a little worried.

“You okay, hyung?”

“Yes. Yes, I am. Now why don’t you take a break today and rest? Or do whatever you want to do? Sounds good?”

Jungkook blinks. He was surprised by Namjoon’s offer but then again, this is also kind of not surprising since he is Namjoon’s favorite student besides the fact he’s his godfather. Besides he wasn’t called by Namjoon and the other scholars’ golden maknae for nothing. One day of rest from studying wouldn’t hurt, right?

Plus, wouldn’t that also be a great time for him to find the witch and meet him?

“Uh sure?” he tried not to act excited about it otherwise Namjoon might change his mind and that’s the last thing he wants to happen. His impatient ass could no longer skip a day not being able to interact with Jimin.

“And Jungkook—”

“Yes, hyung?” he turned around, hugging the scroll from earlier he had bought with him instead of leaving it in his bed chamber.

“What’s with the scroll? Aren’t you supposed to leave that here?”

He gulped. Uh-oh.

What’s he supposed to reply to that, that wouldn’t spike Namjoon’s suspicious ass?

“This is a scroll for leisure, hyung, and not for studying. Leaving my sketches here won’t be a good idea, hyung. Trust me .”

Namjoon nods and finally lets Jungkook go.

A few minutes later, Hoseok came into the study room. He cleared his throat to announce his arrival to Namjoon who seemed immersed to whatever he was doing.

“Ah, hyung,” he greets.

“Well, guess what?”

“Aish!”

Hoseok chuckled before sitting on Jungkook’s spot with his chin on top of the back of his hands, scanning the room before landing back his focus on Namjoon’s face. Man, the advisor is so handsome! Prince Jin is so lucky to have such an admirer.

“I suggests you look in the mirror too, hyung, if you think I’m handsome, you do too.”

“Aish, Namjoon!” Hoseok got out of his daze with a blush on his cheeks. Did he hear my thoughts or am I just being too obvious with my staring?

“Anyway, as I was saying earlier, the list of performers on the night of our celebration is currently missing but they are now trying to look for the culprit, as the King’s primary task to us was to look for that one performer he seems to be interested in meeting.”

Namjoon chuckled and raised his head to look at Hoseok.

“There’s no need to find the culprit. I know exactly where he will be going and that’s exactly where the performer the King is interested in meeting can be found,” he replied, amusing Hoseok.

“What do you mean?”

“Follow me.”

Meanwhile, Jungkook is now standing in front of the bakery where Jimin works with the scroll clasped in his arms.

“Your majesty,” Sera greets with a bow, “What bring you here? Are looking for something or perhaps someon

e ?“ she asks, knowing fully why the King’s son is here.

It’s not like Jimin’s friends are anticipating that something exactly like this would happen, but still, Sera believed it is a possibility given how enigmatic Jimin’s presence is, however what she didn’t expect though was for the prince to be the one to look for her hyung and not the King himself.

“Someone,” Jungkook replied.

Sera nods, “May I know who so that I can help you find the one you’re looking for?”

“The baker of this bread house please,”

“Oh, Jimin hyung?”

“Yes, Jimin hyung.”

“Unfortunately he isn’t here today. Well, you see your majesty, he fell ill after their performance at the Palace.”

Jungkook suddenly got worried about the witch’s well-being.

“Is there someone who takes care of him?”

“Well, right at this hour, I believe he is just on his own. His friends won’t be back until dawn from their work.”

“Could you please tell me where he lives exacly so I could pay him a visit?”

“Of course, your majesty. If it’s not disrespectful to you too, may you also bring some of the pieces of bread my halmeoni made for him? I’ll also add some for you and the King.”

Meanwhile, as Jungkook is on his way to Jimin’s, Yoongi looks for Boongi at the Palace but the blob seemed to be missing yet again until he spots his brother and Taehyung talking loudly before calling their attention.

“Yes, Yoongi?”

“Have you seen Boongi?”

“Mm, no. Is Boongi missing again?”

“Well, at this point since I start looking for Boongi, yes. I think Boongi is missing.”

“Boongi might be outside the Palace again, hyung. You know? Wandering off places.”

Yoongi sighed. Boongi going out of the Palace had never been an issue before but since they started displaying weird affection to certain people lately, the King couldn’t help not to get worried.

Who could blame him though? He sees Boongi as his own, like Jungkook.

“Do you want us to look for Boongi? We’re planning to get out anyway to buy some bread at the bakery. You know, the one that sells the tangerine bread you like so much. Do you want to join us? I’m pretty sure the villagers would love to see you visit them once in a while.”

Yoongi nods, “Alright.”

What they didn’t expect though upon arriving in front of the bread house, was to meet Hoseok and Namjoon there too, who were currently talking to Sera, asking for Jimin’s whereabouts to which the young revealed Jungkook had already gone to see the witch earlier today.

“So you mean to tell me, my niece, Jungkook, went to see the performer whom Yoongi was also interested to meet?”

Hoseok nods, “Yes, hyung. It seems that the Prince went to get the list without anyone’s help. Possibly trying to keep his plan a secret.”

“But why?” Taehyung asks. Not that he feels jealous or anything. In fact, he actually already has an idea why Jungkook did kept his plan a secret to everyone if incase that performer, the one Yoongi’s looking for, the performer he met outside the Palace’s ground with Boongi was the same witch they all thought died that night of the battle which Jungkook refused to believe he was.

“That we don’t know yet but we’re about to find out soon enough. We’re almost there anyway,” replied Hoseok, waving at the kids they passed by.

“And how about you Hyungs? What brings you there at the bread house?” asks Namjoon.

“We were originally planning to buy some tangerine bread until we saw you talking to the owner’s granddaughter.”

The five didn’t have a hard time looking for the said house Sera told them, as a lot of their neighbors seemed to be fond of Jimin and his friends too.

Not to mention that their house, albeit small and old, looks lively from afar. The house was surrounded by lots of plants and colorful flowers and oh, they seem to be just in perfect timing. The witch is cooking and everyone nearby knows it as the aromatic smell dances itself out of their chimney.

They could feel their mouths water from the smell and their stomach starts rumbling.

“So, who knocks?” asks Hoseok.

“I’ll do it,” Taehyung volunteers but before his knuckles could even touch the wooden door, they hear Jungkook’s messy giggles from the inside of the house.

The young witch froze, surprised. Because everyone knew, especially Yoongi, although the Prince socialize to people, Jungkook’s someone who hardly laughs or be comfortable with anyone especially if he just met them for the first time.

Curious, Jin immediately leaned on the door to investigate what made his niece laughed, with Taehyung and Hoseok following him.

“It’s not even that funny, darling,” says Jimin, as he continuesly stir the food he was cooking, with Boongi sleeping in his arms.

“It does, hyung! Pretty sure my samchon will love your humor! Oh, and also Hobi hyung!” chirps Jungkook, as he patiently sits on the one-seater chair and swing both of his legs in the air like a child, which he used to be.

“Aish, whatever you say, kiddo.”

Kiddo? The three looked at each other in confusion as they continue to gossip about what was happening on the side of the door.

“Do you have another one, hyung? Something I could tell samchon and Namjoon hyung?”

“Hmm,” Jimin thinks as he, for some reason, feels someone else’s presence besides Jungkook but decided it might be just him.

“What do you call a 5-year-old onion?”

“Huh?” Jungkook tilts his head and tries to think. Even the ones who were at the door tried to think of an answer.

“Onyeon!” Jimin answers his question.

It took a few minutes before the joke was picked up, and it was no other than Jin who surprised everyone with his loud laugh.

[Explanation: The number 5 in Korean is 오 (o) and “year” is expressed as 년 (nyeon). So, a 5-year-old onion is called 오년 ( onyeon ). It means 5 years, and it sounds like the word onion. Whatever you do, don’t eat that 오년 (onyeon)! ]

Jungkook immediately rose from his seat as he recognized the laugh coming from the outside of the house and oh heavens, he was right! Jin was there with Taehyung, Hoseok, Namjoon, and his father, Yoongi.

“What are you—?”

“Who was it?” asks Jimin, walking towards Jungkook. His breath hitched when he and Yoongi’s eyes met. The King’s eyes darkened playfully upon seeing Jimin with Boongi latching on to the witch like it was the blob’s lifeline and no longer Yoongi’s.

Chapter 15

Tension .

There was an immediate tension that enveloped he and his friend’s house as soon Jimin invite the five over inside. Of course, he don’t want to be rude and just leave them out there while Jungkook stayed inside to chat with him.

Jimin can’t help but feel anxious around them. More specifically to Yoongi. He knew he wouldn’t be able to avoid them even if he wants to, but he didn’t expect them to flock this early on him.

Plus, he was the one who invited them over so he must endure their presence and possible questioning, right ? Right.

However, he knew that the main reason why he’s anxious, panicking even, the fact that he’s being surrounded by them now, was because of Yoongi. He can feel the King’s eyes on him without even looking at him.

He offered them tea, as that was the only thing he can offer to the five of them at the moment. Hopefully, they don’t mind though.

“You seemed to be very fond of citrus delicacies aren’t you, Jimin-ssi?” asks Jin, putting down his teacup after a few sips, with a mischievous grin on his lips.

Jimin shook his head, “I’m not, your majesty. It just happens that such fruits are abundant right now, so instead of waiting for them to rot with no use, I found a way to take advantage of them.”

He needs to be careful with every word that comes out from of his mouth, otherwise he might slip or say something out of the blue that will make them suspicious of him. It’s best if Jungkook is the only one right now to know who he really is.

Luckily for Jimin, Jungkook seemed to be wanting to keep his secret to himself. Not wanting to reveal Jimin’s secret unless approved by Jimin himself, or necessary.

“Say, what did you put in here if you don’t mind telling? I’ve been drinking tea since I was born and never had I ever thought of, or anyone in the palace exactly to make this type of tea that you made.”

Hoseok nods, “It’s quite surprising you’re not working in the Palace with this kind of skill you have. Pretty sure you will get approve if you try to make an entreaty.”

They were all looking at Jimin but the witch only tremble under Yoongi’s gaze. It’s like the King was just waiting for him to make a mistake. A signal , to point his sword onto his neck.

He sighed in his head.

“I adore my life outside the Palace. Besides, I’m certain there are far more deserving individuals than me to be working for the majesties.” he replied, “Nothing fancy was put on that tea too. It’s just persimmon, some ginger, peppercorns, and cinnamon bark.”

Yoongi nods, but did not dare say anything which made Jimin more nervous than he already was, since the King stepped foot inside the house.

It’s not that Jimin is being biased but really, he doesn’t feel threatened by the others presence except his. He had never felt like it with anyone else’s in his previous life.

“What’s this?” Namjoon asks, lifting the hourglass. Jimin eyes widened, stopping the advisor before he could turn the said object upside down.

“That’s a—”

Yoongi tilted his head to look, and tried his best to hold back a smirk with his chin at the back of his palm while staring at Jimin.

Ever since they arrived in front of the house, there was this surge of familiarity he felt which, only heightened upon meeting eyes with Jimin.

He don’t know if the other can feel it too, but by the way how Jimin’s facial reaction suggests, he thinks the younger does.

It’s not like the King was trying to assume things, but to him it seems that, he may have met Jimin before. Somewhere. Apart from the festival, of course. And he already has an idea in mind where it could have been.

“Where did you learn these things, Jimin-ssi? You’re not a previous scholar, are you?”

“A-ah, no! Certainly not,” he quickly denies, “Just a mere performer that learned a few things from many different people,” whom had written good books, but mainly from Mr. Bang , was what Jimin wants to say but didn’t.

“You know, it’s not too late to become a scholar and teach these things to the young. It will be a great help to pass down these teachings to them,”

“I’ll think about it.” he nods.

But of course, Jimin was well-aware that there are only two things that can happen that are holding him back from taking the offer.

Sure, he can share his knowledge with anyone if he wants to, as he was a bookkeeper in his previous life, however it was also the same reason why he ended up being in this world— his second life, and it will be a shame if the same thing happens to him again.

Especially since Yoongi seemed to despise witches which, no matter how hard he tries to correct it, the King sees him as one, and Jimin is well aware of what he can do to him if he declines to work with him.

But that is, only if Jungkook decides to rat him out, which nothing has happened yet , as he was busy happily munching on the sweets he made just for him.

Meanwhile, Taehyung can’t help but wants to asks Jungkook the reason why he went to see Jimin alone. Like what had been said before, he’s not jealous or anything.

Alright, maybe. But just a bit, as he is mostly intrigued about Jimin, of who he might really be. Especially when yet again, Boongi blatantly displayed clinginess with another individual besides Yoongi.

Taehyung’s certain Yoongi’s wondering, perhaps beyong fascinated, seeing Boongi’s behavior towards Jimin. As it only happened once before with the witch whom, he supposedly thought can be his mentor but somehow mysteriously died because of the Phoenix burning him alive.

Wait.

He simply, but quickly turns to look back at Jimin again. Examined him from head to toe (respectfully, of course). Then to Boongi, and then to Jungkook. Then he remembered the divination he had before the Celebration.

His eyes slowly turning wide in realization.

Why of course did he not think about that possibility? Jungkook was the only person who had remained adamant, believing said witch did not die that night of the war, with all the facts he relentlessly keeps on pointing on, contradicting their belief.

He remembered how Boongi had acted very strange towards said witch, the first time the two had probably met,  even the witches who created the blob was stunned. Seeing how quickly it became attached to the orange witch instead of siding with Yoongi during the fight is such a mystery to everyone until now.

Then, remembered how Boongi acted that day before the festival when he and Jin went to the market to buy things with them.

Fastforward on the night of the celebration, when he saw Boongi with Jimin and how adamant the blob was to let go of him, and how everyone during their performance was mesmerized during their band’s performance.

Mainly, because of Jimin’s alluring, nearly siren voice as he danced infront of the King. Jimin doesn’t look like he was trying to woo Yoongi, unlike the other performers that night but still— well, that makes perfect sense!

Taehyung knew he needed to do something to prove to himself that Jimin was that witch. That he was the one they were all thankful for that night, for saving them from the hands of a bad ruler. For being killed or turn into a slave.

But he had to do it subtly. He don’t want to get Jimin into trouble.

He knew Jungkook wouldn’t risk himself stealing that scroll, and going all the way down here without telling anyone just to prove to them Jimin was that witch that saved them from Kai and his witches. He most likely wants to protect him too from his own Father, given the history Yoongi has with the witches, as the King himself can be a little on and off at times.

“Jimin-ssi, I have a question if you don’t mind me asking,” Taehyung asks, making Jimin turn to him.

“Carry on,”

“You said awhile ago that you are not fond of citrus fruits, right? I’m just wondering why, because not everyone likes it due to its taste that can be overwhelming for some, was there perhaps, someone close to you that shares the same tastebuds as our King that reminds you of them, or do you just like the color (orange) because it reminds you of other things?”

Without even turning to look at him, Taehyung felt Jungkook eyes staring at him, and that was already a huge takeaway. His heart began beating fast in anticipation. In excitement.

“Oh,”

Oh? That it? That’s it? Just that?

He was supposed to (lightly) expose him!

However Jimin’s lack of reply was perhaps, due to Boongi trying to get Jimin’s attention away from them. Just like Yoongi, when someone else tries to steals his favorite’s attention away from him.

As expected, Jimin turned, providing the attention Boongi wanted from him. None of them mattered at that moment for the witch but the blob alone. Which secretly spikes Yoongi’s interests.

Boongi quickly sinks itself in fear after finally realising Yoongi’s presence in the room. Uh-oh.

“Don’t do that,” Jimin states firmly, as he softly pats the scared blob’s head.

Everyone was astonished how valiant Jimin was, ordering Yoongi like it was the most normal thing to asks someone titled as King.

“Come again?” Yoongi raised a brow, but did not take Jimin’s order hardly. He was amused by his confidence. He feels challenged by the man infront of him.

And then, there it was again. T

hat, same familiar surge of goosebumps running through the course of his body, just by being within Jimin’s orbit. It feels fated, irreplaceable, and irrevocable.

“I said, don’t do that. You’re scaring him.” says Jimin, upset how annoying Boongi’s so-called Father was.

“And who are you to tell me, humble commoner of mine?” he mocks, “I am the King and Boongi is my own. Are you telling me that they are scared of me when they came from mine?” he smirks, as he and Jimin had a staredown battle. It was so intense that if a fly dares to fly in between, the fly would die in an instant.

The others were just looking at each other, amused yet terrified, then back to Jimin and Yoongi as none would want to disturb them and their silly fight.

It was refreshing to see the King being challenged by a commoner as it had never happened before. Yoongi always make sure he has the last move or say on everything. He always win except now, of course, and it was really fun to watch, mainly to Jin.

Jimin gulped when Yoongi, who he thinks thought of their house as the Palace, and his current seat was his throne, suddenly spread open his legs to assert dominance on him.

Jimin fought his hardest to dare not shy his eyes away and look all the way down Yoongi’s pants or it’ll he more disrespectful than what he’s doing now by talking directly without any honorifics or please

, attached to what he was asking Yoongi to do.

Well-aware that he is indeed, the King of this land he’s stepping on but goddamn , there’s something about the King’s demeanor that changed in an instant, and Jimin can’t help but find it hot! Or, maybe it was just him being a sex-deprived, hopeless romantic in his previous life.

“Well, for starters,”

There you go. Carry on , Yoongi thought to himself with a smirk. He’s certain he isn’t the only one in this four walls confused with Jimin’s choice of words.

Jimin’s vocabulary. His slip of tongue.

Uh-oh , Jimin might have forgotten checking on with his temper as Yoongi seemed to have finally found a way to annoy him, and it upsets him how Yoongi seemed indifferent in acknowledging his behavior towards Boongi when he infact, said it himself, that Boongi was his. That it came from him.

He should know when to stop and start caring for the blob, Jimin insists in his mind.

Well, Yoongi, had been known by many as the quiet but smart King. He had been listening, observing, and analysing Jimin’s actions and words that come out of his lips the whole time, just like how Jimin thought he would, by just listening and staring at him, taunting him with just his mere presence to make Jimin fall into his trap.

Without even trying, Yoongi’s focus revolved around Jimin’s, before he even realised what he was doing, and he noticed how careful the other was with his replies. How some of the phrases Jimin use are mostly words none of them uses and has not been heard before.

Therefore it only proves to him more who the person standing infront of them and speaking to right now was.

It was just funny thought, an assumption, Yoongi has in mind of who Jimin might be, but seeing how clingy Boongi was to him, should have been a huge takeaway to begin with. The second being, Jungkook, going all the way here on his own just to see Jimin. When, he was the only one too who didn’t believed that the witch had died that night.

“… and although he is completely not a cat, because of course they’re a hybrid, still, Boongi hides onto my chest and tries to tucked in all its tentacles to me, is a clear sign he is intimidated by you because you’re scaring him, so stop that.” Jimin stops, catching his breath. He felt like a lawyer defending the accused whose being taunt by the defendant.

What did Jimin just say, just now? Er, not that part where he tries to order him again disrepectfully but did he say Hybrid ? What the hell is that? What is a Hybrid?

And how the hell did Jimin knew all that just by Boongi’s behavior? No one knew how to read them the way Yoongi does.

It can’t be just because he was observing Boongi just now, right? It’s ridiculous!

It’s not like he and Boongi had been seeing each other behind the King’s back without his knowledge, because what the hell, Yoongi’s the only person to tell when the blob is scared, and yes, he did try to scare Boongi discreetly because he was upset at them for going out of the Palace (again), only to find them being babied at the witch’s house, with his son who should also be studying right now with Namjoon but no, he caught him killing time with Jimin.

“ Hybrid ?“

“Yes, a hybrid. It’s the offspring result of combining qualities of two organisms of different varieties, species, or genera through sexual reproduction.”

Everyone was beyond confused and amused. Not because of how Jimin explained it to Yoongi, but how confident he was in doing so. Like it was some common knowledge everyone should know about. Especially for someone like Namjoon who was a prior scholar and now, Jungkook’s teacher and the King’s advisor.

Unfortunately, Jimin, who only cares about Boongi, whose tentacles was still shifting uncomfortably against his hold, wasn’t able to realised what he just did to himself. Because right now, he’s being the typical Jimin he once was in his previous life.

The one who answers every question being asked without a care, whether it will result to positive or negative. Just how a book gives knowledge to anyone regardless of who it was and where the knowledge will be used, because Jimin just wants to give answers to any concerns or problem humanity there is and be left unbothered again once the answer had been given.

Truly, previous Jimin’s was beyond smart but had no patience. That was why he only had Mr. Bang because he pushes everyone away or perhaps, because only the butler sees right through him out of his persona he was trying to show to people around him.

“Where… where did you learned all that?” Namjoon asks, carefully, fascinated with Jimin’s knowledge that he had never heard of, or studied before.

“Biology,”

“Biology?”

“Yes, Biology. The scientific study of life.”

Before Namjoon could asks him again, the blob starts rubbing its head against Jimin’s chest, trying to yet again gain his attention.

Jimin’s getting impatient that his request to Yoongi still hasn’t been done and yet, here they are. They kept asking him, especially Namjoon, about things that should already be common knowledge to everyone. But of course, Jimin had forgotten about it as he’s letting his emotions get the best of him.

Yoongi, collected, was just staring at Jimin and Boongi, unmoving, even after all the talk Jimin just did so yes, he’s getting agitated that the King seemed not to understand his request to stop scaring the blob.

Poor Boongi! Being treated as a bait by Yoongi but then, it gets the job done.

The King smirks widely, confusing Jimin.

Most witches sure do have little to no patience. Unlike scholars, witches are mostly not to be bothered. They are more focused on areas of life that most mortals think are unimportant. And right now, Jimin’s perfectly exhibiting a witch behavior.

To Yoongi, it was an advantage.

Well, apart from this is the first time he had fun annoying a witch without him getting annoyed in the process too, he can make Jimin reveal on his own who he really was, just by annoying him without him lifting a finger and shedding blood.

Silly tactic but convenient.

He just needs to hear that one word from him and Jimin— Jimin will be his.

Well, not romantically (yet) but still, his.

“And they say witches are not short-tempered ,” says Yoongi, sounding too exhausted, mocking him, waiting for Jimin to snap.

And he did.

Why do they keep saying Jimin is a witch? Does he look like a witch? He doesn’t even know one legit witch to begin with. Well, scratch that. He knew Circe but still.

In this world, he don’t know one, apart from the witches he had met that night of course, and how could he be a witch when it was just that one weird time it happened, allowing him to save them and the villagers of Leukos from its downfall and now, he can’t even do shit magic or so.

“I’m a bookkeeper , not a witch!” Jimin hissed.

“H-hyung!” exclaimed Jungkook, eyes wide, too late to realised what his Father just did. That the witch he was trying to protect, just revealed his identity, not only to Yoongi, but to everyone that was with them.

Well, that snapped a shit ton out of Jimin.

His eyes widened in realization.

Shit.

“Well then, will you tell me now what a bookkeeper does?” Yoongi asks, with a sly smile.

Chapter 16

Jimin hopes to get swallowed by the soil now instead of sitting still infront of the King’s who endlessly stares at him. Stupid, how careless can you be ? he asks himself.

There is no one to blame, really, but himself and Yoongi. Yes, he’s blaming him for ragebaiting him that good he didn’t even noticed it until later.

The King sure knows how to annoy the hell out of him, and being the stupid he was, took the bait and now, here he is, with the very being he’s trying to avoid to save himself from being killed yet again by a ruthless King known by all who killed lots of witches during his boredom years ago.

Jimin tried to avoid Yoongi’s gaze, but knew he can’t keep doing that. Especially on how awkward it is right now, at least for him, being thrown inside the King’s chamber despite his protests. Instead of being in a jail that smelled mold or whatnot with other prisoners, but none of that happened when he was unwillingly taken from their house, before his friends could even get home. He wonders if they’re already home and if they are looking for him.

None of their neighbors suspected a thing of what was really happening the moment the Palace people took Jimin with them as Namjoon, who Jimin thinks could be a professional manipulator of somesort, easily lied infront of their people and made them believed that he and Yoongi were once good childhood friends, and that the King had been looking for him for awhile now, and now that Yoongi had finally found him, the King wouldn’t want his dear friend to continously live away from him. Wanting him to be by his side as needed.

What a cringe-fucking lie! He almost puked hearing that. It doesn’t sound neutral at all. It sounds like some romantic clichè story.

He wanted to yell, and tell them Namjoon’s fucking lying to them but how could he, when Yoongi threatened to hurt Boongi (of course that was a lie, Yoongi would never) and Jimin, being the soft-hearted, gullible person he was, believed him and let them carry on with their lie and took him back with them inside the Palace against his will.

“You haven’t spoke since we arrived. I wondered why. I’m starting to think you’re doing this on purpose, no?” Yoongi exclaimed, smirking.

Jimin rolled his eyes, still not meeting the King’s gaze. There he is again. Trying to ragebait him. If only he could stab this man infront of him, he would. But he doesn’t want commit an attempted murder or else, he might really get killed this time.

Yoongi was sitting in front of him in an incredulous space between them, manspreading comfortably, caging Jimin. He felt like a dear being preyed by a wolf.

It was so awkward he wants to run away and hide again. Better this time around so Yoongi wouldn’t bother him no more.

The tension between them was thick and suffocating. Jimin just realised, there was something between him and Yoongi that he can’t yet to figure, which makes him oddly fidgetty with the King around. He wondered if the King can feel it too. Maybe, just him.

Jimin sat at the edge of Yoongi’s bed. The King followed and sat infront of him. He don’t understand why the King wanted him to be here and let him sit when he could’ve just stand or do something. Which confused Jimin more. Which made him terrified yet sleepy at the same time on how inviting the soft mattress was. It’s been a long time since he had been on one. Oh, to have priveleges.

Since he was away from his hourglass, he can’t tell what time it is right now and Yoongi’s bed was really tempting to sleep on. It was cushioned. It was soft. Not as soft as the matresses he used to lay on but close enough. He never imagined he’ll be able to experienced this type of bed again as he was already used to sleeping on wooden beds.

He just wants to lie and sleep but the King infront of him wouldn’t allow that, given that this is Yoongi’s bed and he’s in the middle of interrogation.

However he can’t turn aside the fact that Yoongi has a warm and cozy room despite his scary demeanor. His room doesn’t look plain nor boring at all. If anything, it screams neat and royalty.

Jimin wondered how many women had been into his room before and warmed his bed. How many concubine he has. That thought alone made him shiver, enough to keep Jimin awake.

“Right. You’re probably doing this on purpose,” Yoongi replied to himself, nodding.

“Where’s Boongi?” Jimin finally spoke. His voice cracked a bit but that doesn’t matter. Yoongi likes hearing him speak. Wait , what?

The King raised him a brow but still replied.

“Out.”

“At this hour?”

“And what about? He’d been out most of the time anyway. It’s not like this was the first.”

Jimin guesses Yoongi’s right but it doesn’t mean the blob can always roam around abeit they weren’t.

He thinks it will be best if the blob stays close to the Palace, especially how Boongi seemed to be Yoongi’s son too— magic wise.

Danger can happen at any part of the Aidios at any given time, albeit Leukos was the ‘good’ part of Aidios, it’s best for the blob not to roam around that much especially at night. So if anything happens, Boongi or Yoongi can be taken care of right away. Boongi needs to have a curfew so to say.

“You seem fond of them. Is that normal for a witch like you, when your own race brought them to life to kill me, to take away my throne?”

Jimin scrunched his nose, upset that Yoongi still refers to him as a witch.

“I already told you I am not a witch!” he replied, almost snarling like a kitten.

“Yes, yes, darling . You told me. Deny it all you want but I know what I, and everyone saw that night. No mortal can summon a spell that powerful and overcome death like it’s just a piece of bread,” he mocks.

“But that was just a one-time thing!” he insists. Fists clenching.

“There’s no such thing as one-time! See, you just agreed unconsciously that you really are a witch like I said you were,” Yoongi licks his lips, “Have you forgotten, or you’ll just keep on denying the facts laid upon you until you can’t anymore? No mere witch can defeat six witches at the same time and survived being burnt alive by a Phoenix.”

Jimin thought there is no way he’ll be seeing the end of this conversation with Yoongi, not until he reveal to him what he truly was and where he came from before he was magically transported to Aidios and got told he is witch by almost everyone.

Should I just agree with him that I am indeed a witch? But how could he claim this title when he still couldn’t summon the magic

he once was able to summon prior?

“With all your respect, your majesty, I can’t and will not claim myself a witch. I had been repeatedly telling you and your son, I am a bookkeeper not a goddamn witch,” he exclaimed, exhausted.

Yoongi remained unfazed with what he had just said, but surely was listening and waiting for Jimin to continue to speak as he sure looks like it. He may or may not be enjoying listening to his voice and facial reactions. The witch took this as his queue to continue.

“I’m not expecting you to believe what I’m about to tell for I, also still cannot believe things like these are possible but I’m also just going to say this once so you better listen carefully,” he says, almost ordering the King yet again for his utmost attention.

“Because, “ What if I’m just in a coma or something similar?

“. Anyway, what I’m saying is, I am not and do not want to be called a witch. I am a bookkeeper for pete’s sake,” he slowly meets Yoongi’s gaze. Surprised how focused his eyes were to him, making him feel seen.

“… from where I come from, a bookkeeper is considered a wise man. A person who knows everything that even scholars, witches, and regular mortals, couldn’t comprehend. We are the answer to every question there was. We are the book itself. Giving you knowledge that you could use either for good or bad. Knowledge is our power . We don’t need nor use magic. We just need books. Our learnings are beyond what your scholars here knew. We weren’t exactly trained to be it, it just came naturally, or we’re just born to be it. And from where I came from, I happened to be, if not, the greatest of all bookkeepers there is, which also became the reason why I died from the place I was born and came from, the Earth. Not here. Not in Aidios but in South Korea,” bitter memories starts rushing through Jimin’s head that he had to paused for a second before continuining. Jimin hoped Yoongi didn’t see right through him but he did, and decided not to act on it.

“… I don’t know how, but I remembered doing some shitty symbol before dying, cursing every human who killed my butler, the person who cared for me since I was a kid, and here I am.” he spreads his arms wide like he’s welcoming someone who just arrived home back from work.

“… I ended up in this world of yours where witches exist. I still can’t believe I’m alive though, and about to die again just because someone keeps on insisting I am a witch, which mind, was the same person who says he hates the race of witches but has a beginner witch working for him and taking care of a blob that was created by the witches in his possession.”

Jimin frowned when Yoongi didn’t react at all, after all the talking he just did. He can’t tell if the King even tried listening to him and was just thinking of his response, or if he had already slept with his eyes open as he finds their conversation boring.

However Yoongi did listen to every word Jimin just said and it’s a shame how it was messing up his decision-making.

Because he badly wants to understand Jimin but at the same, what he was telling him wasn’t adding up to how things are on the world Yoongi was birthed from.

“Then, if I asks you something, you’ll be able to answer them, even when the question is something that even the scholars themselves cannot?”

“Go on. Try,”

“Hmm,” Yoongie tries to think of a plausible question but ended up with a funny thought in mind. He can’t help but melt Jimin with his continous staring at him.

“So…?” Jimin asks, waiting impatiently.

“When do you think you and I will get married?” he asks, smirking. Loving how Jimin’s brows furrowed into one. He obviously didn’t expect that question from him.

“What?” he replied, adamant to allow himself to blush.

“What?”

“You’re not taking me seriously, are you?” he huffs, rolling his eyes before glancing away from Yoongi.

“You said you’ll be able to answer any questions. Any. Any questions one may not be able to answer,” insists Yoongi, sheepishly.

“No way you’re serious? I am not a goddamn seer, for fucks sake! I asked you to asks me questions but not about fucking marriage.”

“Language, witch,” Yoongi tries to restrain him by reminding him of the very title he hates. Something about Jimin being angry, speaking freely to him like he wasn’t a King is turning him on so bad he’s thinking of bending Jimin over onto his bed and hear him speak filthy.

“Ugh, I can’t with you! You’re making my head hurt.”

“Not if I remove your head,” he jokes, darkly.

Jimin cleared his throat. Shivering from what Yoongi had just said. Alright, Jimin’s kind of forgetting Yoongi has the upper-hand here between them. He’s the King after all.

Yoongi nods, pleased, and tries to remember the things from earlier that had fascinated them inside the witch and his friends house.

“What was that thing again that Namjoon saw by the window? The one you kept him from touching.”

“You mean the hourglass?”

“Yes. What was that for?”

“To check the time.”

“For what? It doesn’t look like it will do anything. How will you check the time with that thing you called an hourglass?”

Jimin frowned, but when he saw how serious Yoongi was, he thought he was making fun of him again, he focused on answering him truthfully instead.

“Well, your Majesty, if you think an hourglass can’t do anything, you’re mistaken. For you to get accuracy in using it, it needs to be carefully calibrated. From the sand that will be use and the neck width.”

Yoongi nods, carefully picturing how it works just by Jimin’s explanation.

“Show me then. Prove it to me, then I might spare your life.”

Is this King infront of him being serious about his request? What is he up to? Jimin thinks.

“Wha—?”

“If you will be able to create another one without any use of magic or books around you, then I will consider you, as what you’ve been claiming as a bookkeeper. If not, you already know what will happen based on the fate of the witches before you.”

Yoongi leaned over, pressing himself to Jimin. Almost like lovers about to kiss each other. Jimin gulped in fear or excitement, who knows, whereas Yoongi tries not to claim Jimin’s lips as he stares at the witch’s dilated pupils and rosy cheeks.

“I want to see how a bookkeeper works. Besides, it seems to me that your race is fascinated by uncommon things for a scholar and a witch to learn and master. Although I might still consider you a witch due to what I’ve seen before, but if it’s okay with you, I’ll regard you as my own powerful witch comparable to Irene.”

“Who the hell is Irene?” Jimin frowns.

“Watch your mouth,” Yoongi warns, his jaw clenching, because at the end of the day, Irene is still Jungkook’s mother no matter how he despised her. He moved away from Jimin and exhaled the air he didn’t thought he was keeping in his chest.

Jimin rolled his eyes, still clueless of who the person was Yoongi mentioned, “Unless you tell me who that Irene is, you have no right to compare myself to her, your Majesty, nor that you own me to begin with. Besides, I do not care being powerful. Aren’t you ashamed to call me that when you already have one with you?”

He stood up and walked passed Yoongi. The conversation’s done anyway. He needs to get back home if Yoongi doesn’t fancy making him a prisoner here. Or so he thought.

Something in Yoongi got trigerred, hearing what Jimin had said. No one had dared, ever, to act like this to him, not even Irene. So it was normal for Yoongi to feel challenged by Jimin. Oh boy, Jimin unknowingly knows how to trigger Yoongi too.

“What the—? What the hell’s your problem now?” Jimin was mad, and was trying to pull his hand away but Yoongi only tightened his hold around his wrist.

“And where do you think you’re going? Did I asks you to leave my chamber?”

“Home. Because if I was held a captive, I shouldn’t be here to begin with. You should’ve put me in prison if I wasn’t allowed to go home. Besides, we already had a vague agreement on what I should do to spare my life from your bloody hands. I don’t think there’s anything left for me to say or do, so I’ll be now taking my leave. Good night, your majesty,” the last line was so enticing Yoongi wants to claim him right there and then, but stopped himself from doing so.

Yoongi smirks, holding Jimin’s wrist as tight as he can to hold him still, pain tracing onto his face accompanied by a faint moan.

Jimin’s eyes widened from the proximity. Pain on his wrist almost forgotten, as their faces are now way too close to each other than earlier, he could almost feel Yoongi’s lips to his.

“What a little rebel you are, witch. Speaking like that to the late queen, and to me as your King, hmm?”

That’s when Jimin realised. Irene was that witch. The one who didn’t care if Yoongi, Boongi, neither her son, Jungkook, dies that night. Somehow it irritates him to think how Yoongi still protects her name like she didn’t do shit to him. Jimin sighed.

He just wants this pointless conversation to end already. He tries pushing Yoongi away, to free himself from him but to no avail. The King quickly circled his free hand on Jimin’s waist, caging him, when he almost made it free. He’s so mad he wanted to scream at his face only if he’s not caring about the ones who might be sleeping already.

Such a tiny waist for a man like him , Yoongi thought to himself.

“Your Majesty! Can you let go of me now? We already had a deal! I just want to go home. I want to go home! I can’t stand to be here for another next minute or so. I can’t stand being next to someone who easily gets offended with everything, even with his late wife who betrayed his trusts,” exclaimed Jimin, eyes angry almost watery.

Yoongi smirks.

Such a brat!

But why does Jimin’s last statement makes him arrogant in a way? Like, was that jealousy he’s hearing from him? Yoongi should be mad stating that fact but oh boy, oh boy, it makes him feel endeared by the man infront of him.

“ Home? “ he mocks, “This Palace is now your new home. I’m keeping you . I get to decide from now on whether you can or cannot go outside. You’ll listen to me and me only.”

“What… what the fuck are you talking about?” Jimin didn’t know how to truly fear Yoongi until now. He didn’t expect it to be like this, or probably he did but not this way.

“I did told you what’s needed to be done to spare your life but that doesn’t mean you’re free to do whatever you want until then without my approval.”

“Have you forgotten, since you are held captive of a King, you are under my supervision? That being said, I’ll be watching you myself instead of my guards to ensure you’re not going to do any funny business behind my back. You’ll be everywhere I am.”

“You’re out of your fucking mind if you think I’ll let you!” Jimin cursed, “I’m not your dog to follow you everywhere! I’d rather be stuck up in prison than near you!”

“Oh, darling , can’t stand my handsome face? Afraid how you will eventually change your mind and be my concubine instead?”

Jimin laughed. Disgusted with the idea.

“You’re fucking delusional! Me? Changing my mind and wanting to be your concubine?” he looked at Yoongi with watery and disgusts in his eyes, “ I’d rather be dead. “ he said, as cold as he can but Yoongi only took it as a challenge from the witch.

“That is exactly what’s going to happen if you fail on your task, darling . In the meantime, you’re still not going anywhere not until a word from me.”

Jimin was surprised when Yoongi suddenly picked him up, away from the chamber doors he almost get out of.

“What are you doing? Put me down! I said put me down!” Jimin yelled, and began slapping Yoongi’s back and kicking him off but to no avail.

Yoongi chuckled as he held Jimin on his shoulder like a sack of rice and threw him onto his bed as soon as they reached the end of it, making Jimin bounced a little on the soft mattress.

“Let’s take a rest for now and continue our talk tomorrow. You and I are both tired,” exclaimed Yoongi, feeling sleepy now that he realised it.

“Rest? What rest? I ain’t going to sleep here! Especially with you around!”

“Yes, you are. Rest or I’ll put you to sleep myself,” Yoongi threatens.

“As if you will sleep on a bed soaking with blood,” Jimin snickers.

“I have slept covered in fresh blood from the witches I’d killed before, might as well with virgins I slept with once I reached the ‘right’ age to do it , if you take that in consideration, what makes you think I can’t do it again?”

Jimin shivered, almost puking, imagining what Yoongi had just decribed to him but somehow, for some weird fucked-up reason, it also turns him on. Ugh! Minus the virgin part of course. That’s too much information. He don’t need to know about that part!

“You’re a fucking psycho!” he groaned, furiously turning on the right side of the bed, pulling the blanket up to his face.

Yoongi chuckled, much to Jimin’s displeased.

An hour later, once Yoongi was sure Jimin will no longer fight him for laying on his own bed, as he was already sleeping peacefully, he carefully laid down on the left side of the bed beside him.

Somehow, to Yoongi, this was weird.

He never actively wanted to lay beside anyone doing nothing but literally just sleeping, not until today. Not even with Irene, the witch whom he had loved. Especially Jimin is a witch. The very kind that he hates and killed from before.

What’s going on with him?

Did the witch put a spell on him or anything similar when he wasn’t looking? But it can’t be, right? Jimin truly hates him, not because he’s the King that Kai and the witches from Erebos sees. Not because of his background being a witch murderer, but only because he kept calling Jimin a witch and that he annoys Boongi, which mind, came from Yoongi himself but the way Jimin acts was like, he was the one who birthed them.

Yoongi stiffle a laugh, and saw Boongi carefully peeking through the door outside.

“Come,” he gestures, “… lay beside him,” he said, almost whispering, and the blob silently clapped their tentacles like its happy the King was able to make the witch stay with them, while Yoongi smiles at them.

Adorable .

“Make sure he’s not going anywhere but here,”

Boongi nods, before wrapping them tentacles around Jimin’s waist, and doing the same thing to Yoongi as they was lying between the two.

Chapter 17

The five kept exchanging glances to each other, then back to Yoongi whose face remained unreadable.

Yoongi was expecting to wake up next to Jimin either staring at him or vice versa, however none of that happened when he realised Jimin and Boongi was nowhere to be found inside his chamber when he woke up, causing the King to be in a bad mood.

He didn’t expect Boongi to betray him but what if it was Jimin who took the blob with him while they were sleeping?

“They’re probably just roaming around the Palace, who knows,” says Jin, calmly, “You’re the one who told us you asked him to make you an hourglass and forced him to stay by not labelling him as a prisoner of the Palace but yours instead of a witch or bookkeeper. He’s probably just looking for materials he can use to do what you’ve asked him to do.”

“Right. I was surprised that you only asked him to do just that. It’s unlikely of you. Not that I was expecting you to kill him right away like you did before with the others, but really? You just asked him to make you an hourglass?” Namjoon adds, amused.

“That is not just an hourglass, Namjoon. That thing is no joke. It’s bewitching . He said it measures time. I’m pretty sure I’m not the only one wondering how the hell he had fit that sand inside the bottle without any traces as to how he did. I’ve never seen that thing before in my life, even when the late Queen still lives here.”

Namjoon nods in agreement.

“I’m sure he used his magic when he did that. Bookkeeper , my ass.” he snorts.

Hoseok, who was sitting right across Jungkook, saw his godchild smiling secretly to his Father’s antics towards Jimin which also made him smile.

This was the first time they all saw Yoongi act like this , especially towards the race that he loathes.

Perhaps it was because Jimin was the first person/witch that was bold enough to act indifferent towards Yoongi.

He may or may not have heard how the two bickered last night at the King’s chamber and honestly, if he could only tap Jimin’s shoulder to tell him to tone it down but also because he was proud of him, he would, but he didn’t. He wondered what more could happen between the two as the days goes by.

“But if Jimin hyung did left, I bet he won’t be going anywhere besides his friends’ house and the bread house where he previously worked,” Jungkook chimed in.

Taehyung, Jin, Namjoon and Hoseok nods in agreement except for Yoongi.

“Right, I could just hold them captive if that witch tries anything funny,” Yoongi smirks to himself, earning looks of disapproval from the five, “ What? “

“Hyung, you’re just going to make him more mad at you! Have you forgotten how strong Jinin hyung is? He was able to defeat six strong witches. Six! Then, opened a portal spell even when his body was already weak enough and survived being burnt alive by the Phoenix. Do you really think he cannot burn the whole Leukos in a snap if he wants to?” reasons Taehyung, earning approval nods from the others.

Yoongi clears his throat.

“Of course, I haven’t forgotten that! But, we aren’t entirely sure if he’s still as strong as he was before. If it weren’t for Boongi and Jungkook, we wouldn’t be able to recognised him as his hair was no longer orange as before. What if his magic capability depends on the color of his hair?”

While Yoongi was right about his last statement was, it was mainly because Jimin had to learn how to regain his magic with the use of his knowledge.

The magic he once have had was kind of a free-trial from the mysterious being who gifted it to him which he will soon meet. Anyway, this is Jimin’s second life. He must then be able to make the full of it which he didn’t from his previous life.

Meanwhile, far from the Palace, Jimin was currently squatting near the shoreline where he had first met his friends. Jae and Minhyun are helping him find the best sand he can use for the hourglass he will be making as per the King’s request.

Boongi’s also with them, but was busy helping Jackson searching for the best wood that Jimin can use as an hourglass base.

“I’m sorry if you have to do this with me,” says Jimin, sighing as he tries to examine the sand in his hand.

Minhyun shook his head, “No. It’s fine. Although this hurts my back, but I feel like a kid again doing this thing with you.”

“We’re just glad too the King allowed you to leave the Palace even just for a few hours. Most of the time when one enters, it will be very difficult for them to leave and visit the village unless the Palace allows or relieve them from their service. Especially you, since you were once the King’s childhood friend. We were honestly shocked when Namjoon-ssi personally came to tell us when we came home and tried looking for you. I didn’t know you have history with our King.”

I didn’t know anything about that too, Jimin wants to say but he kept his mouth shut.

“But that was a long time ago. I didn’t expect our King to remember me or find me. I was surprised he did,” he lied.

Albeit he can’t deny he was indeed, surprised that even when Boongi or Jungkook did not let anyone knew where they were going too se him, the King still did find him with his friends and older brother.

He didn’t comment about him being able to get out of the Palace though, because he just sneaked outside with Boongi, without the King’s approval. He wonders if Yoongi’s looking for him now and is turning the whole Palace upside-down just to find him.

“But hyung, does that mean that from now on you’ll be inside the Palace most of the time? Can we visit you? Will the king allow us?” asks Jae.

“Perhaps, but I will make sure to make time to see you. I just don’t want to be stuck in one place like I used to before, “ Jimin suddenly had goosebumps on what he had last said.

Right. He will not waste this second life he has being like what he used to before.

Jae and Minhyun smiled happily at him. Happy to hear what he had just said.

Since the hourglass he once made was nowhere in sight, he has to rely to his intuition and the direction of the light that touches the ground to know the time. Though it is quite not as reliable as an hourglass, it should be enough for them to be able to gather all the materials he needs before going back to the Palace and working on the project for Yoongi.

He still didn’t expect Yoongi to be as curious like Namjoon about the hourglass though.

The King might be thinking the hourglass he made was of pure magic (thus the reason why he chose that for Jimin to make to prove his accusation), and not labor work which wasn’t.

How can it be considered witchery when people from the ancient Greeks and Romans, who didn’t have enough resources during the old times was able to make it?

The answer? Because the human mind itself is bewitching, powerful, and full of mysteries just like life and death. Hard to comprehend yet never boring to explore and understand.

“I think this is enough,” says Jimin, patting his butt and getting on his feet, feeling a little wobbly from squatting almost an hour and half, “Let’s head back home so I could cook something for you before I leave.”

The three men cheered including Boongi, who was wobbling their tentacles in the air before following the witch back to their home.

“You sure don’t want us to help you bring these materials back to the Palace? These are quite heavy for you, Jimin,” worries Jackson, as he tries to grab the apple Boongi is holding on one of its tentacles that they were swaying in the air, like the blob’s trying to play with him.

“It’s fine. No need to worry about me. Besides, you all have work for tomorrow so you have to rest early.” replied Jimin, and turned to Boongi to snatch the apple from its hold, “Don’t play with the fruit. Here,” he hands the blob a medium-sized jute from his pocket for it to play, with which it did immediately and starts doing weird knots.

The three were impressed by how quick Boongi obeys Jimin without putting in too much work.

He had an early dinner with his friends at 5 p.m. and left with Boongi before the hourglass hit ’30, as he still has plans visiting Sera and Balam who happened to be preparing to close the bread house for the day. Sera almost stumbled as she runs up to him and crushes him into a tight hug.

“See! I told you! The King will noticed you!” she exclaimed, happily.

Jimin only nods, before spending half an hour with them to chat and finally deciding to go back to the Palace. Hoping not to see Yoongi or anyone who may announce his arrival with the blob.

It’s quite dark already you see.

“I’m not sure if you can use this inside the Palace but just in case you’re bored and you just want to be left alone,” says Balam, handing him a blank journal similar to the ones used in the Joseon Era. Sera gave him a set of fine brush, ink stick and ink stone.

Jimin’s eyes widened. He felt warm and overwhelmed by the gifts from Balam and Sera. He knew how pricey those materials are and yet, they bought it just for him.

“ Aigoo , don’t create such ugly lines on your pretty eyes not unless those are of happiness,“ says Balam, soothing his back when Jimin starts crying without him even realising.

“There, there. We don’t want the King visiting us just because he thought we made his precious friend cry,” Sera teases him, as he wipes his tears, pouting.

“Thank you. I’ll make sure to repay you soon.”

“You don’t have to, hyung. You’ve helped us more than enough by making the bread house one of the most popular now since you started working with us. I just hope you will still have time to visit us when you’re not busy in the Palace,” replied Sera.

Jimin nods.

“I sure will.”

They bid their goodbyes and luckily, when Jimin and Boongi came back, no one noticed them despite that it was already nighttime and there was a lot of soldiers guarding the area.

“Now, since I’m not yet familiar here, would you please lead me to a place where I can work without anyone troubling me? Preferrably a library, if you may.”

He carefully followed Boongi, who guided him to a quite small library near the Palace’s garden, where the cherry blossom tree was in Yoongi’s dream.

Jimin’s body shivered in odd familiarity as he stood in front of the library Boongi led him to.

With shaky hands, he carefully slid the door open and was greeted by a familiar smell that he had been craving for, ever since he was no longer in the comfort of his own library.

Strange how the library itself seemed to have a life of its own, acknowledging his presence as he walks inside with Boongi.

He carefully placed his hand on the shelves, feeling it. Slowly gliding his fingers to each of the books that were there, waiting to be touched by the right person. Perhaps, the right witch.

His heart thumping loudy, and the books seemed to be vibrating too like his heart, like they have a life, a heartbeat of their own.

Jimin roamed inside like he owns the place, like this is exactly where he belongs. Then and now, it’s always going to be a library.

With his eyes closed, he lets the library feel him and vise versa.

He stood at the center and kneeled, bowed even, like there’s someone, most powerful being of all kinds that exists infront of him, waiting for him to present himself.

Jimin smiled. He gets a dejà vu of how he had already done this before from his time, from the world where he was birthed and died. He held his right hand close to his heart and whispered.

“From another world to yours, I, Park Jimin, pledging under the pleasure to be once again, be your instrument to fulfill the honor to be from many comes one .”

Unaware of what was happening, or what he just did, the moment Jimin opened his eyes, the once forgotten electrifying energy rushed back to his whole body from which he once felt when he was a child, when Mr. Bang made him pledge to his library.

Oblivious from the fact how the candles lit up inside the said library mysteriously, and how the fire on each of the torches inside and outside Leukos burns a little brighter than it had ever been similar to the moon.

A strong gust of wind fills the air, like it was whispering through the trees, to every animal there is, announcing an important message, that made the currents of Avgrund roared wildy, it even reached to the Kingdom of Erebos.

Jimin failed to noticed how his eyes and hair in a blink of an eye, flashed orange before turning back to its regular color.

Everyone in Aidios tremebled when a loud, clucking noise from a bird afar was heard.

Unknowingly, it was the Phoenix resting nearby the tree branch where Jimin was at, disguising itself as a small bird similar to a northern cardinal.

“Finally, a witch worthy to share my throne with,” Kai muttered, a dark smile plastered on his lips, as he stands on top of one of the big rock near the shoreline, uncaring of the splatters of water coming from the Avgrund.

Chapter 18

Jimin did some breathing exercises to calm his nerves before deciding to start on writing onto the journal Balam gave him.

At first, it was hard for him to use the brush as a writing tool as he, even before, wasn’t used to writing. He was used to technology and speaking only ninety-percent of the time so he really didn’t focus that much on writing besides signing cheques. However after half an hour of hit-and-miss, he finally starts to get used to it.

On the first part of his writing session, he explained what an hourglass is. Its use, how it is made, the materials needed to create one, and just every information about the said object that Jimin thinks can be helpful whoever will read it and attempt to make it.

While Jimin was lost in his own world, Taehyung, on the other hand, felt his presence even from a couple of steps away as he walks with the others to go back to their own chambers.

They just had a three-hour-long discussion after dinner and everybody is already tired for the night. Thankfully, Yoongi decided to call it a night after they heard a bird’s cry not far from where they all are. That cry was enough to make most of them shiver except for Yoongi though.

Taehyung thinks Yoongi’s not planning to sleep anytime soon as he might look for Jimin first and see if he’s already back from his stroll all-day long with Boongi. The King’s probably be planning too, to fetch wherever the two might be at, if they still aren’t home by now at the Palace.

Taehyung noticed not far from where they at, a burning torch outside the library no one dares to stay longer than five minutes. It has been abandoned for quite some time now unless someone from the Palace’s brave enough to spare a few minutes to be inside.

Not even Yoongi’s ex-wife, Irene, was able to stand the said library, so the King had to build a new one just for her, as she don’t like the vibe that library was giving her and to everyone who dared to go inside.

Even Taehyung himself experienced it first-hand, when he dared to try and ‘beat’ the witches to it but alas, he also shared the same fate with those who went before him.

The abandoned/mysterious library had been there probably since the beginning of Leukos or Aidios, who knows. It was already there even before Jin and Yoongi was born according to Namjoon. No one knows who built the said library and who occupied it prior until no one was able to.

There was a lot of attempt from many different people to use that library, for many different reasons but none of  them was able to fulfill their plans in doing so.

Yoongi don’t have the heart to take it down nor did the past Kings before him for whatever reason, so the library remained exisiting but abandoned by eveyone.

“I wonder if Jimin had eaten already,” says Jin before turning to Taehyung, who remained eyeing the abandoned library.

“What’s the matter?” he asks, “Oh wait, someone’s in there?”

“Looks like it. Been a long time since one did,” Hoseok agreed.

Jin’s statement wasn’t quite a whisper only for Taehyung to hear so naturally, they all turned their heads towards the abandoned library upon hearing what he had just said and Hoseok agreed on saying.

“Oh, yeah. You’re right, samchon! I wonder who could that be,” Jungkook nods.

“Probably that brave person inside is in need of a very important material for their study for them to dare be inside. Perhaps, they’re looking for a particular information that the other library couldn’t,”

Namjoon chuckles, “Well, whoever that is inside, must have a broken smoke pipe. Look at that smoke coming out! It almost looks like the one coming out of Tae’s chamber.”

“Well, because mine’s an incense smoke, hyung,” replied Taehyung, but after a few seconds passed, his eyes widened in realisation so thus Namjoon.

Everyone knows incense are used by witches. That was why Taehyung uses one, although he is a beginner witch. Incense are used for many different things but mainly for rituals and meditation.

Before Namjoon or Taehyung could utter another word, or for Jin to stop the King, they all saw Yoongi walking quickly away from them, towards the abandoned library where, of course, Jimin is, thus they all followed after him.

Emotions are quite a mix.

Some are excited, but mostly scared.

Excited, that Jimin didn’t leave (which of course, isn’t true because he did leave and bought Boongi with him) albeit the King forced him to stay at the Palace.

Scared, because Yoongi and Jimin bicker a lot everytime they see each other. None of them knows when one of them would finally snap and kill the other, which of course, will be hard for them to stop because let’s be realistic here. Will you get in between an angry, powerful witch and a bloodlust murderer of a King’s silly fight? No.

Absolutely not.

Without a single thought in mind, Yoongi harshly slid open the door and was surprised (and relieved) to see Jimin there, who seemed nonchalant of what he just did. Jimin’s still writing, with a sleeping Boongi latching themselves onto the witch.

Yoongi was in awe at the sight infront of him but when he remembered what Jimin and the blob did earlier today, he loudly cleared his throat to announce his arrival. His existence to Jimin. However knowing Yoongi, he probably was just planning to start another dumb fight with Jimin.

The change of vibe inside the abandoned library didn’t go unnoticed though. It was noticeable from the inside and outside. Most especially inside. It feels like home.

Yoongi remembered sneaking inside said library a few times before when he was a child, and he could still remember clear as day how comforting yet longing for something or someone unknown the room felt whenever he was there, but tonight it seemed to him that the library already found its caretaker. The library feels oddly warm, peaceful, comforting, and no longer longing for something or someone.

Like the library’s waiting game is already over because Jimin’s finally here to take over. To take care of it.

Yoongi cleared his throat for the second time when Jimin didn’t acknowledge his presence. He feels dumb doing it. No one has dared to ignore his existence before, especially that he is the King of Leukos.

He deserves to be respected and Jimin, he seems to test Yoongi’s patience.

“I heard you the first time, your Majesty. No need to do it twice unless you’re badly begging for my attention,” says Jimin, still writing on his journal, not sparing Yoongi a glance.

The King frowned.

“Do you not know how to show respect to a King, witch? I did that because you seemed to be forgetting that a King stands before you.”

Jimin hums in response.

“Apologies, your Majesty, but if you want me to show respect towards you, you should also do the same for me.”

Yoongi smirks in distaste. Soon the others had arrived and none of them was surprised to see the two bickering once again.

“Excuse me? May I remind you—”

“I was peacefully doing my work here if you have failed to see that before you came and slid the door open without a knock or asking if someone was inside. Imagine if I was changing my clothes and you barged in? That’s disrespectful, your Majesty. Now, do tell, if I did that to you without your title of a King, what would you feel?”

Yoongi was hushed.

The five albeit surprised with what and how Jimin replied to their King, couldn’t help but to side with him and betray Yoongi silently.

“Your majesty, respect begets respect ,” he adds, finally facing Yoongi with a sigh.

He then, stopped writing and stood to walked infront of Yoongi and bowed to him and the others behind him.

“Does this made your night okay now, your Majesty?” he asks, with an underlying tone of mockery before bowing to him again, facing the five people behind with a genuine smile, “Good evening! It’s nice to see you all.”

Yoongi jutted his bottom lip out with a huff.

Did he just skipped smiling at me? Yoongi asks himself, a little hurt at the thought.

“How long have you been here?” he asks.

“Longer than I would spend a night with you on the bed,” Jimin replied, almost quickly.

Jungkook and Hoseok almost bursts out laughing but pretended to cough instead to save themselves from being scolded by Yoongi. While Namjoon and Taehyung jaws dropped hearing what Jimin had just said to the King. As for Jin, he was clapping for Jimin at the back of his head. He likes seeing someone acts feisty but reasonably, especially if its with his brother.

Way to go, Jimin

, Jin thought.

“Yah!” Yoongi frowned instead of pouting like a kid, not liking the words coming out of Jimin’s pretty lips.

Wait , did he say pretty?

Yes, he did. Jimin perhaps, may be pretty but he will not admit that to anyone or even himself (not right now, at least). Jimin is so annoying he doesn’t deserved to know how pretty he is, or how he ticks the King positively or negatively.

Jimin sighed.

“I answered you honestly, your Majesty. I don’t think lying to a King will do me good when I have one foot already buried to the ground,” he walked closer to Yoongi, one step apart, and carefully lifted Boongi from his arms to give them to the King, who took them with equal carefulness.

Ooh, domestic, they all approved in their heads.

“I’ll start doing your hourglass perhaps tonight or tomorrow, and I don’t think it’ll be good for Boongi to stay here that late if I start now.”

“Why? Because you’re going use your magic? Is that why you want Boongi out? Afraid they’ll me?”

“Whatever suits your imagination, your Majesty,” Jimin snorts, walking back to the big desk to finish what he was writing previously before the King and the others barged in, “Besides, didn’t you say yourself you want to watch me do it?”

Yoongi huffs, “Very well then. Suit yourself.”

With that, the King left, and so did the others who followed him out of the library.

“Such a child, you are, my King,” Jimin smiled to himself, shaking his head in disbelief.

Meanwhile, Jin and Taehyung were both surprised to meet Jungkook inside the Palace’s kitchen, rambling to get something when they thought it was just them there.

“And what brings you here, my dearest Joka?” asks Jin.

“Ah, samchon!” he bowed at them, blushing, “I— I was just looking for some food. I was planning to bring Jimin hyung some dinner. I don’t think he’d already eaten seeing how focused he was to what he was doing earlier when we arrived.”

Jin nods, agreeing to what Jungkook just said.

“Is that so? Then we’re just thinking of the same thing. Taehyung here, thought of bringing food to Jimin, and I approved it since I had fun awhile ago seeing my brother lose an argument to our lovely bookkeeper,” he replied, with a laugh resembling a windshield in the modern times.

“Aish! Samchon! I don’t think Appa will be happy hearing that from you.” he replied, although smiling, “Though, do you think Appa will check on him later?”

Jin nods again, “I bet he will.”

“What do you think we should bring Jimin hyung best? I’m certain he may not want to talk to any of us since he mentioned that he’ll start making the King’s hourglass later tonight,” says Taehyung.

“Hmm, I’m pretty sure he would. He doesn’t look upset with us except my brother, Yoongi,” replied Jin, confidently.

Meanwhile, Yoongi was restless. Sitting on his bed beside the sleeping blob, carefully caressing its head to see how its day went.

Remember how the blob as previously said, is the King’s eyes and ears when he’s not around? That’s what it means.

He wondered how Jimin’s once blurred features are now crystal clear, now that he is going to stay with them at the Palace.

He remembered the feeling the blob felt with Jimin, but never his face. It was blurry, so he never had an idea how or what Jimin looks like prior but now, he can.

Yoongi can’t help but to smile at how gentle yet domineering like a parent Jimin was to Boongi. He also saw the witch’s friends, helping him gather the things Jimin will be needing to recreate another hourglass that he specifically asks from him.

Basically what they did all throughout the day, and Yoongi can’t helped but feel upset on how sweet and caring Jimin was to Boongi, and the opposite towards him. He don’t get it. They just met and yet it seemed to him, he and Jimin had known each other for years.

He huffed in jealousy, obviously, and can’t help but to think of ways on how he will annoy Jimin the next time they meet which, in their case, probably later before bedtime but in the end, he knows it’s going to be just him who will end up more annoyed by how the witch responds to him.

Silly lovers.

“What a mystery you are, Jiminnie.”

Chapter 19

“Where is he?” asks Jin, as if Jungkook or Taehyung knew knew the answer to his question. The library was empty when they arrived and although it was empty, it doesn’t looked like the witch had already left the place to rest. Neither the library looks eerily scary from before. In fact, it was warm and inviting.

Jungkook and Taehyung looked at each other and shrugged their shoulders in unison.

“Perhaps he went outside? I don’t know. We don’t know. But he should be back any minute now,” replied Jungkook, lightly tapping the edge of each bookshelves, testing how it would make him feel.

Surprisingly, it doesn’t feel weird doing so, unlike before at Irene’s library that Yoongi had specifically made just for her. It feels similar to Taehyung’s chamber. Nothing. But then, slowly, he felt warm. It felt something similar, close rather, to a mother hugging their child. It feel… nice. It suddenly makes his eyes watery that he had to step away from the bookshelves for a second. Not wanting to show vulnerability infront of Taehyung and his Uncle.

Whereas, the aspiring witch, Taehyung, also felt the same way Jungkook did but reacted differently from the Prince. Instead he felt happy, inspired, and excited.

Being here isn’t the same as going to Irene’s library whenever he would have to visit just to ‘borrow’ books. Being there makes him feel dizzy. And like what was said prior, the library doesn’t seem/feel abandoned anywhere and anymore. He wondered if it was because the library’s acknowledging Jimin’s presence, or maybe it was just him thinking that. Perhaps both.

He checked the journal lying open on the table where Jimin sat earlier as soon as he placed the food they bought for him on the side. It was a hot cup of chamomile tea and some colorful dasik to please the witch.

Taehyung can’t helped but be amused, not only by how beautiful Jimin’s writing is, but also by the detailed contents he had written onto the journal. It wasn’t long before Jungkook and Jin stood beside him to see what he was checking out on.

“He definitely can be a scholar,” Jin uttered, with a pleased nod.

“Yes! And he draws quite well too,” chimed Jungkook, “Me and Jimin hyung can be good friends, right? Since we share the same pastime.”

“Well, maybe. Jimin hyung however is a powerful witch, er, bookkeeper though. Of course, it’ll be natural for him to know and do a lot of things,” says Taehyung, correcting himself about Jimin’s title. Of course, like Jungkook, he respects what Jimin wants to be called.

“And yet my brother seemed to be testing his patience ever since they meet again for the second time around,”

“At least, unlike Eomma or the other witches whom Appa had spoken with before, Jimin hyung seemed to be different. He doesn’t look like he wants to kill him but the exact opposite of it which was surprising, given how powerful he is.”

Taehyung nods, “Yes. I agree. I wonder what the other witches thinks of him though. I mean, those witches who believes only female and born witches can be called, witches . True witches. However there’s Jimin hyung. He’s a male and yet so powerful.”

Jin and Jungkook nods, agreeing with Taehyung’s statement because it was true. They wondered if it was a slap to their faces, how they were defeated by a male witch whom wasn’t from Leukos nor Erebos to begin with, as per Yoongi.

It was honestly satisfying to watch how they were all thrown by Jimin back to Erebos, while they all try to get rid of him but cannot.

“I wonder if it will be okay for him to teach me how to be a witch as good as him,”

“I’m sure he won’t mind, Tae! Jimin hyung may be forthright when it comes to speaking with Appa but trust me, he is nothing but awesome!” Jungkook beams.

The three spent a good amount of twenty minutes inside, waiting for Jimin to return, but didn’t, so they all call it a night and decided to just return in the morning to visit him while he works.

What they didn’t know though, and what they missed to notice was, Jimin was just right there. Not technically inside the library but outside. Just a few steps away from them to start a conversation with each other.

He was sitting, meditating, underneath the cherry blossom tree and the moonlight. Like what he had been doing since he got transported to Aidios, except last night when he needed to spend it with Yoongi, in his chambers.

What he didn’t expect though, was for his meditation to work this time around. He almost opened his eyes in surprise and happiness but he forces himself not to, or he might miss the chance accessing the library again in his head, inside the big oak tree which mind, resembles his library before in his mansion where he had lived and died.

However the books that he was able to accessed before had been kind of modified. He knew by heart and by memory, it was the same books that he had in his possession.

What he noticed though, was when he tried to open the book and use it again, the exact same page, where it was written, the contents or letters perhaps, had somehow ‘magically’ turned to butterflies that glow like fireflies and burned on its own.

Similar to how a Phoenix burns itself and turns to ashes. But unlike the Phoenix, the contents did not get restored instead, it vanished completely- forever. Like the knowledge written on there didn’t exists in the first place or at all.

Jimin was dumbfounded.

He then came to a conclusion that, perhaps, whatever book he will open or knowledge he will share with anyone or someone will lead to one or two of his books, that only he has the capability to access mentally in his library will burn and vanish forever, without having the ability to re-read them.

At first, he didn’t want that to happen because well, those books were precious to him. Those books held each of their own story and knowledge, as well as shared memories alone or with Mr. Bang but then he remembered what he told him before that made him change his mind.

It was his favorite wisdom quote that the butler told him because now, he understand what that truly means and what exactly he should learn in this new life of his. It was of a Chinese proverb.

“Tell me and I’ll forget; show me and I may remember; involve me and I’ll understand.”

So Jimin wasn’t surprised anymore when he unconsciously, was accessing and reading one of the books in his library ealier that dwells about hourglasses, to help him described it easily to anyone who reads it, its function and how to create one alone, that some of the pages he had seen and read turned to glowing butterflies and burned before his eyes.

Though it was saddening, there was also a feeling of relief knowing that he could share the knowledge with the others once he was done writing about it in his journal.

And If you think he just copied exactly what was in the book that he had once read and learned from, no. He didn’t.

Even in the world of Leukos, Jimin has a strong sense to not plagiarize someone else’s work that took someone’s blood, sweat, and tears in the making.

He was writing the topic exactly on how he understands the knowledge that the book shared with him, in a way that not just the scholars but the people of Leukos will understand.

No more gatekeeping of his knowledge to the elites that he once did. This time, he will make sure everyone will benefit.

Unbeknownst to Jimin, Yoongi who seemed to have a hard time sleeping tonight (probably because somehow at the back of his head, he was concerned about the witch’s well-being), went back to the library to check on him.

However he was met only by Jimin’s unfinished work and untouched food that the servants may have bought for him. He wonders who bought it there though or who ordered them, as he did not remember telling his servants to do anything with the witch, and decides to look for Jimin instead.

He found him sitting underneath the cherry blossom tree, not far from where the library is located, with his eyes closed and the moonlight reflects his beauty. Yoongi was in awe, hypnotized by the witch’s beauty. But then, he suddenly remembered his dream before of the witch. It was exactly similar to this. Yoongi quickly shook his head.

He knew most witches were pretty but Jimin, his beauty is different. It’s ethereal. Incomparable to others. The only one that has that kind of beauty that makes him shiver to his core.

For whatever reason, that made Yoongi, like a child or perhaps someone who had just entered puberty, to quickly hid from where he stood at, when he saw Jimin’s figure moving, indicating his meditation was done.

Yoongi gulped in fear and excitement, when Jimin turned to look at where he was hiding but couldn’t seem to take his eyes off of him.

Whereas Jimin, man, the witch was confused if it was just his mind playing tricks on him but he sure felt someone else’s presence other than himself, staring at him (which happens to be true and was the King, hopelessly starting at his beauty) but found no one.

Jimin sighed and stood, patting off the dirt that might have gotten into his clothes before closing his eyes again.

He decided to entertain himself by dancing wih himself, with a tune playing in his head, that he had heard a few times before from the gatherings that he and Mr. Bang had attended. Think of it as Jimin’s simple gift to the ever-so-beautiful waxing crescent moon glistening along with the twinkling stars above the dark blue sky.

There’s things I want to say to you

But I’ll just let you live

Like if you hold me without hurting me

You’ll be the first to ever did

There’s things I want to talk about

But better not to give

But if you hold me without hurting me

You’ll be the first to ever did

Ah, ah, ah, ah, ah, ah

Hold me, love me, touch me, honey

Be the first who ever did

Ah, ah, ah, ah, ah, ah

Yoongi concluded that perhaps, Jimin was telling him the truth. That he’s not someone from Aidios. The man’s too powerful and too beautiful to look at, that he almost forgot about the deal he made with the witch. He just wants to come out of his hiding place at that very moment and dance with the beau but no, he didn’t, althought it took a lot of force in him not to.

He continues to watch him until Jimin stop and went back to the library to finish what he was doing.

Yoongi decided he will just let the weird feeling he has with him, ever since their fingers touched during that night to grow until… until he can no longer hide it, can no longer keep it to himself, until he is sure this is not just because of the witch trying to play tricks on him under his sleeves.

He wants to make sure he won’t make the same mistake he once did with Irene. His heart’s already broken and tired. He needs someone not to fix it, but to show him that in every broken heart, there’s someone brave enough to show that, to be loved is to be truly known without judgment but understanding .

Without Jimin knowing, the king watched over him throughout the night outside the library until he accidentally fell asleep on his chair in the middle of his work. The King smirked to himself when he finally hears the witch’s little snores before lifting him in his arms to bring him back to his bed chamber.

Hoseok, who happens to be patrolling the Palace, outside his work hours, as he for some reason, woke up from his sleep (when it was just because the man has insomnia), almost had his eyes popped out of his sockets when he saw how calm and gentle Yoongi was in carrying Jimin in his arms.

“Am I dreaming or did I really just saw Yoongi, the witch-hating King with Jimin in his arms?” he asks himself, whom had almost got a heart attack when suddenly, a red bird that resembles a north cardinal, chilling on a tree branch not far from where he was standing, answered him indirectly with a chirp before deciding to fly away.

Chapter 20

The first thing Jimin did when he woke up was to make sure he was not in a dream and his mind wasn’t playing tricks on him.

Unfortunately, he wasn’t. He really is at the King’s chamber.

The witch was stunned for a moment. He has no recollection of going back here last night. He was sure of it, so why did he end up being here when he didn’t? Who bought him?

Perhaps, the King? But that’s impossible, right? He’s pretty sure Yoongi’s still mad at him after their silly argument last night at the library so he is out of the choices. It’s not like there a lot of choices to begin with anyway.

Perhaps, could it be Boongi? Could be.

Yes, this is something Boongi would do. Man, the blob acts like his clingy child to him. Is he mad though that Boongi bought him back here? No.

He doesn’t have the heart to be mad at the blob. Boongi is too precious, too soft to be mad at. Though sometimes, he knows the blob needs to be disciplined, seeing how Yoongi will not be capable of doing it as he loves to spoil them.

He turned around and found no one. He sighed, before getting up to fix the bed and head out of the King’s chamber.

Luckily, no one saw him. He then decides to go back to the library to continue with his work.

Jimin thinks he needs to buy a new journal he could write on, seeing how fast the journal Balam gave him was about to run out. He thinks its best to write a separate topic about witchcraft if he wants to help Taehyung with his problem.

It’s not like Jimin had forgotten about it already after the battle with the King of Erebos and his witches, but while he was doing his work he was suddenly reminded by his brain how the witches humiliated a beginner witch, a.k.a Taehyung, just because he isn’t born one and a male on top of it.

Honestly, Jimin’s not sure if he will be of any help to Taehyung because realistically, he himself is still not sure if he’s really a witch now or had become one without his consent when he was transported here in Aidios as punishment on the grave sin he had committed from his previous life as mortal.

Besides, from the world where he came from, a person doesn’t necessarily have to be born a witch to be called one, especially that it has to be a female.

Being a witch is a free-will. A practice that can be honed alone or with a mentor.

Most witch practice inner understanding on themselves. Their inner fear. They call it shadow work, so they could ground themselves. Think better, whether a spell is really worth it to be thrown at someone.

Being a witch is a lot of work. Not some past-time thing. As casting spells are no joke too. To be a witch there’s a lot to unpack and to learn. It’s about intention, intuition (that the practice is calling you), and determination. To him, it will just be a bonus if you’re a natural-born and came from a lineage full of witches.

Halfway through his work, he decided to go out of the Palace to rest for a bit from writing, and went to the market to look for thick ournal to buy and use later on.

He then had his breakfast next at a small food cart that was roaming around the marketplace. He don’t feel eating at the Palace by himself or with anyone anytime soon. He thinks it’ll be awkward if he tries to join anyone in the Palace, not specifically just the King and the others he’s close with.

After eating his breakfast, he then went back to roaming around the market then finally decided to visit his friends at their work during lunch time and bid them goodbye after a few minutes of chatting with them.

He still needs to finish his work though, otherwise the King might get furious at him if he won’t be able to present anything to him once he asks for his progress.

It’s not like he has a deadline, but still.

“Why do I think you look familiar?” Jimin asks the small, red bird that was next to the open window where he works. It’s not like he was expecting the bird to answer him, he just wants to let the bird know.

“Hey, hey, hey! What do you think you’re doing?” he panics, moving quickly to ‘save’ the bird when it suddenly decided to do the most dumbest thing a bird could think of.

The bird probably thought they magically turned to a moth and began flying around close to the flame, where Jimin was melting and shaping the glass he will be using later on to put the sand they collected yesterday.

Before Jimin could even save the bird, the bird stopped on its own, so he let it go.

Probably the bird was just tripping itself (and him), but when the bird did it again for the second and third time, it confused the hell out of Jimin and got annoyed at the same time.

What the hell? What does this bird wants? Is he trying to play with me? he thought.

Jimin noticed how the bird would stop flying around the flame everytime he would pause to shoo it away from the flame and would go at it again once he started crafting.

What the hell?

He sighed in defeat when he failed to catch the bird to threw it out of the library after a couple of attempts. Then the bird started chirping at him, seeing how exhausted he was, like it was mocking his patience and ability to catch a small, single bird.

This, however, not only confused the hell our Jimin more but also made him mad. Who sent this bird to annoy him? It won’t be a surprise if the King did and if he owns it.

He ran after the bird, attempting to catch it with his bare hands, while thinking it’d be easier if he had just a little bit of his magic back then, just like a witch has, that the King had been labelling him since, just so it’ll be easier for him to catch the bird, not on a harmful way of course.

Who would want to harm a bird? Not Jimin.

As he continues to run in circles, trying to catch the bird who seemed to be enjoying their time playing with the witch, Jimin, on the other hand, had unconsciously flicked his hand, and then suddenly a small yellow to red coloured ball of fire appeared on the tip of his fingers.

When the bird saw this, it immediately dodged the fire going its way, surprising Jimin in the process thus, making a halt.

“What the fuck?” he whisper yelled. He quickly checks his hand for any pain, bleeding, or burn he might find but found none. He looks at the bird who seemingly was waiting for him to turn his head at them, “Did I just did that? Was that from me?”

The bird nods its head, surprising Jimin.

By now, he shouldn’t be surprised anymore with all these kinds of things but still, he can’t help not to.

Because who wouldn’t? Being able to magically summon fire to physically appear from the tip of your finger is diabolical to begin with. It’s not like a regular thing to happen in a world mostly full of ordinary humans with no powers or magic.

He’s pretty sure that if he was still in his own world, he would be either burned at the stake or experimented by scientists. Luckily, he wasn’t anymore. The only thing that could happen to him was to be killed by the King.

He cringed at the thought.

Jimin lifts his right hand again and starts swaying his fingers in the air until a small thread-like fire appeared from the tip of his fingers, making his eyes go wide as circle.

“What the actual fuckity fuck! It really was from me!” exclaimed Jimin in glee, like a child who just received his dream toy and showing it to a friend.

He starts tracing letters and numbers in the air while the fire that’s on his fingertip gets brighter and longer as he writes (also unconsciously shaping into a Phoenix that made the little red bird’s eyes flicker).

However Jimin was too absorbed at the moment that he didn’t noticed, probably because he was so happy and excited about the discovery that his magic is seemingly returning, the amount of fire coming out until it became so big that it scared him.

In a blink of an eye, Jimin saw his now most hated memory of the past. It was the night Mr. Bang was killed. Trying to protect him, crawling his way to Jimin while coughing blood, trying to get Jimin to leave the mansion to escape for his safety.

The memory triggered Jimin that, the big fire awhile ago just vanished as quickly as it showed. Like it didn’t happened in the first place.

Jimin fell onto his knees and cried like a baby. He truly misses Mr. Bang. Everything that is happening to him right now feels like a dream that he needs to wake up from.

He was crying so hard that he failed to notice the bird from earlier flew towards him and rested on his shoulder to mimic a human comforting a crying person.

He also failed to notice the loud footsteps coming from the outside of the library who was from Yoongi with the blob, whom originally was going to check only if Jimin was there, as he didn’t see him back at their chamber. He was planning to annoy him but how could he, if Jimin’s crying so hard it kind of breaks something inside him for whatever reason that he don’t know yet?

It triggered something in Yoongi seeing the witch cry. It wasn’t something he had felt before from other people, nor to his ex-wife but more to himself. It feels oddly familiar .

Yoongi’s wasn’t sure what to do now. He don’t want to get his time wasted just because he no longer wants to annoy Jimin as he came all the way here from the other side of the Palace just to do that and of course, to check on his progress and yet he also does not want to embarrass Jimin for letting the other know that he saw him crying. That he saw him in his probably most vulnerable state.

“What?” he whispered, frowning, when Boongi starts pulling the ends of his robe lightly. As if the blob understands the situation and wants to help the witch to lighten up. Boongi points at the flowers not far from where he saw Jimin last night.

“No way, I’m giving him flowers! He’s not a woman! He might get angry at me again!”

Boongi stucked their tongue out to Yoongi as they carefully reached for the white flowers with their tentacles, rolling their eyes at him before carefully sliding the door open.

Jimin quickly dried his tears and stood to greet the ‘visitor’. He swiftly smiled realising it was only Boongi. Thank heavens!

“Boongi! What are you doing?” whisper yelled Yoongi, surprised by Boongi’s sudden action but still followed the blob inside the library.

Jimin didn’t hide the fact he was surprised  seeing the King with the blob but then again, it’s already given since he had been here for two days now since he was brought from their house unwillingly.

“Boongi! It’s good to see you,” he sweetly greets the blob, with open arms and Boongi without any feelings of shame, ran cutely towards the witch to hug him.

Yoongi, who somehow got jealous of Boongi getting the witch’s affection, cleared his throat loudly to get Jimin’s attention towards him.

“Oh you’re here too,” Jimin says flatly.

Yoongi secretly pouts. So cold.

“Are these for me? You picked it?” he asks, smiling brightly with a twinkle in his eyes. Yoongi had to look away for a second as Jimin’s aura was too bright for his liking. Like he didn’t saw him crying just now before Boongi and him barged in.

Boongi was about to nod but Yoongi beats them to it.

“Yes, it’s for you!” he replied, almost yelling, afraid Boongi might interrupt and tell Jimin the truth, “I’m the one who picked it. I just asked Boongi to hand it over to you since it was his idea anyway to pick those flowers to give to you,” Boongi turned to the King, glaring, but Yoongi just shrugged it off.

Jimin was stunned.

Really? The King picked these flowers to give to him? Well, technically, it was Boongi’s idea as what Yoongi said but still.

He kept exchanging glances between Yoongi and Boongi, and sighed. Something’s off the way the blob was glaring at Yoongi whereas the King himself was just confident as he was. He can’t tell who’s who that is lying.

It’s not like Boongi will lie, but the King ? He sighed. But what if Yoongi’s telling the truth?

The witch can’t help but feel warm thinking how the King, even though he’s annoying, will follow Boongi’s request and assist them in giving those flowers to him.

“Then, thank you for these, your Majesty,” Jimin smiled, but this time it was no longer to the blob, but to Yoongi before he carried the blob toward the empty vase near the window where the red bird once was. Jimin made sure to pet their head.

Without another word, Yoongi decided to leave the library without Boongi. His heart aches on how lovely and bright Jimin’s smile was to him.

He needs to keep his distance though. Jimin might be using some sort of spell on him and he doesn’t want to fall to his dirty tricks, only to get devastated again in the end like he once did with Irene.

Yes, the King’s heart may perhaps be hot and cold while Jimin, thankfully, isn’t yet sharing the same sentiment with Yoongi but soon, he will— without any chance of running away like Yoongi’s trying to do right now.

Chapter 21

It’s been a week since Jimin discovered that he’s able to produce and manipulate fire from his own. He was both ecstatic and nervous with the discovery. Although he can’t help but feel mostly the latter, as there would be occasional glimpses of his past whenever he will try to use his magic.

Nevertheless, he enjoyed using it as it feels surreal to be able to use magic at this time of his life. Never did he imagined something as mysterious yet magical could happen to him.

However he still don’t want to think much of the possibility of him being reborn in this life as a witch. Because even if he was, he would still want to be reffered as a bookkeeper. Not a witch. It just don’t sit right to him. Don’t know why, but he seems to like that label more than to be called a witch.

As expected, when he read/used the book in his library that only he could access, during one of his meditations, it burned on its own.

Indicating that he’s now the one and only person who knew what knowledge that certain book once has and of course, Jimin made sure to transfer all its contents to a scroll. He is not going to gatekeep.

He wants to help Yoongi’s kingdom to grow even when the King himself, realistically , wants him dead once proven he is indeed a witch and not a bookkeeper as what he kept on telling them.

Although, if Yoongi suddenly decided to change his mind and would want to keep him (for Leukos gain, of course), he might be able enjoy this second life of his to the fullest.

That again, is if the King will use him to teach Taehyung and the scholars of the Palace, not that he minds though. He rather be alive than dead.

Jimin sighed when he realised he’s just being paranoid someone would barged in while he discreetly uses his magic to mold the base of the hourglass, as a way too to practice his fire magic. Although he can’t use his magic for more than five minutes as he have to rest every now and then. So he had a lit candle beside him ready just in case so he can use it as his alibi too, that that is what he’s using to mold the glass and not his so-called magic, which of course we all know is a lie.

He realised that probably the reason why he lost the magic he once had in the first place on the first day he was in Leukos to save Yoongi and the everyone from Leukos against Kai and the witches of Erebos, was because his physical strength doesn’t match with his magical ability, and that he should probably start gaining physical strength too, if he wants to balance and gain control of his witch magic, or whatever one would call it.

However he’s thankful though that no one has yet bothered him since earlier in his library. Yes, his

— secretly.

He is the only one who knew this library was his, as he self-proclaimed that the once abandoned library is now owned by him, given that he had been occupying said library for quite some days now since Boongi lead him here.

Although the King tried to persuade Jimin to use the other library instead, which was way bigger and has a lot more books than the one where he resides, but he just respectfully declined the offer saying that he pretty much prefer small spaces where in reality it’s a lie.

He don’t like the vibe of that other library Yoongi was persuading him to use instead because One, he found out from Namjoon, who was with them during the time the King was touring him inside said library, that it was previously owned by Irene, Yoongi’s ex-wife. Second, and most importantly, he really do not like the vibe that library is giving him. It is like he’s being choke on the neck for some reason or ,was it just his imagination because he’s being biased to the King’s ex-wife?

Of course, it will be such a delight to have a big library of his own in this world like he previously once had from his own world, even though it can’t be as big as what he used to have but still, as a bookkeeper, he would rather have a comfortable library than a big one that gives him the creeps the longer he stays inside. He wonders what kind of fuckery er, magic Irene did there.

He almost burned himself in panic when he heard Hoseok’s voice outside the room. Checking if he’s inside and if he could come in. Thankfully, he was able to put the fire out from his hand hands and make it look like he was just patiently sculpting the glass in his hands when the elder went in after he allowed him to.

“Sorry to bother you but could I perhaps join you here just for a bit until I get, uh, sleepy?”

“Of course, although I hope you wouldn’t mind my presence,” Jimin replied, with curiosity as to why Hoseok would want to be in a room with him, an accused witch of the King, just so the General could get sleepy.

But he would not turn a blind eye from the fact that the General himself looks like he hasn’t gotten any sleep yet from how dark his eye bags are. He just secretly hopes it won’t affect Hoseok’s day-to-day tasks.

He offered him a vacant chair to sit, while he continues with his task when Hoseok decided to have a little chat with him to perhaps, get to know him better.

Perhaps so he could use whatever personal information he would gather from Jimin to tell to the King, to make hum change his mind and keep the witch alive, being Jimin’s also the same witch who had saved them from their Kingdom’s almost downfall.

Although the reason why the witches from Erebos gladly helped Kai was because Yoongi was the caused of their race to die. They fled there for safety and Kai used their hatred, their weakness from the situation, to his advantage and it worked.

Contrary to what most people or witches think he is, Yoongi doesn’t have a lust or addiction to killing witches. It was just a matter of avenging a dear person to the King, which only heightened when he discovered Irene’s true colors.

Call it a trigger.

“Mind if I asks, where you learned about the hourglass from? I mean, that’s something even I had never heard before,”

“I learned it from the books,” he replied, momentarily looking at Hoseok in the eye, “This was a knowledge from the first people who lived before us. I mean, from the world where I came from, and passed on to the next generation. The hourglass was where they first start to learn how to check the day and time. Honestly, during the old times, hourglasses were what many considered as accurate but not when inventions evolved and the use of hourglasses became more of aesthetic use.”

“Oh,” is what Hoseok could only utter. Amazed at how Jimin relayed such information like it was just a normal thing to share coming from a witch like him. Different from Irene or the previous witches that he had met before. Of course, there’s Taehyung who was also considered a witch by the King and the people of Leukos, but he is not yet well-rounded on such things as how a ‘real’ witch does, exactly like Jimin.

“Truthfully, it will be a big help if hourglasses will be made accessible to many here since there is no way I’ll be capable of making a ‘real’ clock without sufficient and modern tools,” he muttered.

“And where is this hourglass you were talking about being used again?”

“Households, workplaces, and churches. Although I don’t think the Temple you have here will be in need of that so, it’s more on for household chores and work hours.”

“Do you… I mean, from where you came from, do you normally use the hourglass for such things?”

“Not really. In modern times, no. We have clocks. That is the equivalent or upgraded version of the hourglass that we use. There are a lot of varieties you can choose from. It can be small, or big, in different shapes and designs. You can even put them on your wrist or in your pocket unlike this hourglass but still, if you know how to make one and use one, it won’t be a problem. You should still be able to get an accurate reading.”

“And you learned all of that just from the books that you read?”

Jimin nods, “Yes.”

“Goodness! You’re as exactly what Namjoon had told us. He told us once during dinner that you could pass as a scholar, seeing how capably knowlegeable you are! You know, you are one of those types of people like him who were favored and were gifted with such patience and love for learning new things.”

The witch’s blushed from the General’s compliment. It’s not like he’s not used to it, hell , every single person he had met from his past life always praised him being the greatest, being the best of all bookkeepers that many are also envious of the gift that he has but really, such genuine compliment makes him shy and giddy.

This reaction of Jimin however didn’t go unnoticed by Hoseok. Secretly smiling on how humble the witch was in front of him, as he was used to seeing many being boastful about the skill/ability that they have.

“Well, I knew you’re going to decline the King’s offer being a scholar for the Palace if he asks you to be one, so will it be bothersome to you if I asks you to help me instead about my situation? I’m just taking my chances anyway seeing how really good you are but if it’s too much for you, it’s fine.”

“What do you mean?” he asks, carefully placing the glass on the side to focus on Hoseok’s concern instead rather than to what he was doing just minutes ago.

Don’t asks why, he just felt like doing so as a bookkeeper. Just an old habit of his. As it was only natural for him to help anyone who asks for his help. The only difference was, he’s not being paid to do this but that’s okay. It’s not like he works at the Palace anyway. Not yet, at least.

“Uh, yeah… so remember when I asked you earlier if I could join you until I get sleepy?”

Jimin nods.

“Well, I was just wondering if there’s anything you can share with me to help me with this tiny little problem I have,” he starts, a little hesitant but Hoseok still gave it a shot.

“This problem that I have has been bothering me ever since I could remember. The healers had already told me it might be just something that runs in my family, well yes, sort of. But then, I need something to somehow make my situation bearable as I am the Palace’s General, you know. Can’t let my guard down even though there’s a lot of guards roaming around Leukos.”

Jimin nods, listening carefully to what Hoseok had just said. Analysing what could be his problem was.

“Okay, let me guess, you’re having problems sleeping, are you, Hoseok hyung?”

Hoseok was surprised that Jimin was able to guessed what his concern was correctly without fully telling him yet what the actual problem was that he has, as it usually takes a couple of minutes for the healers themselves to know and for the scholars to figure that out. He was pleased and hopeful at the same time that perhaps the witch could help him with his problem. Perhaps there is cure.

“So, has it been really that long since you noticed you’re having trouble sleeping?”

“Kind of. I remembered my Appa used to tell me that he had this kind of problem before when he was at my age. Didn’t think of it that much until I experienced it myself.”

“So, how is he now?”

Hoseok points to the floor, which Jimin followed with his eyes carefully. It took a good minute before he realised what the General meant when he heard him giggling with his seemingly dark/silly joke.

“Yes, Jimin. He’s dead. He died when I was still a kid. I think it was because of the problem that I have now and somehow, it scares me a little. I still want to live a bit more though and enjoy more!” Jimin didn’t fail to noticed how scared those eyes of Hoseok were.

“Tell me about your lifestyle then,”

“Lifestyle?” Hoseok raised a brow in confusion. Jimin mentally slapped himself. Yeah, right. How did he forget that his terminologies are unusual here in Aidios? It was exactly how Yoongi caught him without a fight. He should’ve learn from that mistake already.

“Sorry. What I mean is, what do you usually drink and eat? What do you do on a day-to-day basis?”

“Oh,” Hoseok thinks for a minute before answering, “Well, I eat whatever food was being served to us, and with regards to my work as a General, treating night as day or vice versa, had been a normal thing for me ever since. My body had become used to it already.”

Jimin hums in response.

“Then may I assume that any changes with the temperature, a slight noise or light could easily wake you up?”

The General was stunned how Jimin easily laid out some of his symptoms, that he had been trying to endure all these past years since he started having problem with his sleep.

“Do you have any other known illnesses apart from what you had inherited from your Father?”

Hoseok shook his head.

“How about drinking habits? Do you smoke?”

“I drink whenever the King or my friends need company. I am lightheaded so I easily get drunk after one to two drinks but I do smoke.”

“You do?” Jimin asks. Hoseok doesn’t seem the type to smoke but, oh well.

“Sometimes.”

“Any trouble focusing or remembering things?”

“Yes,” Hoseok mentally took note how focused Jimin is. He doesn’t seem to just analyze but also write his conclusion in his head mentally based on what was given to him, making sure that what he will provide as an answer is indeed accurate.

“So?” he says, hesitant, after a few minutes of Jimin not saying anything to him.

“Well, based on all the information you have given me, you are most likely suffering from Insomnia.”

“Insomnia? What’s that? Is that some type of deadly disease?” Hoseok panics.

“Not really, unless we monitor you and make sure that it won’t lead to anything serious like what happened to your Father then you should be good.”

“There is a cure?”

“Prevention, not cure. It’s always the necessary and best thing to do than cure.”

Hoseok could only nod, as he tries to understand Jimin’s diagnosis of him. He has not heard of that term before with anyone but it seems the witch knows what he is talking about. Of course, he is a bookkeeper so he knows what is what.

Then Jimin explained to him what an Insomnia is. That that is not a deadly disease like what he initially thought it was, but rather a sleeping disorder.

Although as Jimin said, it’s not to be taken lightly as it may lead to complications and other types of disease if it gets worse. He also explained to the General the types of Insomnia there is, what type of Insomnia he falls under, and what had caused it.

Hoseok knew, all of the other things the witch had described, that he didn’t mention the other, were all correct. Jimin also gave him a task to monitor his sleep for the next few days and provided some prevention treatment to see if it would work on him or not.

“In the meantime, I’ll try to find some herbs for you that you could use whenever you’re having trouble sleeping. Hopefully, it’ll work and you should have no problem afterwards. You work hard for the Palace and Leukos safety, I think you deserve all the good sleep like the King has at night.”

“Oh, I, uh.. thank you, Jimin,” exclaimed Hoseok, smiling, offering a handshake to the witch which the other accepts.

“No need to thank me. I’m just doing my job as a bookkeeper. Besides, we’re not sure yet if our treatment plan will work but I hope it does.”

“Of course, it will! After all, it’s only you who had been able to determine this concern I had for years now.”

“And I’m glad my credibility as a bookkeeper hasn’t tarnish yet.”

“Aren’t you too humble, Jimin?”

“Am I?”

Hoseok nods, “Even though you keep on telling us you’re a bookkeeper, or perhaps just someone who could be a big help in the Palace, considering that still in the eyes of the King, you’re a witch, you remain humble. No signs of being boastful or whatsoever that I mostly see with the others when they’re being complimented and for that, I am amazed and pleased in every way that I was able to meet you.”

“It’s such an honor too, to hear those kind words from a General who had been into countless battles and was able to keep the kingdom intact along with the king.”

After their hearty chit-chat, Hoseok went out of the library happy and ready to try the advice Jimin gave him, for him to be able to have a good sleep tonight (hopefully).

Whereas Jimin, as promised, went out of his library a few minutes after the General had left, to search for some herbs that he thinks Hoseok may use from the Arboretum. Not failing to notice that someone is following him from behind. The witch smiled and decided to play with his stalker a little.

“Fuck it, I lost him.” Taehyung pants, trying to mellow out.

“Are you sure about that?”

Taehyung’s eyes widened and he quickly turned his head where the voice came from and was stunned to see Jimin, leaning on the alley wall with a playful smile on his lips.

“I—” the young witch could feel his cheeks turning red in shame.

“You could have just told me you want to come along instead of sneaking behind. You could have gotten yourself in trouble if you lost me for real and I didn’t sensed that you were following me.”

“I’m sorry,” Taehyung pouts, lowering his head, resembling a kid who got scolded by his parents. Jimin chuckled.

“Nah, it’s okay, but next time just tell me. You don’t have to be scared or shy in asking me unless you’ll tell the King I sneaked out without his permission, then that’s when we will have a problem.”

Taehyung gulped. Jimin sounded like a parent. Now he won’t be surprised as to why Boongi acts the way they were with him.

“O-okay,”

“Okay.” he smiled, offering his elbow to Taehyung, which the younger took and made sure to take a mental note on observing the witch up close. Making sure that it’s really Jimin whom the dices told him about that the Leukos and Yoongi, needs.

Chapter 22

If there’s one thing Taehyung noticed while he and Jimin were together, it was his aura. There’s something about Jimin that makes him shiver in a good way.

They finally arrived at the arboretum where all kinds of trees and flowers grow. It is where the Palace gets their daily herbs supplies. However not everything that is in the arboretum are being used. Some are neglected, and those are the ones that has not been studied yet by the scholars if they are good to use or something poisonous to mankind.

“What are we looking for?” Taehyung finally asks, noticing the look on Jimin’s face. The witch looks unsatisfied with the ones that they are surrounded by right now, that are mostly being used by the people of Leukos and the Palace in a day-to-day basis.

He looks like he’s looking for something oddly specific.

“Some Valerian roots and Passionflower.”

“Are those for spells?”

“Nope, they are for Hoseok hyung.”

“What do you mean those are for hyung?”

“You’ll see,” Jimin smiled.

Taehyung scratches his head, unsure of what Jimin’s answer to him was. What it meant exactly, but decided to help him by picking out some of the lavender that they are using in Leukos as an air freshener and some chamomile that they use as tea. He made sure to get a little more than is needed as he remembers it is one of Jin’s favorite.

“Hyung?” he called out to Jimin when he noticed him going to the area where the untested plants of the scholars yet are.

Jimin pouts, seeing the many ‘undiscovered’ plants that haven’t been studied and tested yet by the scholars. It was a lot. Like, some of them had already wittered and one of those are the herbs that he needs for Hoseok.

He wonders how this arboterum got to grow such herbs and plants, all in one place.

There are Hops, St. John’s Wort, Holy Basil, Passionflower, Valerian roots, Mint, and a whole lot which, he knows he will soon make use of. But for now, he will only get the ones that he thinks he needs.

Taehyung eyes widened when he saw how careless Jimin picked one of the unstudied plants there in the arboretum and just shoved in his mouth like it’s somewhat safe.

“H-hyung! What are you doing? You might get sick by doing that, or else die!” he panics, running over to Jimin to try to swat the mint out of his hand but the elder just waved him off, chuckling. Taehyung pouts, curious why Jimin doesn’t seem as scared as he was eating an unstudied plant. Worrying that this might be the immediate effects of the leaf the other just munched over.

“Relax, darling.” Jimin finally said, picking another mint leaf and hands it over to Taehyung, “It’s not poisonous. Try it. It’s sweet and cool in the mouth. It’s called Mint Leaves. It ain’t going to kill you if that’s what you’re worrying about.”

Taehyung warily took the leaf from Jimin and smelled it before licking a small portion of the leaf with his tongue.

Surprised at how correct his elder was with what he said. He slowly began chewing it in small pieces. Distracted by how it didn’t kill them when he thought it was both their first time to see and dare to taste such leaf.

While the younger was busy munching his mint leaf, happy with his little discovery today, he failed to notice Jimin closing his eyes as he walked down the path, trying to access his library in his mind to look for a spell that would be able to drizzle the plants therein, just enough to nourish them. Just so the ‘unstudied’ plants of the scholars remains in the arboretum.

Jimin quickly opened his eyes once he’s done finding what he was looking for. Not forgetting to write this piece of information later once they go back at the Palace.

He pouts when he realised that it’ll be a big takeaway if he suddenly chants here with the young witch around. He wants to do a rain spell, so he has to do it in another way. Otherwise, Taehyung might accidentally spill to the King that he really is indeed a witch from the rain spell that he’ll be doing.

As much as he wants to help the younger in his journey in becoming a ‘legit’ witch, even though he is a bookkeeper, if he ends up being killed by Yoongi, then it’ll be useless. He needs to think of another way it will be done discreetly, exactly how he uses the candle in his library as an alibi whenever he tries to practice his fire magic.

He quickly and secretly traces the corresponding runes he needed on the ground with his feet, while Taehyung is still busy with his own world, as he hums a familiar song that he once had heard, making sure he dances around the rune that he made for the spell to work.

Getting lost in the imagery he has inside his head, forgetting the fact that he is with Taehyung who, by now, was in awestruck by Jimin’s sudden change of aura, and can feel a slight pang on his chest as he hears the song the elder was singing. It makes him want to cry and so does the sky.

And the day that we’ll watch the death of the sun

That the cloud and the cold and those jeans you have on

Then you’ll gaze unafraid as they sob from the city roofs

Then, it happened.

Exactly how Jimin wanted. It starts from one to two small teardrops of water falling from the sky until it becomes a lot, but not enough to be considered as rain, only a drizzle.

While the sky above is sad, the land beneath where the teardrops of rain falls were happy that some of the flowers and plants had mysteriously sparkled right infront of the young witch’s eyes. He looked around and noticed how lively the side of the arboretum where they are at suddenly became lively like it had never been before.

Taehyung made a mental note that this isn’t just something normal to happen if it was just anybody except a witch can do, but how did the elder did it when he didn’t have any materials with him? There’s not even a carved rune somewhere that he can see.

Unbeknownst to him, he wasn’t the only one wondering how it happened. Namjoon just happens to be near the area too with Yoongi tagging along. Checking on the progress of the plants that are being studied by some other scholars aside from himself to be given to the healers to use.

However instead of Yoongi focusing on the fact that it is raining only in the area where Jimin and Taehyung were, he focuses on the song Jimin had sang meant. Was it a spell or just a love song about falling in love while having all these worst-case scenarios in your head that make you think things but still trying to find the good in it? Regardless, it made Yoongi feel the blues but hopeful.

So was the sky. No wonder it shed a bit of its tears from the song Jimin had sang.

“Hyung?” calls Namjoon, in confusion, when Yoongi turned his back and starts walking away. Surprised that the King doesn’t want to annoy the witch today as he is used to.

“Don’t let them know I was with you,” he said, before completely leaving his advisor behind but not missing the chance to hear Jimin’s giggles. Perhaps Taehyung said something to the other, and for some selfish reason, Yoongi hopes one day he’ll have the chance to make the witch giggle too.

Chapter 23

“You seemed different,” utters Jin, staring at Hoseok. The General had been sleeping well days after following all the things Jimin had told him to do. It was a miracle indeed for him to be able to sleep like a baby ever since he could remember and for that, he was thankful he had asked for Jimin’s help.

“Am I? It’s good to hear then,” Hoseok smiled. Proud of his and Jimin’s work.

“Did you do something unusual with your routine, Seokie? Share it to me, would you? I need to look more pleasant than I am now,” exclaimed Jin, pouting, as he sheepishly looks at Namjoon, hoping it’ll get his attention.

Of course, it did. But Namjoon didn’t want to make it obvious. The advisor don’t want to be called out early in the morning by the prince’s brother as they eat their breakfast at the table because who would want that, right? It’s too early to receive teasing from their friends!

“There was a change in routine, yes, but that was just all because I am now able to get a good amount of sleep unlike before. Not that I’m blaming my work as a General for the reason being but I never thought I’d still be able to achieve it, but I did.”

“So you were finally able to find a healer that helped you, hyung?” asks Jungkook.

“Actually,” Hoseok looks at Jungkook before continuing, “It was Jimin who had helped me with my problem.”

“Jimin? The witch, er bookkeeper?” asks Namjoon, surprised, that it wasn’t a healer who resolved the General’s concern, “Oh, so that’s why you two were at the Arboretum!”

Namjoon turned to look at the young witch.

Taehyung nods, “Hyung had asked me to accompany him in there to find  some herbs for Hoseok hyung to use.”

“He allowed you?” asks Jin, surprised, because it’s rare for witches to asks for help or get apprentices, and pretty much a no-no if it’s from someone who wasn’t a pure-blood.

He grew up knowing that most witches don’t teach each other. They usually learn on their own and just sort of collaborate, if a critical or big spell requires more than one witch.

“Yes! He did! I, myself, was surprised that he allowed me because before that, I was sneaking behind him in secret. You know, I just want to see how he do as a bookkeeper, but he was quick to noticed what I was doing. He also provided some notes to Namjoon hyung if I’m not mistaken once we returned from the arboretum, regarding the herbs we had picked that day that haven’t been studied yet by scholars of what it was and what it does.”

“Is it true?” asks Yoongi, surprised that Jimin did what he had done. Although he was aware that Jimin and Taehyung were together that day, they didn’t need to know that. Only he and Namjoon knew because once they find out, Jin might think it’s suspicious of Yoongi that he did nothing to annoy the witch when he had the chance, given the fact that the two always bicker when they are around.

Namjoon nods, “And everything he had written on the scroll were all correct. Nothing was amiss. I studied it myself a few times to be sure and it seems to me that he really is knowledgeable of all those herbs that us scholars haven’t studied yet.”

“Of course, he does. He’s a witch after all.”

“Bookkeeper, Appa. Jimin hyung is a bookkeeper,” Jungkook corrects him.

“Then how would you explain to me the things he’d done?”

“Because like what Jimin hyung had always been telling us, he learned everything from the books that he had read. Bookkeepers are like scholars but in extreme! Imagine, how hard it has been for hyung from the world he came from, to be a person like him. Reading and reading tons of scrolls without a rest. That’s torture, Appa! It’s like they’re trained to not just be the book that gives answers to every question but the knowledge itself that is being sought by many,” replied Jungkook, and Yoongi can’t help but feel a little bit of guilt. Remembering what Jimin told him on his first night at the Palace as his captive.

He remembered how Jimin told him being a bookkeeper was also the reason why he died because people there from his own world became so greedy for power that they were willing to do anything, just to get what they wanted, even killing the greatest bookkeeper they have, which happened to be Jimin, to get what they want when he refused to give in with their request.

Yoongi cleared his throat.

“Where is he anyway? Didn’t I asked the servants to get to him to join us?”

“About that, hyung, someone saw him leaving the Palace earlier before the servants could even get to your chambers,”

“Again? “ Yoongi huffs, but was no longer surprised to what he had heard. Unlike the others, Jimin has this habit of not asking for the King’s permission to do anything that he wants or need to do, even when he is under the King’s care. It seemed to him that the younger loves to sneak out whenever he has the chance, just like Boongi. Speaking of the blob, “Is Boongi with him?”

“From what the guards had told me, yes. Boongi’s with Jimin,” replied Hoseok.

“I see, Boongi really seemed fascinated with Jimin, don’t you agree?” Jin snickered, while looking at his brother with a smug face.

He was teasing him, of course, knowing how possessive Yoongi is with Boongi. He knows the King must be jealous right now that he’s no longer just the blob’s favorite.

“That I noticed!” Jungkook chirped.

“I wonder why though, you know? Boongi, although created by witches, doesn’t seem to like them but with Jimin…”

“Exactly,” replied Jin, with a Ceshire smile.

“That is because Jimin hyung has this… I don’t know how to explain it, but he has this, uhm, you know? He acts like a mother to Boongi! Sweet but not too sweet. Do you get what I mean?” says Taehyung.

“Yes. From what I noticed Jimin wasn’t a fan of spoiling Boongi unlike hyung,” Hoseok adds.

Yoongi’s upper lip twitched on Hoseok’s comment. Are they comparing his and Jimin’s treatment with Boongi? Which perhaps be the reason why Boongi likes the witch more now than the King?

The King huffs, displeased.

“Say, is that how you felt when Jimin figured you were following him, Tae?” asks Jin.

“Well, sort of,” Taehyung replied, blushing.

Yoongi cleared his throat once again to get everybody’s attention at the table with him and let them know that breakfast has ended.

Would you blame him though is he was just taking safety measures against his brother not to bring up topics regarding his love life or rather him getting a new wife or perhaps husband? It doesn’t matter.

He don’t care much about his lover’s gender anyway. May it be a woman or a man like him. However what he isn’t ready yet to talk about was his future romances with his brother, fully knowing how Jin mind works.

Sometimes he wonders what Namjoon had seen in his brother but again, Namjoon is sometimes questionable too. What a pair the two are!

After everyone had left, to do what they got to do that day, except Yoongi who had nothing to do, and albeit he was the King, sneaked out of his Palace and made sure to put on a disguise before leaving, to make sure none of the commoners would recognise him.

It’s not like he hates them. Of course, not. Yoongi thinks tere’s just a place and time when he wants to be surrounded by his people and right now, he doesn’t want to be surrounded. He just wants to check what was happening outside the Palace and perhaps, to stumble onto Jimin and Boongi and see what they’re doing.

Now, whether Jimin’s using spells to attract customers at the bread house or simply because he bakes well, Yoongi wasn’t sure, but what he is sure of was, that he found himself falling in line along with other people lining up to help themselves and buy bread.

Sera quickly see-through the King’s disguise before Yoongi could even reach the front. She was so ecstatic that she quickly pulled Jimin away from the oven made of bricks so that he could be the one to hand over the bread to Yoongi, while Jimin had no idea what was going on.

When it was Yoongi’s turn, he was surprised that it was no longer Sera handing out the goods but Jimin himself.

Jimin looked at the man infront of him and found his clothing funny because not only he was wearing a large gat , which almost covered half of his face already, making it uneasy for Yoongi to see what was in front of him, but his clothes were stuffy too, and no, Jimin do not think the man is fat either to be wearing something like this. It’s like his outfit was done on purpose. Nonetheless, he still entertained him.

“A traveler?” he asks, as he carefully wraps a few pieces of bread onto the wax paper that the mystery man ordered. Technically, he just pointed what bread he wants, deciding it’s best not to speak or he’ll blow his cover.

Yoongi nods. He dare not to open his mouth otherwise Jimin might figure it is him he is talking to. He couldn’t afford cutting their ‘peaceful’ interaction when Jimin’s giving him eye smiles even when he’s having a hard time seeing them because of his disguise but still, he likes to see Jimin’s smile to him a little bit longer.

“You seem quiet for a traveler thou,” he adds, trying to discreetly check Yoongi’s face underneath the gat but couldn’t.

But damn it, when Yoongi lifts his head a bit more to see him, Jimin was stunned to see how pretty his eyes are, pretty much resembling a cat. Although it was just his left eye but still. However this man infront of him also reminds him of someone although it might be just his imagination.

Yoongi nods again. Unsure how he should answer Jimin.

“Here ’ya go. I hope you enjoy your stay here in Leukos, dear traveler. The people here are warm and so are the Palace people including the uh, King. Yes, the king! If you happen to meet him by chance during your stay, I assure you he is a kind and loving King, but not with the witches though aside from Taehyung,” he says, giggling at the end.

Yoongi almost got himself caught when he quickly raised his head to meet Jimin’s eyes. Surprised how enthusiastic he was talking about Leukos, especially about him when all he ever did was annoy Jimin and always banter with him. Except that one time when he saw him crying in the once abandoned library.

He wants to know and see for himself if the witch in front of him saw through his disguise or not and lo and behold, Jimin didn’t, and pretty much was telling him the truth. There were no signs of lying that can be traced on his face.

Yoongi, before he could even realised it, his heart had already began beating so fast that he had to snatch the wax paper filled with bread from Jimin’s hands.

Whilst the other just scratched his head wondering about the man’s actions but continued with his task to the next customer, no longer bothering to think about Yoongi. Besides, he had already paid for the bread and he thought, perhaps, something had come up with the traveler and needed to be somewhere so he just let him be.

Balam and Sera, who were secretly watching the whole scene between the King and the witch, secretly smiled and nodded at each other. Seeing that Yoongi didn’t went too far from the bread house and was just staring at Jimin from where he’s at, the two thought of a plan.

They dismissed Jimin early from helping them, telling him that instead of just wasting his time at the bread house, it’ll be best for him to roam around, as she and Sera can finish on their own and that Boongi seemed to be bored by now since they arrived.

Upon hearing this, Jimin quickly agreed, noticing how Boongi had been constantly tugging his clothes hem since he had spoken with the mystery traveler awhile ago, like the blob was asking him to go somewhere to play, or perhaps was trying to tell something to him. Either way, he thinks Balam and Sera was right. A stroll around the marketplace before going to back to the Palace sounds nice. It didn’t take awhile for Jimin to meet the traveller, a.k.a Yoongi, again by the street side, eating the bread he bought earlier from the bread house.

“Fancy meeting you again, dear traveler.” he greets, with Boongi in his arms, carrying them like it’s his baby.

Boongi didn’t react though, realising that it was indeed Yoongi from earlier that Jimin was talking to, instead the blob curls its body more on Jimin, loving the warmth Jimin has, making Yoongi a bit uncomfortable— jealous rather, but there’s no way he’s ready to admit that anytime soon.

Yoongi clears his throat. He’s pretty sure that if he still won’t answer Jimin, the younger might find it suspicious, that for a traveler he said he was, is quiet, perhaps deaf.

“You’re not following me, are you?” he asks, voice much deeper than his usual, sending shivers down the witch’s spine. Nope, not because he’s scared or it gives him the creeps, like his head was telling him the man infront of him is a perfect example of stranger-danger, no. He actually finds the traveler’s voice alluring— his baritone voice makes him flushed.

“Oh, finally! You talked! I thought you’re deaf or that you just don’t want to speak to me. Anyways, no! I’m not following you. Why would I follow you in broad daylight?” he replied, smugly.

“Should I then considered myself lucky that it’s not dark outside or you could have really followed me and do something to me, eh?”

“Did you seriously think I’ll be following you?”

Yoongi turned to look at Jimin, hesitant, before nodding. Perhaps, the witch would. He wouldn’t say those things to him if the witch haven’t thought of doing it, right?

Jimin laughed. Not in a mocking way, just laughing to his response to him heartily and Yoongi felt like melting on the spot.

“You’re funny! I like you,” he replied, wiping off the single tear that escaped from his right eye, “Of course, I wouldn’t do that. I don’t like being followed either, so why would I do that to someone, especially to a person whom I just met? Unless, if you’re planning something bad against another person living here, then I probably might follow you.”

“Are you, really? Risking your safety for someone who might not even know you?”

“Yeah, why not? No one deserves to be in that kind of situation. Who wants to be hurt anyway, especially if you didn’t do anything against that person, right?”

“You’re… unnatural .”

“How? Do you like the feeling of taunting other people or being taunted? I’m pretty sure if we were in front of the King, he won’t find my answer weird. He’s the King after all. A good King would not want to see his people getting hurt, especially since he protects and love them unconditionally like a parent would to their child.”

Yoongi’s breath hitched.

He knew he and Jimin always get into silly arguments but never did he expect he would hear these kinds of words from him, even when he told him that he would kill him once he proved that Jimin was indeed a witch and yet, here he is, saying nothing but all kind words about him.

He cleared his throat. Trying not to loose his composure infront of Jimin.

“You’re making it seem that the King’s a kind man when in fact, he’s known as the King who killed the lives of witches whether they’re good or bad, he didn’t hesitate to end almost of their kind.”

Jimin took a glance at the traveler before looking up at the sky with orange, violet, and blue hues, and smiled when he saw a group of birds flying together. He sighed.

“I’m pretty sure he has his reasons. Everyone has, why they did what they did. Whether it was reasonable or not, still they have their reasons and who am I to judge them? If I were in their position, if I was the one who had lived their life, I may or may not have done the same thing too, perhaps even worse.”

Yoongi smirks, looking at the sky too, the same one Jimin was staring at.

“You talk like you may have thought of doing something similar like the King once did,”

“I have,” he replied without hesitation.

“What?” trying to sound surprise, which Yoongi had already anticipated Jimin would say yes. Thinking that it may have something to do with how Jimin died from his previous life as a bookkeeper. His heart clenched in guilt when he remembered the conversation he had with his son during breakfast earlier.

“You heard me, right?” he replied, trying to masks the pain with a smile, “But I couldn’t bring myself to. I was too mad at everything that I, instead of doing what I thought of doing, to avenge the person whom I cherished the most, I instead… never mind . Let’s not talk about things that had already happened. It doesn’t bring us any good just sadness and we don’t want that, right?”

“Never mind?” Yoongi’s heart ached more than it should, seeing himself to Jimin.

Never mind, Jimin said. Which Yoongi did once said to himself. Numbing the pain. Masking it with happiness whereas, Yoongi didn’t, but he did numbed the pain until he went mad. Until he can’t feel anything anymore. Until once again, he did feel, just because of what Jimin had said to him and it irritates him to see how something so unpleasant can still make the other smile despite everything that had happened to him. Those men killed the most important person to Jimin and yet, Jimin, he…

“Yeah, never mind.” Jimin reiterated.

It was silent for a few minutes before the King spoke again.

“Do you… do you miss that person?” he don’t understand himself why he asked that, but as soon as he did, Yoongi felt a pang of jealousy in his chest. Why does he care anyway? It’s probably just his parents, right? But he don’t remember about Jimin telling him about his parents. He just meant ‘person’ which means it can be just one person. His lover, perhaps?

“Of course! He’d been there for me since the beginning and I.. if it weren’t for me he… he wouldn’t end up dying. He died protecting me. He should’ve been living still. I should have been the only one that died that night.”

The atmosphere between them suddenly became heavy. Yoongi don’t understand why he feels jealous and mad against this person that Jimin deeply cared for, when he shouldn’t be. He’s a witch after all. He shouldn’t care, but Jimin… hearing how he blames himself for everything that had happened, it makes him mad. 

Jimin bit his lip. He felt like throwing up remembering that night they were ambushed in their home and Mr. Bang trying to persuade the bad people not to kill Jimin, not even trying to save his own life but the younger’s life instead, and at that very moment, he felt like crying again.

The feeling was too much. He suddenly wants to be home again, wishing these was all just a dream and that Mr. Bang is still alive, waiting for him to hear all he had learned that whole day when he was just inside his library doing nothing but reading.

Yoongi felt all the hairs on his body rised when Jimin suddenly sang a song that only the two of them could hear amidst the number of people walking past them and he knew, he had never been sad and jealous at the same time when he realized that the younger’s still yearning from his past life, even when he is already here in Leukos, even when the people there had been cruel to him, only because of this person he cherished the most and for once, Yoongi also wanted to be just like that person to Jimin.

Home is where we are now

Home is where you are

Home is where I am standing

Where I’ll be staying forever

Chapter 24

“Hyung? Where have you been? We’ve been looking for you for hours,” Hoseok asks, relieved, seeing Yoongi infront of them unharmed.

“He’s right, hyung! We thought something bad might have happened to you already,” Namjoon adds.

It was already nighttime when Yoongi decided to go back to the Palace, leaving Jimin behind. More like, Jimin bidding goodbye to him when the younger saw his friends who just left their work and decided to eat dinner with them at one of the open stalls in the night market.

Jimin tried inviting him to join them but Yoongi declined, thinking the time he had spent today with Jimin was already enough and that he needed to go back to the Palace now, otherwise his cover might get busted because of his chaotic friends.

Was he thinking of meeting Jimin again with his disguise as a traveler? Maybe. Probably. After all, it seems that the witch didn’t even noticed it was him all along.

“Did you and the others have dinner already?” he asks, surprising the two men.

It was rare for Yoongi to blatantly show any kind of care towards them, so their reaction was quite normal. The King’s care towards his people had always been discreet. Hiding behind his cold and arrogant demeanor but the good thing was, the townvillagers can see past his facade.

“We were about to. Jin’s not feeling well, so Jungkook asked us if we can have our dinner early as he can no longer wait for you to arrive before we can eat,” replied Namjoon, embarassed of what his godson had told them.

Yoongi only raised a brow to what he had heard, not because of what Jungkook did. He was actually surprised to learn about his brother’s health. His brother, who was so vain about his appearance and well-being, suddenly gets sick on a random day?

“Has he been checked already?”

“Yes. They said it might be just for today and gave him some medicines to take and he should be okay by tomorrow.”

Yoongi nods, as that is all what he needed to hear. However he can’t just shrug off the growing number of Palace people getting sick recently. He then decided to speak to Taehyung after dinner about it and see what he had to say.

Should he also raise his concern to Jimin?

Meanwhile, Jimin together with his three friends, were currently happily drinking at the alehouse and we’re just talking about how much they missed their friend’s presence at their home. Of course, Boongi’s still with them, but was now sleeping soundly against the witch’s arms.

“But it’s good to see you healthy, hyung. We thought you’d also catch a cold just like the rest of the Palace people lately who had been reportedly getting sick out of nowhere,” says Jae, nodding happily.

“Yeah, about that, what’s going on inside the Palace right now? It seems like you Palace people are just the ones getting sick. Not like I’m wishing for us villagers to get sick too, but I’m just curious,” exclaimed Jackson, before pouring another batch of Makkeoli to Minhyun’s cup.

Jimin was lost for words. He didn’t know such thing was happening inside the Palace as he had been busy inside the library and helping Hoseok with his Insomnia.

“I… I’m sorry. I am not aware of such. I’d been busy with my task lately assigned to me by the King,” he replied, with partial truth.

“Oh, I see. But as long as you’re not going to catch ill like them, that’s all that we can be concerned about right now,” Minhyun adds.

“But isn’t it concerning? I mean, perhaps it has something to do with the food being served?”

“I’m pretty sure if it’s with the food, Prince Jin would have known it by now. His tastes in food is magnificent. He knows if the ingredients used are fresh or not, or if it was cooked carefully or hastily,” replied Minhyun to Jae.

“Then,” says Jackson, before asking for the three to come closer to him so that no one will hear what he’s about to say besides them, “… do you think the witches of Erebos are in the move again to harm us?”

“Now that you’ve said it, I think you’re right. It has been a while since they made a move,” exclaimed Jae, agreeing with his friend.

“If that’s the case, then I think Taehyung would pretty much be aware of it by now,” Jimin says, reminding his friends of Taehyung being a witch so if there’s anything out of the blue that was happening, that the scholars could not comprehend, perhaps it probably is caused by spells made by witches that only a witch too can pinpoint.

Jackson nods, agreeing with Jimin but also disagreeing judging on how Taehyung has been as the appointed witch of Leukos.

“If he did, it won’t get to the point that even Prince Jin himself will fall sick today,”

“What do you mean?” asks Jimin.

“I just heard from one of my other friends that Prince Jin wasn’t feeling well today. He might have finally caught the illness going around the Palace and it’s just a matter of time before Taehyung realise it’s caused by a spell.” Jackson replied, sighing, “It’s not like I’m doubting his abilities, but the witches of Erebos are known to be capable of creating spells that are hard to notice not until it already gets to the point where it’s kind of hard to counter. It had happened before and it could be happening again right now without any of us knowing. Who knows.”

“Right. I wonder if the reason why only the Palace people are the ones getting sick is because who they are trying to target are not the people around the King but the King himself.”

Hearing that raised a concern in Jimin.

“That could be true though. I heard before that the King himself has a very strong body, that not even once since he was born he has fallen sick unlike Prince Jin who had been like, what? Three or four times per year since he was born?”

Jimin assumed it was already past ten at night when he went back to the Palace, based on how dark the sky already was, and how bright the stars are.

He was about to enter his library to do some final touches on the now-finished hourglass, when he saw Jungkook from afar accompanying Jin, probably back to his chambers.

He squints his eyes and was surprised to see how pale Jin looks like. It’s like he had been ill for days now when according to Jackson himself, the Prince just caught his illness earlier today.

He heaved a deep sigh before looking back at Jin for one last time and perhaps it was just his eyes playing tricks on him due to the amount of rice wine he had taken, but there seemed to be some black aura lingering around Jin’s body.

He shrugged off the weird feeling upon seeing it and decided to go inside his library to carefully place Boongi on his cushion chair before doing what he had to do.

When he was done with the final touches, he decided to call it a day and was about to get out of the library (because Boongi decided to leave him alone after waking up from their nap, probably to go to Yoongi’s) to get some good sleep in the King’s chambers (yes, he finally learned to share a bed with him and for some reason, the King himself doesn’t seem to mind at all sharing a bed with him) when the bird that resembles a north cardinal stopped him from leaving.

“What now?” he asks, pissed as he’s already sleepy and could feel his body getting heavy.

“You’re not telling me to stay, are you?”

The bird chirps, as if it had understood what Jimin had asked them. The witch sighs.

“Why? Is there something you want me to do? Like what? Figure why Jin had that weird aura around him? Like it was the reason why he fell ill and be pale like that?”

The bird chirps again.

“What the fuck?” he shrieks, “Am I drunk or do you really understand what I’m saying?”

The bird stopped chirping and tilts its head on the side, like trying to understand what Jimin had just said.

“Ugh! I’m just drunk! There’s no way a bird like you can understand me,” he says, before shooing the bird away as he gets out of his library. He sleepily walks across the hallway and was again surprised to see a light coming from Taehyung’s chamber. The young witch seemed to be awake still. He perhaps finally figured the illness going around the Palace was indeed caused by a spell and is finding a way to cure the Prince and the other Palace people who fell sick.

He continues walking, thinking it is not a good idea to offer help to Taehyung as what he was initially thinking previously, as he is not a witch himself or someone learning to be a witch. He might cause more damage than help to Taehyung if he does.

When he arrived at their chamber, he was surprised to see an empty bed. Even Boongi wasn’t there. He sighed, and quickly took his bath and changed his clothes.

If there’s one thing he will miss once he succeed in his mission from getting his life spared by the King besides Boongi and some of the King’s friends, if he lets him live freely out of the Palace, was to have his own comfort room, a soft bed to sleep and his library.

Jimin should be happy that he finally gets to have their chamber all to himself since he started sharing a bed with Yoongi, right before he presents the task the King had asked him, but after everything that he had learned today, he thinks that the King might probably be in his brother’s room to, perhaps watch over him to make sure he is being well taken care of by the servants assigned to check on him.

That suddenly made Jimin felt guilty for some reason. He has helped Hoseok with his concern, so why can’t he do the same with Jin? It isn’t like he won’t find a way to help him, right? After all, he’s a bookkeeper.

Jimin was about to turn around and get back to his library and help Taehyung find a cure to Jin’s illness and perhaps, the others too who fell sick, when he suddenly heard footsteps and chatters just outside their chamber.

Perhaps it’s Yoongi and Hoseok. The voices seemed familiar to him, so he hastily lay on the bed and pretends to be asleep already. He could feel his heart beat, acting like it wants to get out of his chest. He nervously wait for the King to open the door and catch him with his silly pretend act of sleeping. He tightened his hug around the extra pillow he has in his arms so his ‘sleeping’ act will be realistic. Not realising it was Yoongi’s head pillow that he took and not just some ‘extra’ pillow they have on their shared bed.

“You better rest now, hyung. I’m pretty sure Namjoon and Taehyung will be able to find a solution by tomorrow, along with the other scholars.”

“And if they don’t?”

“Aish, hyung! Don’t be disheartened. The Prince is strong like you. Besides, if all else fails, I’m pretty sure Jimin’s there to help. After all, he’s a kind bookkeeper. You just got to be patient with him like he’s with you.”

Jimin flushed hearing Hoseok’s comment. He feels needed by the Palace but also he can’t help not to feel pressured, knowing how Yoongi acts around him and his ‘ability’ as a bookkeeper, still calling him a witch.

He pouts and hugged the extra pillow with a pout like it’s a stuff toy. He noticed how this extra pillow smells extra nice, extra manly, and he likes it because it somehow reminds him of Yoongi. Perhaps this is Yoongi’s arm rest whilst they sleep that’s why it smells like him.

Don’t even act surprise if Jimin knew what Yoongi smells like. Of course, they share the same bed and it’ll be fascinating if they haven’t even once, get to each other’s arms while they’re sleeping, like they’re married or something. Thankfully, Jimin had always been the first one to wake up in the morning so Yoongi hasn’t seen yet their very scandalized position or he’ll kill him right off the bat. The thought made him shiver.

“Patient?” he scoffs, “I doubt that.”

Jimin quickly rolled his eyes. As expected . A never-ending beef between him and Yoongi.

“That’s because you always pick fights with him, hyung! But really, Jimin is a kind and patient person. If he isn’t, he should’ve even wasted his time to go back here in your chamber every night just to share a bed with you when he has all the chance to escape.”

Jimin nods. Hoseok really knew what he’s talking about. Go lecture him, Hoseok hyung!

“You’re talking too much, Hoseok. Go and accompany Namjoon,” he orders, but Hoseok knew better. He bowed to Yoongi with a mishievous smile and a glint in his eyes before leaving the King behind by himself.

The door finally opened and Yoongi entered his chamber with Boongi latching on his shoulder. He saw Jimin already sleeping onto their shared bed of his, and noticed that he’s already on the edge of the bed and with just one push, the witch would probably fall on the ground.

So of course, whether by concern or not, he carefully pulled him onto the center of their bed so Jimin wouldn’t fall, before the blob decided to wrap its tentacles to the sleeping witch, imitating a hug, leaving his shoulder empty. But the blob pouts, looking at him, realising that they can’t seem to ‘hug’ Jimin as he was already hugging a pillow.

But not just any pillow. It was his head pillow. The King chuckled seeing how tight Jimin hugs his pillow. He can’t help not to think the witch may have probably done it by accident, being this was the first that he arrived late in his chamber to sleep but seeing how neat his side was of the bed, he now can’t help not to think Jimin might have done this purposely. Taking his head pillow and hugging it. Perhaps the witch secretly likes his smell or was the witch trying to make his pillow smell like him?

Although he knew Jimin’s pillow smell like flowers. How did he knew? He always wakes up late between them, so there are times he will wake up next to Jimin’s pillow, hugging it like it’s his arm pillow until he realised that’s not what it’s supposed to smell like.

Seeing Boongi about to throw a fit that they can’t seem to hug Jimin, he carefully pulled his pillow away from the witch and the blob quickly replaced themselves to fill the gap. Happy, that they finally get to feel Jimin onto their body.

The King sighed, seeing how comfortable the two are in his bed. He can’t help not to feel something at the scenery infront of him. He turned around and head to the wash room to take a bath and changed his clothes. Yoongi had always hated the idea of someone helping him in his bath so he made sure there’s a washroom in his chambers that no one can access except him. He wonders if Jimin likes the idea of his room.

Once done, he quickly laid on the bed beside Jimin and lo and behold, how surprised the witch was when he felt Yoongi’s left arm wrapping on his waist. By now, he knew what Boongi’s tentacles feel like and right now, he’s very sure this that’s on his waist is not from Boongi.

What the hell is going on?

Yoongi had his right elbow onto Jimin’s head pillow, with his chin resting on his palm. Admiring the witch’s side profile and slow breathing.

The King thinks this is a nice way to figure if the witch’s really sleep or just pretending to be one, by teasing him like this, but seeing how Jimin’s not moving at all, really deep in his sleep, he suddenly thinks this is the best way to say outloud the thought he has in mind that Hoseok implanted to his head earlier so that it will not poison his mind on the days ahead.

It’s not like the witch will answer, right? Because truthfully, what the General told him somewhat bothered him a bit, because really, Hoseok has a point.

Jimin leaves the Palace without his permission but still comes back at night to sleep with him, even after they banter. Even with the beef going on between them.

“I wonder,” says Yoongi, as he softly carresses the witch’s hair, tickling Jimin in a way due to familiarity, “Was this your own little way of warming the bed for your King?”

Jimin bit his lip and forces himself to sleep, setting aside the fact how intimate their position was right now, with Boongi in his arms, like they’re some type of lovers and er, parents with their kid with them and the witch can’t help not feel warm although annoyed as well to Yoongi’s teasing that he wants to punch him right now in the face.

Of course, he knew the King might be doing this on purpose but still. He can’t help not to hope for something more between them because why not? If the King wasn’t doing this just to tease him, knowing the King’s fully awake, the same King who hates and killed most witches, then what else could be the reason he was doing this to him, right?

Right.

Chapter 25

Jimin paced himself back and forth inside his library, thinking of a solution on the raising concern surrounding the Palace.

He’s pretty sure the King’s already aware of the issue and who could’ve caused it, judging by how Taehyung’s still awake late last night.

So he made sure, although still not used to him waking up next to Yoongi and remembering the King’s teasing last night, he carefully detached himself from Yoongi and the blob’s hold.

Luckily neither of them woke and he was able to leave the chamber in peace.

If you were to ask Jimin if he had a good sleep last night, he won’t be able to tell for sure. May it be his conscience not allowing him to sleep comfortably or not; because as a bookkeeper he knew he needed to do something to help Jin, what stopping him from doing so was, the fact that what if this gut was right? That as per what Jackson had said, it might be (really) caused by a spell.

Spells that only witches can make and only witches too can counter. The fact that he was unsolicitedly reminded by his brain of the previous events that had happened and the things he had done to save Leukos from being a fallen Kingdom, makes him nervous.

Because what if they were right? What if Yoongi and everyone who saw him used his so-called magic, were all right?

What if in this world, in this second life/afterlife of his, he became a witch without his knowledge? Without his consent? Perhaps there was a purpose for throwing him here and changing his class from human to a seemingly ‘powerful’ witch? What if the purpose was to help Leukos in gaining what they don’t have that Erebos has? What is he going to do? What should he do? Is he going to accept it? Should he? Will the King accept his decision, him? And spare his life as he did with Taehyung?

The sun hasn’t even risen yet, and looking at the now–finished hourglass that’s waiting to be presented to the King, Jimin looks at it and realised it was already four in the morning and he still has enough time to check on Jin. He probably won’t have much trouble meeting anyone around this hour and having to talk to them besides Namjoon or Hoseok, whom he had heard last night from Yoongi’s conversation with the General that will be the ones to watch Jin in his chambers. So, he gathered all his courage and finally decided to visit Jin, not forgetting to bring something with him first to help alleviate Jin’s condition.

He sneakily went to the arboretum by himself without being seen by anyone, and took some leaves with him to brew to an unoccupied kitchen in the Palace. He again accessed his library, that only he could, with a blank scroll in hand and a pen beside him, so he could quickly transfer what he would be reading on one of his previous books about tea making onto the scroll.

He decided to brew an immunity-boosting tea that consists of cinnamon, burdock root, licorice, dandelion root, ginger, fennel, aniseed, juniper berries, black pepper, coriander, cloves, and some turmeric.

While he waits for the ingredients to simmer, he decides to cook some porridge the way how Mr. Bang does whenever he falls ill. Jimin missed the fact that, since it was too early in the morning for someone in the Palace to be working on the kitchen, the smell travelled in the air, reaching Jin’s room and as well as Taehyung’s who, pulled an all-nighter to figure if the cause of the Palace people falling ill was caused by a spell.

“No, don’t look at me like I asked them to cook around this hour just because Jin is sick. We both knew even him will not asks something like this himself. I’m not cruel to have the servants start working when the sun hasn’t even set yet,” says Namjoon, defending himself from the murderous look the General’s giving him.

“But who else would? Surely, it wasn’t the King. We went straight back to his chamber last night. Servants wouldn’t do something without being asked by someone higher than them,” replied Hoseok.

“Then who else would? Jungkook’s out of the question. That kid sleeps like a log like the King,”

“Hyungs?” both stopped talking when Taehyung arrived infront of Jin’s chamber with a book in hand, and is waiting to be let in.

“Oh, hi Tae! I see, you’re not sleeping yet like us,” Hoseok greets and motions for him to sit beside them which the young witch did.

“I thought Jin hyung’s awake and was now eating so I went by to visit. I smelled something aromatic a few minutes ago lingering in the air,” he exclaimed.

“Us too! I thought Namjoon had asked the servants but turns out he didn’t,”

“Then who do—” Taehyung’s questioning got interrupted when Namjoon suddenly starts coughing, “.. Are you alright, hyung?”

Namjoon nods, but Hoseok looks at the advisor, unbelieving. Between the two of them, Namjoon didn’t leave Jin’s side the whole day since yesterday, after realising the King’s brother was sick, except when Jungkook pointed out that he can no longer wait for his father to arrive just so they can eat their dinner and that was when they realised the King had been missing.

Hoseok realised he forgot to asked where Yoongi went yesterday since he’s always to see inside the Palace, unless he went out to perhaps checks on the villagers or something else. He should probably ask him the next time he has the chance. It’s not like Yoongi would mind.

He looked again at Namjoon and sighed. The King’s advisor looks like he’ll be the next person to get ill if they or just Namjoon stay here a little bit longer.

As for Hoseok, he can’t tell if there’s a probability of him getting sick like the rest of the Palace people or not, as he had just spent the night, as usual, roaming around the Palace, to make sure nothing unusual was there to harm any of his friends, including other people who also lives in the Palace with them, especially the ones who were also sick like Jin.

However, like Namjoon, even though he isn’t coughing yet, he can feel his body’s a little tired from the usual. Nope, he doesn’t feel sleepy at all. He had a good amount of sleep the night before, and earlier that afternoon when he went for a nap so no. He knew it wasn’t because of him being sleepy, but he thinks he might get ill soon like Jin and so is Namjoon and this, clearly isn’t a good sign.

“Whyn’t you two get some rest and in the meantime, I’ll replace you both until I get someone to replace me?” Taehyung suggests.

Just as the two were about to refuse the young witch’s offer, they heard Jimin’s call from the outside, so Hoseok hurriedly opened the door before Jimin could, for him to see what it was all about which made Jimin come all the way here from the King’s chamber. He thought Yoongi and Jimin just had another of their silly arguments. And no, Hoseok won’t find it weird. It’s just that their banter’s something they’re already used to by now. It’s like, the two would argue day and night, regardless of the time just because they want to pissed each other off.

The three were surprised to see Jimin carrying a wooden tray between his hands with porridge and tea in it. They figured it was him who had been cooking a while ago.

Jimin carefully placed the tray beside the table near Jin’s bed and looked at the peacefully sleeping, but pale prince with the black aura still lingering around his body.

He sighed.

He looked next to the three beside him, whom were all waiting for him to speak about his surprise visit when, he noticed the black string of aura from Jin was now latching onto Namjoon and Hoseok’s.

It isn’t as dark yet, nor big as the one from Jin himself but still. He sighed again, because from there he knew, the illness going around the Palace people was really caused by a spell and it’s a no-brainer it was from one of the witches perhaps, from Erebos.

“Was it you, hyung?” asks Taehyung.

“Huh? What do you mean, me?”

“The one that was cooking earlier that smelled so heavenly it reaches to our chambers?”

“Oh,” Jimin’s cheeks flushed, embarassed from the compliment, “Perhaps? Yes, it was I. But I don’t think it smelled that heavenly. I had only cooked a few times in my lifetime.”

My, my, aren’t you too humble, Jimin?

While it was true that he only cooked a few times in his lifetime, including the ones he did when he was still living with his friends outside the Palace, he had always dismissed the fact that he may indeed was a really good cook but who knows? Perhaps it was because of Mr. Bang who taught him so well in cooking that it showed.

“Have you three eaten?” he asks, attempting to change the subject and receiving another unwarranted compliment that will only make him blush.

The three shook their heads in unison.

“Alright, wait for me here. I’ll bring some for you,” says Jimin, deciding to leave the room, however Hoseok stops him before he could, and told him he doesn’t need to, and that they’ll just be the ones to go to the kitchen where he had cooked to save Jimin’s energy by going back and forth. Before they left, he noticed how the black aura didn’t even get to Taehyung, not even a little amount can be seen lingering around the young witch.

Perhaps it was because he had some protection on him that Jimin’s not seeing or perhaps, it was because of the smell of incense lingering on him when Taehyung passed by him before the three went out.

Then, it dawned on Jimin.

Right, right.

Incense. They are used for cleansing, banishing, and protection.

He tried smelling his clothes, to see if there had been any lingering scent of incense that may have perhaps got attached when he was at his library earlier but unfortunately, since he went to brew and cook, the smell of incense got washed away.

He suddenly wonders if Taehyung, a self-made young witch could also see what he sees or if it’s just him. He should ask him later before he goes back to his library.

“Jimin?” he quickly turned his head back upon hearing Jin’s groggy voice, who was now trying to sit up on his bed with a tired smile.

The witch helped him before returning a pitying smile to the Prince. He couldn’t believed that athough Jin had been asleep for hours, he looked like he had run a hundred miles non-stop on how pale and sweaty he’s right now, even when he had just woken up.

If he didn’t saw how well Jin was yesterday before he had fallen ill, he would have thought the Prince had some serious illness.

“Want to eat or drink something, your highness? I prepared some food for you to eat just in case you wake up hungry,” he offers.

“Yes, please,” replied Jin, relieved. Albeit he’s too weak to move, seeing the witch’s smile and kind offering, he suddenly felt hungry.

While Jimin was spoonfeeding Jin, he noticed how the Prince was staring at him that he felt a little bit anxious about it.

“Is there a problem, your highness?”

“No,” he chuckles, “It’s just, I didn’t expect you’ll be the one attending to me. My brother didn’t threaten you or anything to be the one here with me, did he?”

Jimin quickly shook his head.

“No, no! He didn’t. It was my own decision to come here and do all this. Namjoon, Hoseok, and Taehyung were all here earlier, watching you in your sleep, but then they decided to eat the leftovers of the porridge and tea I made. I offered to bring it to them instead but they refused.”

Jin nods.

“I see. I thought my brother might have threatened you again. Don’t be afraid of him, alright? Because if there’s anything you should be afraid of, it will be no one but me. I’m older than you and Yoongi.”

Jimin can’t help but smile at Jin’s silliness although the man himself is sick, he still managed to make the witch’s smile.

“So…”

“Hmm?”

“How was sleeping with my brother, Jimin?”

Jimin’s eyes went wide as saucers from Jin’s bold statement. Good thing he doesn’t have anything in his mouth or he might have choked on it already.

How did their conversation go from innocent worryings to questions that should be behind closed doors?

It’s not like he and Yoongi are doing the deed but still, it embarrasses him. Remembering what Yoongi did to him last night also while he was fake sleeping didn’t helped. It made him blushed more,worse than a tomato.

Jin was quick to noticed Jimin’s reaction and decided to tease him more. Because it was fun, of course.

“Good thing my brother finally decided to take a liking to you instead of sulking still over that bitch of a witch,” Jin snarled.

Jimin’s mouth hanged open, realising how bold Jin’s words really are, especially in dissing another person, which turns out to be Irene, Yoongi’s ex-wife.

He’s sure it was her whom Jin was referring to. It kind of breaks his heart remembering how pitiful Jungkook looks seeing his mother being the reason they were all hurting that time.

Jimin felt the need to clarify his relationship with the King or Jin will get the wrong idea. It’s not like he’s interested for some romance action right now. Not now, at least. The King’s to decide first whether he lives or not after presenting the hourglass to him.

“N-no! Our relationship is nothing like that. Far from what you’re thinking, your highness. Nothing is going on between your brother and I. If there’s anything, we’re just compromising each other. I want to live so I abide to what he wants. The King wants his hourglass and he have me as his captive so, yeah. It determines whether I live or not, for he still thinks I am witch when clearly, I am not. I am just a mere bookkeeper. Plus, if I have to be honest I’m still wondering why I need to be detained in his chamber rather than a regular prison,” rants Jimin.

“But are you not?” Jin took a mental note to interrogate Yoongi one of these days to know why his brother did what he did. Detaining Jimin in his chamber when clearly, he shouldn’t have had, just like what Jimin had said. Because it’s very unlikely, especially as someone who hates the race of witches.

Even when Yoongi was married and in-love at the time to Irene, he and her didn’t share a room except that one time, of course, when they did his nephew, but with Jimin… Jin thinks, he really needs to have a talk with his brother soon.

Jimin was taken aback by Jin’s question.

“Yes! I’m not. I was born mortal in a world where magic does not exists. Only in myths and unless, it’s scientifically proven then anything magic or mythical remains hoax.”

“Even after everything you did the first time we all saw you, and now that you bravely spend time with me, not knowing if this illness of mine is natural or caused by a spell which may harm you too? You still haven’t considered yourself a witch? Perhaps you becoming one ‘magically’ when you were, uh, thrown in our world?”

The witch was at a loss for words. It’s not like he is not considering the possibility of it being true, given the fact that he secretly has magic going on behind closed doors of his library, and the fact that a few strands of his hair, close to his nape went back to orange (not like it’s his natural hair to begin with), but he cannot just claim he inddeed is a witch, especially when his life is still at stake because of Yoongi’s hatred against witches.

“So?”

Jimin shooked his head and smiled, “No. I am a bookkeeper. I can never be a witch. It’s just unreal for me to become one.”

“Why? I do believe that you being a bookkeeper qualifies you to become a witch.” replied Jin, casually, “Do you know how happy you made Taehyung feel that one time you let him accompany you at the arboretum? Even I was surprised, that for someone like you that can be compared to either a scholar or a witch, you didn’t hesitate to share your knowledge to either him or Namjoon which most witches will.”

“Oh,” Jimin was surprised. Taehyung must’ve told them or perhaps Namjoon. He wonders if Yoongi was aware about this too.

“Yes,” Jin agrees, “Witches are known to be soloists, if not selfish, so it is such a rare thing to experience having a witch help a mortal with nothing in return, and to even hear about it, and I can’t thank you enough for doing that. Taehyung might not look like it, but he always feels pressured and sad that it’s all just him teaching himself and there had been a lot of time in which he had failed to be the witch he wants himself and everyone to be, so thank you for making him feel noticed, Jimin. I hope one day, you finally consider being one. You’ll be the second good witch I know apart from Taehyung.”

After he spent a good amount of time with Jin and left him in the care of Jungkook, who immediately visited his uncle after waking up, he decided to see the other Palace people who fell ill. He wants to see if they also have the same black aura that Jin has lingering around his body, to which now he also has a small portion around his arm. If being honest, he is feeling quite a bit uneasy on the part where it is currently attached.

Afternoon came, and news around the Palace about Namjoon and Hoseok getting ill, after watching over Jin last night didn’t surprise Jimin that much. He already knew somehow that they would. Well, theoretically speaking, based from what he had saw earlier that day.

From what he understands, that black aura lingering on them, which by now he believes is caused by a spell, was the one causing the illness going around the Palace. 

Because how come the odd fatigue feeling he felt on his arm, from where he had let the black aura linger to from Jin, went away after he cleansed himself with an incense smoke as soon as he got back in his library?

He is now sitting in his table, pondering, and staring at the finished hourglass he just have to give to Yoongi to hopefully, spare his life if he thinks he is not really a witch judging by how normal it looks, is now thinking that there should be something he should be doing to help stop spread the spell and cause bigger problems if it comes out the Palace and affects the villagers just like his friends’ concern.

Jimin sighed.

He still would not consider himself being a witch (not right now, at least) just like what Jin had told him to do earlier, but he’s a bookkeeper. And bookkeeper helps anyone those in need. Therefore, he has to help and teach Taehyung to the best of his abilities to stop the spread of hex going around the Palace, caused by the witches from Erebos.

Chapter 26

“Where is he?” Yoongi asks, as he checks a stack of scrolls beside him from his unfinished work from yesterday. There had been some that was left unread due to his worrying for his brother’s health last night.

“Jimin-nim? He was seen earlier by some guards from the south wing of the Palace, checking on the first few servants who got sick. Asked them a few questions and left without word. According to them, they were asked by Jimin-nim what they remembered doing before they got ill, what they ate, and if they saw or notice anything unusual.”

The King’s brows furrowed from what he had heard, curious why Jimin went to the other side of the Palace without his permission and did all that he had done. Although, for the past weeks that Jimin had been living in the Palace and leaving without his permission, he shouldn’t have been surprised.

What if he fell ill like his brother? He remembered he and hin are both sharing his chamber at night so of course, he’s worried a little that he might get sick as well and him afterwards, but after awhile he realised he shouldn’t but he can’t help not to.

It’s not like he cares for the witch, no. He can’t. Jimin is a witch. He can’t show him kindness, care, or mercy, just like he have always had been around them, except for Taehyung but perhaps, just for today, he’ll make an exemption for Jimin.

It seemed to him that Jimin’s trying to be subtle on checking whether the issue going on in the Palace was caused by a spell or not. But Yoongi’s sure it is, given how fast it went and only within them.

Luckily, and hopefully, it will not spread out of the Palace yet, not until they find a cure.

“And Taehyung?”

“He hasn’t come out yet from his chamber since earlier after visiting Prince Jin. I heard Prince Jungkook is also with him. Helping him find the cure. Should I fetch the Prince and bring him here?”

Yoongi shook his head, “No. Let Jungkook help Taehyung. He needs to bond with Leuko’s only witch, for the future of our Kingdom, or we will no longer be able to keep up with Erebos’s greed for power if Taehyung decides to leave us too.”

“But how about Jimin-nim?”

“What about him? He made it clear to me and the other that he’s not a witch, and was just a mere bookkeeper.”

“But…” The soldier in front of him looks like he wants to say something, but when the man decided to keep his mouth shut instead of telling Yoongi, the King dismissed him after. Afraid the King might misinterpret what he wants to say about the witch.

Days passed, and the sickness that was initially going around the Palace only, had finally reached the villagers.

Taehyung, who was in his chamber, with Jungkook helping him again, couldn’t help but faced palm in stress. He had been searching for a way to cure the first people who had fallen ill, along with some few healers and scholars who, thankfully, still have not been affected yet by the sickness going around Leukos.

Now, everyone thinks it is not caused by a spell, rather a new type of illness going around Leukos but Jimin, who saw it with his own eyes, thinks it really is caused by a spell. Just like what Jackson told them.

And Jimin, he hurriedly read and thought himself all the basics and what spell was thrown to them by one of the witches from Erebos, how to banish it, and how to return it twice or three times more. To teach the witch who casted the spell a lesson, and to avenge the innocent people who got sick because of it, since the day he left Jin’s chambers. He hadn’t eaten properly since then, but Jimin hopes the work he’d put in, to help the people of Leukos will be worth missing a couple of meals.

He heaves a deep sigh, and almost falls from his seat when he realised that he has not eaten anything yet since last night. Just like he did in the past few days that he stucked himself inside the library with no one bothering him. Aside from Boongi who occasionally visits him just to sit on his lap.

Jimin was supposed to eat last night, he really was. He even sneaked out of the Palace to have dinner with his friends, however as soon as he learned that Minhyun had fallen sick and some of their neighbors, he could not help but ran back to the Palace and continue studying about spells and hexes.

Other people might wonder what took the bookkeeper this long enough to help the people around him, but Jimin wants to make sure that the steps he will do, will work at one try as he cannot afford to cause more hope and trust to be broken if he tries then fails.

Especially when some of the Palace people, specifically the King, still thinks Jimin is a (powerful) witch, regardless on how many times he had tried to clear his label, wants to make sure that he will be able to do his job perfectly not because he’s really a witch, but rather a bookkeeper. A bookkeeper who knows no failure. 

Jimin’s eyes narrowed on one corner of the topic he’s reading on, and wonder if the effects once the spell works to counter the hex is really that harmful on the caster that isn’t well-rounded. He suddenly think of Taehyung. No, he can’t let the young witch’s life be endanger. If anything happens, it must be him who will receive the aftermath.

“Tae,” Jungkook calls, caressing the witch’s back, trying to calm him down.

“Hmm?” he turns to face him with watery eyes, “I’m a failure of a witch, Kook. I can’t even distinguish if this is really a spell or not. Perhaps the healers and scholars were right. Perhaps this is a new sickness.”

The Prince was surprised by what he had heard. He thinks the opposite. Taehyung is the most hardworking and selfless witch he knew. Not that he had already seen a lot of witches in his lifetime but still, call him biased but Taehyung had no right in his opinion to down himself.

“No, you are not! Don’t you dare say that again,” he says, glaring at Taehyung.

“But if I was, I should have been able to treat them already before it could even have the chance to spread outside the Palace whether it is a spell thrown to us or not.”

“Well, even the others who are knowledgeable like you are having a hard time figuring out how to cure this illness going around. Surely, like you, they are working so hard right now to help the sick people. If you think you’re a failure, what more are the scholars and healers of Leukos? They are also like you, eager to help the ones who need their help. Don’t think lowly of yourself, Tae. It hurts me,”

“I’m sorry,” Jungkook was quick to hold his hand out and pull Taehyung to his chest while wiping the tears that spilled from the young witch’s eyes.

“There’s no reason for you to be sorry, Tae. I believe in you. I believe in the others doing their best too to help cure this sickness around Leukos. We believe in all of you.”

Taehyung nods.

“Thank you,” he buries himself more onto the Prince’s chest, finding comfort in him and his kind words, “You’re right. It’s not just me, us , having a hard time figuring out how to cure the sick people, but also the healers and scholars and… wait, how about Jimin hyung? Do you think he is also helping us right now? I haven’t seen him since I hid here to find a cure.”

Jungkook looked at Taehyung, remembering how Jimin is also knowledgeable like the scholars and healers himself. Not to mention that he once showed them how he was able to defeat the witches of Erebos like a ‘real’ witch but just label himself as a bookkeeper. Right, how could he forget?

It only took another glance to Taehyung for them to understand each other without a word, and went out of the room to go to the library where Jimin stays.

However, instead of seeing him, they saw Yoongi instead, sitting at the usual seat of the witch who was nowhere to be found.

“Appa?”

“Glad the two of you finally showed up, or I might have thought of something else other than friends trying to help each other in a room for hours without a break,” Yoongi says, trying to hide a smirk from his teasing amidst the concern going on around Leukos.

Taehyung’s cheeks quickly turned crimson whilst Jungkook had a coughing fit, trying to hide his embarrassment like the witch beside him.

“Your majesty, me and Prince—”

“What are you even doing here, Appa? Shouldn’t you be reading and signing scrolls right at this hour? And where’s Jimin hyung? You didn’t have him put elsewhere, right, or did you?” he asks, trying to divert the focus of his Father from them to Jimin.

“Why will I do that?” Yoongi asks, trying to hide his smile, seeing how Jungkook protects Taehyung from his teasing, “Although I can now, since he’s done with my request and proved how this hourglass was made by hand and not by magic.”

Yoongi admired the hourglass Jimin made for him with his hands. Still wondering how perfectly made and intricate the object was without using magic.

Of course, it isn’t the first time he saw a well-done craft in his life, but no one needs to know that, especially when he is secretly being a little biased with Jimin, not that he is aware himself of what he was doing.

“And how sure are you that Jimin hyung did not even ‘once’ use magic into that hourglass you’re currently holding? I didn’t see you, not even once, check on how hyung did this like you said you were going to.”

“Well, you’re right.” Yoongi agrees, “But now that I think about it, about my condition to him when I requested this hourglass, especially of what is going on right now at the Palace, I’m pretty sure this is the best time for me to decide whether I want to keep another witch or not.”

“What do you mean?” the two asked in unison, intrigued by what the King meant, of what he might have heard or learned about Jimin that others do not know about.

“You just believed awhile ago, based from that hourglass Jimin hyung made you that he’s not a witch. What made you change your mind all of a sudden?” adds Jungkook.

Yoongi rose from his seat with the hourglass still in his hand, “I expect nothing but for you to learn from the said bookkeeper, Taehyung. Until then, just continue honing your knowledge as the witch of Leukos.”

The King left the two behind without another word, with the hourglass Jimin made for him, hugging it next to his chest.

His eyes flashed all of a sudden as he walked back to his chamber. Yoongi stopped as he knew the blob was trying to transmit some realtime ‘action’ to him and he can’t help but to smile. Of course, he knew Jimin may or may have not use magic to the hourglass he made for him but it doesn’t mean he’ll just forget about what Jimin did before. Saving Leukos and the people living in it that he loves. He may hate witches but he can make another exemption besides Taehyung.

He hopes Jimin will accept his plea to stay at the Palace the moment he returns, regardless of how he treated him previously.

This time, he will try to trust another person again just as before. Even if that means it is to trusts a witch whom broke his trust and heart. Perhaps, like Taehyung, like what his friends and brother told him, Jimin is different. Different from Irene. Different from the rest. Perhaps this time… he’s his person. His serendipity .

“Good thing, being a witch in this world is by inheritance and not by choice because surely, this is not who I want to be, nor an occupation I want to have! This is tough work, Boongi!” he complains to the blob, as they helps him carry the bag of lime, salt, rosemary, and candles they bought from the marketplace, to put at the sides of the horse that Jimin may or may not temporarily stole from the Palace’s stables.

Perhaps stole was not the right word as he will be returning this horse soon as they’re back. He just use one for transportation. He just ‘borrowed’ it but with no one aware that he did. What a silly witch, isn’t he?

The materials he needed to banish the hex thrown at them are simple but very useful once they start performing the spell later.

Of course, he is not going to do it alone. He needs another witch to help him, given the amount of people that were already affected by the hex. Plus, he promised to himself he will try to teach Taehyung to the best of his abilities as a bookkeeper to be the ‘witch’ he wanted to be, if Yoongi decides to keep him in the Palace instead of killing him.

However if the King suddenly changes his mind, after teaching Taehyung, he can embrace death with fulfillment knowing that he was able to fulfill his duty as a bookkeeper and his promise to Taehyung.

Jimin quietly returned the horse to its stall and quickly went back inside his library as soon as they returned to the Palace. Luckily, no one saw him or Boongi.

The witch’s body was tired from all the heavy stuff they brought with them but he remembers he doesn’t have much time left. If he wants the banishment to work, he needs to make full use of the full moon. Pretty sure, the witch who put the spell on them might also use it to her advantage to heighten the effects of the hex going around Leukos, and he needs to be quick to counter it along with Taehyung helping him.

“Boongi,” he calls, and the blob immediately wobbled its way to Jimin, “I need Taehyung here. Lead his way to mine.”

Boongi nods, as if understanding the witch’s instructions before leaving to fetch Taehyung. Jimin quickly laid all the materials they needed on the table as he patiently waits for Taehyung to arrive.

He sighed, and looks at the sky that will be soon dark and lit by the moon along with the stars. He held the window frame with such tenderness and closed his eyes as he asked for guidance from the moon, the nature, and most importantly to Mr. Bang in his mind.

“Let’s wake the witch in me tonight, shall we?” he whispers in the air, not noticing how the red bird beside him nods like it’s happy. That it understood what he just said. That finally , it got its request fulfilled for Jimin to acknowledge himself as a witch.

Chapter 27

“Jimin hyung,” chirped Taehyung upon entering the library where the witch resides along with Jungkook and Boongi following behind. Surprised to see the familiar materials lying on the table.

“Oh finally, there you are,” says Jimin, relieved, before glancing up to Jungkook, “I’m glad you’re here too. Me and Taehyung will need your help and we don’t have much time to waste. The moon is about to come out any time soon.”

“What kind of help do you need from me, hyung?” asks Jungkook.

“Do you know by chance all the names of the individuals that fell ill?” of course, the question is absurd. Impossible even for the Prince to know, but Jimin’s taking all the chances they could get. It’s the quickest he can think of instead of handing each candle door-to-door to the affected and innocent victims of the hex.

“I… I can try.”

“ We will try. This is our only chance,“ Jimin nods, trying to convince himself and the two that they will be able to banish the hex from the victims.

Taehyung, who was still learning to be a fully-fledged witch, was late to realised how there’s a lot of the familiar things was laying on Jimin’s table. Especially the candles. The candles were a lot . A lot more than he has in mind that can and should be used in spells.

“I hope this is enough,” exclaimed Jimin, before walking past the table to look for the sewing kit he found recently in the drawer, “I want you to write the names of each individual you know who fell sick. Make sure that as you write their names on the body of the candle, believe that they will be healed. Write their names downward.”

Jungkook nods, determined to help and accepted the needle from Jimin so he could start with his given task.

“Use this needle in carving their names on the body of the candle. Make sure you write their names as clear as possible.”

“Yes, hyung.”

“And please, do not forget to write the name Minhyun on one of the candles. He’s one of my friends who had fallen ill.”

Jungkook didn’t ask anything more to Jimin and starts doing his tasks, whereas Jimin asked Taehyung to help him slice all the limes lying on the table. Like the Prince, Taehyung didn’t bother asking the bookkeeper any questions he had in mind why they had to do all these. He just full on trusts Jimin like Jungkook does to him.

The three was so focused they didn’t noticed how quick they were, now poking the center of each round slices of lime with a candle.

Jimin left Taehyung and Jungkook to finish poking the limes with candles, and starts rummaging one of the empty kitchens there was at the Palace.

He pulled one empty wooden bowl from one of the drawers and began looking for bay leaves. To him, rosemary isn’t enough for what seemingly looks like a simple protection spell. He needs to make sure that the hex thrown at them will be completely remove and no chance of returning.

He also put a handful amount of basil, cinnamon bark, peppercorns and mint into the bowl.

Before leaving, he made sure to bring another big empty bowl with him.

When he returned, the task he left to the two had been long finished. He thanked them and instructed Jungkook on what he needs to do next. The Prince, like earlier just nods and obliges as fast as he can to the task given by the witch. They don’t have much time like what Jimin said, so he needs to hurry and ask the guards for help.

Jimin transferred all the contents from the medium-sized bowl to the large bowl he brought with him back from the kitchen, that was full of familiar ingredients to Taehyung, before adding the bag full of rosemary and handing it over to him.

“Mix it with your hand for me, please,” instructs Jimin, before going back to the same drawer from earlier to get some myrrh resins and frankincense he got from a tree near the Avungrund, where he first met his first friends at Leukos.

At first, he thought those were all just tree saps. The brown honey-looking saps that ants seemed to be drawn by. Only to realised those are incense. Which smoke is much bigger than the stick incense can produce.

From where Jimin came from, stick incense was very common but of course, with the help of his books from his library, he realised that there are also other forms of incense being used in other parts of the world, which led to him using one of those said incense to the impending spell he and Taehyung will be doing minutes from now.

They went at the back of his library where the garden lies, with the materials they need for the spell. The same garden where Yoongi saw him singing and dancing in front of the moon which he wasn’t aware of. The same garden where Yoongi saw him in his dream getting caught on fire and was chill about it.

But who needs to know all that, right? It’s just Yoongi with his seemingly growing adoration towards the witch.

Jimin buried each of the candles with lemon cuts in them on the ground one by one, just enough for the candles to stand on their own even when a gust blew on them.

He then sprinkled the mixed spices from the bowl onto the unlit candles, just enough for the candles to be coated with it before putting the first layer of salt around it, making it look like a circle. Caging the candles along with the ingredients inside it.

Next, he look for a stone for Taehyung to use. Not small, not big, but just enough for the young witch to be able to carve runes onto the ground.

Taehyung’s not able to hide his curiousity on his face when Jimin handed him the stone and was surprised when the older told him the reason. He didn’t know whether to believe what he was hearing. If he was dreaming or not.

Jimin, the mysterious witch er, bookkeeper who saved them from the almost downfall of Leukos once, wants him to carve protection runes. Allowing him, a not well-trained witch to help a seemingly knowledgeable witch to casts what he thinks is a spell to help those that are sick because of a hex cast by one of the witches from Erebos.

With shaky hands, he nods and quickly obliged to Jimin’s task to him. A burst of emotions filling up his body as he complies diligently in carving the protection rune.

Taehyung was so happy he could feel himself crying. Nobody except the non-witch people had accepted him until Jimin came. Jimin who doesn’t mind whether he is a skilled witch or not, talks to him, allows him to accompany him during one of his searches for ingredients to help Hoseok, and now lets him help and carve runes. The trusts Jimin has with him was arguably overwhelming and confusing at the same time.

Was Jimin allowing him to help because he wants to subtly teach the young witch or because he feels pity for him to be even dreaming about becoming a fully-pledge witch just like the natural-born ones? But now was not the time to think of these things, Taehyung thought.

If Jimin wants them, or him to participate, he would gladly do so, for the people who don’t deserve the hex that was thrown at them. Who knows, perhaps some does, but he is not going to think about it now. The goal is to remove the hex that was thrown at them and possibly, to return it to the sender.

Once done from carving runes, Jimin put another layer of salt around, making it look like a legit witch’s circle Taehyung had once or twice seen in his life; the reason why he was fascinated and wanted to be a witch.

Jimin glances up to the moon and he knew, it’s time to start with the spell with the young witch beside him, hoping it will all go well. Well, he does hope it will or their efforts will go to waste.

He hands another bowl over to Taehyung with some myrrh and frankincense on it this time, before lighting it with a match from his cloth pockets. He looks up to Taehyung with a smile before saying, “We will make it. There’s no other way. You can do this with me, don’t you worry. We both got this.”

Taehyung nods with a tight lip, obviously nervous if the spell would work but with Jimin’s words of encouragement he knew, this will work. This should be, right? Like Jimin said, there’s no other way.

Before starting, Jimin made sure to light each of the candles carefully, as he asked for help from the moon shining bright above them, as Taehyung began circling around him with the bowl of incense in hand to cleanse the vicinity.

The red bird from earlier showed itself once again, as if monitoring the two, and sat on one of the tree branches nearby, clucking loudly all of a sudden, enough for Jimin to take it as a sign to start with the spell.

Witch Jimin had locked in. His eyes flashed orange as soon as he opened it from being closed a moment ago, to stare at the moon as the candles burns beautifully.

Although he was surprised and mesmerized from what he saw, Taehyung remains focused onto his task, to keep the incense smoke going around the witch’s circle until it fades. He has one task and that is to make sure their spell will work against the sender.

Jimin starts humming, loud enough for Taehyung to follow, making sure they will gather enough energy and vibration from it to cast the spell.

Meanwhile, Yoongi couldn’t believed he was letting his son, Jungkook, order him around with Boongi in his arms, stopping the blob from getting outside the chambers to be with Jimin, who happened to instruct Jungkook not to let anyone from, or outside the Palace to get out of their homes as they do the spell somewhere where Jimin didn’t tell his son.

Is the king worried for the safety of the two, who are currently outside doing the spell on their own? Of course, he wouldn’t deny that. If only he could, he would sneak out to check on them but Jungkook is making sure his plan will remain just a plan without victory.

“Aren’t you worried about Tae’s safety?” he asks, trying to use the young witch’s to his son to be able to get out of his chamber.

“Of course, I am. But Jimin hyung had asked me not to let anyone strictly be out of their chambers or houses tonight including the guards no matter what happens, until they are finished. We cannot afford their efforts to go to wastes so please, just this once, listen to what he asks us to do.”

Yoongi sighed. Oh how he wished Boongi wasn’t with him, in that way, he could secretly check the two, or mostly Jimin of what’s happening right now with them.

As Jimin waited for Taehyung to finish rounding the salt circle with the candles, now burning bright like a bonfire, he took quite a few deep breathes to stabilize the energy flowing into his body as he tried to remember the incantation he needed to speak with Taehyung for the spell to work effectively. As the last string of smoke from the incense faded into thin air, Jimin motioned his hand for Taehyung to sit across him, letting the young witch breathe a little before they started with the incantation.

Evil eye, hex or curse,

I command you now to disperse.

May their energy and names be free and clear, protected by the love and light that’s near.

May their mind, body and soul be free,

from evil, darkness and misery.

Thus they are now protected, safe and sound,

with this spell, its power unwound.

The incantation was repeated a few times before it finally worked. Before it was finally time for them to rejoiced that their counter spell had broken the hex casted by the witch from Erebos, making the two danced around inside the circle in glee.

Meanwhile, an angry scream was heard from one of the chambers in Erebos.

Hyuna smirked at Nayeon’s, “Guess the wannabe witch won this time around.”

“It can’t be! I always win against Taehyung unless I allowed him to! Plus, this hex I did this time wasn’t just a simple spell.”

“Well, tonight seemed otherwise. Who knows, he probably might have learned something we witches were selfish enough to teach him.”

Nayeon gritted her teeth.

“I don’t believe he only did it by himself. Surely someone was helping him!”

“Who? Who’s gonna help him? We’re all the witches Adios has left. No one would dare want to teach and help that wannabe,” butts Suzy, “Perhaps, it’s time for you to take your study of being a witch seriously. Besides you’re still a beginner in our eyes so it wouldn’t be much of a surprise really, if that wannabe beats you again at something you should be good at.”

Nayeon huffs, annoyed.

“But don’t worry, dear. I’ll fix this mess of yours and make sure to learn from it. Surely, if it’s that wannabe who did it, his body must be extremely tired right now from all that he did and we’ll use that against him as he sleeps tonight,” she adds, smiling to herself.

Chapter 28

“Boongi!” Yoongi and Jungkook yelled in unison, when the blob forcedfully escaped from the King’s hold and ran towards outside the chamber. The King tried to stop Boongi but to no avail.

From what they can see, everything appears to be okay. It was what they and everyone in Leukos thinks when suddenly, the blob noticed something only they could, and began charging towards Yoongi and Jungkook when they tried to stop the blob from getting out, as strictly instructed by Jimin once he and Taehyung starts doing the spell, to make sure no one will be harmed.

But alas, Boongi’s suddenly a rebel tonight.

“What’s with you that you’re not listening to me?” exclaimed Yoongi, obviously mad about Boongi not obeying to his command. He and Jungkook were now running after Boongi, breaking Jimin’s instruction.

The blob had never been like this before. Not even once. It always listens to him. Boongi might be mischievous at times, but not rebellious like this they are at tonight.

Was the spell the two witches were doing affecting the blob in any way?

“Taehyung?” Jungkook muttered, running towards him, forgetting his plan to help Yoongi to catch the blob.

That was when he noticed, as well as Yoongi, that Boongi was trying to get to them. The blob began circling around the two, but it was because Boongi was trying to get Jimin to wake up as Taehyung couldn’t, with all the shrugging he was doing.

Yoongi’s eyes widened.

He suddenly felt numb seeing Jimin’s state. He quickly looked around to get an idea of what was going on, and sure enough he saw what he needed to see, that could have had possibly caused for Jimin to be lying unconscious on the ground with Taehyung trying to wake him up.

The King had to closed his eyes for a bit, to stop whatever negative thougts his head was trying to mocked him for.

See? I was right .

His hunch was right all along and never did he once tried to change his mind about it.

Perhaps, bookkeeper was the term witches Jimin has in ‘his’ world, where he came from but perhaps not. Seeing how Jimin knew what a witch does. Perhaps he just don’t want to acknowledge himself being a witch.

Jimin is a witch no matter how the other tried to denies it. No matter how he claims he is a bookkeeper. Yoongi knows and yet, why doesn’t he feel mad about it?

He hates the race of witches but why? Was it because he gets along with Taehyung? But Taehyung’s not even a true-blood witch. Was it because Jungkook trusts Jimin? How about Jin? Namjoon and Hoseok? Is that it? Is that why, he can’t put himself to be mad at Jimin because he gets along with them and the villagers? But that doesn’t change the fact that he is a witch! And witches, they are good at manipulating anyone to get what they want, based from his experience, and yet why can’t he bring himself to hate him?

“What happened?” he asks, urgent, trying to remain his composure by looking unaffected but the inner him says otherwise. Jimin doesn’t look right. His state reminded him of someone from his younger years and it scares him to see Jimin like this.

“I… I don’t know! He… we were just rejoicing our victory when Jimin hyung suddenly passed out! His body is warm but his heart beat coming from his wrist…” the two were surprised when Yoongi without another word from Taehyung, hurriedly carried Jimin in his arms to get him back to their chamber.

On the otherhand, Boongi, who were following the three, noticed the red bird that had been following the witch for awhile now, sitting on top of the tree, body unmoving but eyes were following Yoongi, who was frantically carrying Jimin in his arms.

The blob almost stop mid-track to knock the bird off of the tree, as it seemed fascinated seeing the bird’s eyes flashing and awake at night but didn’t, when its attention went back to Yoongi upon heard its master shouting names for assistance. Boongi hurriedly ran back beside Yoongi and held Jimin’s one seemingly cold hand.

“Hyung! What happened? I heard you calling my name! I know you said not to come outside no matter what but I heard your voice and it sounds so important!” exclaimed Namjoon, rambling with his words as soon he get to Yoongi’s chambers, with two Palace’s healers following him and Jin. Seconds past, Hoseok followed with a few Palace guards with him. Everyone was worried and catching their breath due to Yoongi’s reaction because of Jimin.

“Hyung! What happened? I heard you yelling! Was there a thief?” asks Hoseok, panting. Yoongi had to pinch the bridge of his nose due to the alarm his yelling had caused. But then we’re talking about Jimin here so maybe not.

“Everything’s fi—”

“Is that Jimin? What happened to him?” Hoseok’s eyes widened upon seeing the pale, unconscious Jimin lying on their King’s bed.

Yoongi sighed heavily, and tries to continue what he was saying earlier, when he noticed one of the two healers, checking on Jimin shared a look and was silently deciding who from them will break the word to the King.

“How is he?” Jin asks. Surprisingly Jin and the others who fell ill the past few weeks/days were all back to normal. Like they didn’t get sick at all and the Prince thinks it has something to do with Taehyung and Jimin being together. More like why Jimin’s now lying onto his brother’s bed, unconscious. He noticed how the two healers were warily looking at Yoongi. He’s hoping that whatever news they have with them after checking Jimin is not something bad that will make the King mad.

Yoongi’s short-tempered, especially when it’s something his brother’s vulnerable of, and right now, as he looks at Jimin, it reminds him of something from their childhood years. Something Yoongi doesn’t like remembering from his past.

“Your highness, Jimin, the bookkeeper, I’m afraid he is currently fighting for his life right now,”

It was dead silent the moment one of the healers finally released the news to them.

Everyone who was in the room, all eyes turned to Jimin, shocked from what they have heard from the healers whereas Yoongi’s heart dropped in an instant to the ground.

No!

No! It can’t be!

This can’t be happening again.

Jimin’s a witch. A bookkeeper, or whatever. He’s strong. He had already proven that from before.

No! He refused to believe whatever he just had heard from the healers.

There must be a mistake somewhere.

He knew he shouldn’t be worrying about Jimin, or show any concern towards him. But why? Why is he being like this? Why was the news from the healers makes him feel like this? Was it because of a familiar feeling from before that he thought had already been long forgotten was still there?

His hand turns into a fists. Knuckles turning white from the pressure he’s putting on it.

“What are you talking about? He was just doing alright awhile ago. We were doing just fine! What do you mean?” Taehyung tries not to cry infront of everyone. Like the King, he doesn not want to believe what he just had heard from the healers.

It can’t be! He will not accept it. Jimin, like he just said, was doing just alright earlier. He didn’t see, or feel anything out of the blue that was happening to him or Jimin.

Except if there was really something going on already with Jimin that he wasn’t able to notice because the bookkeeper was good at not showing it.

“Taehyung’s right! He’s a witch for Aidios’s sake! Since when did a witch fell ill just because of their own spells!” Yoongi angrily exclaimed.

Exactly! Jimin can’t be. He won’t allow nor accept it this absurd news from the healers. Not when Jimin had just proven himself to everyone that he is indeed a witch, not just a bookkeeper. Even if Jimin himself reiterate a hundred times that he’s not a witch.

And although Yoongi may have had threatened him previously that he’ll kill him the moment he proved to everyone that Jimin’s a witch, the thought of him dying right now suffocates Yoongi, that he had failed to notice how everyone’s eyes are on him now, not until he felt Boongi tugging his wrists, trying to loosen his fists.

“This is unbelievable! You can’t just die on me just because of that spell!” he yelled to an unconscious Jimin, before heading out of his chamber, leaving everyone behind.

Boongi, who remained with the others, walked towards Jimin and wrapped one of its tentacle to one of his arm, like a baby trying to feel its mother’s warmth but alas, it was the opposite that the blob felt.

While everyone was trying to be hopeful that the witch will survive, Jimin himself seemed to have woken up from a dream.

Or, was it really just a dream?

“Jimin,” a familiar voice across the room woke him up from his sleep, causing the book that he has on his hands to almost slip from his hold, but he was quick to keep it in place before it could even fall to the ground.

Jimin groggily looks around. This place seemed familiar to him. Very. He was unsure of what he was seeing is even real to begin with. But everything seemed and feels real to him, just like the book that he was holding, his clothes that he was used to, before it became a Hanbok upon arriving to Aidios. What the hell is happening?

But then… nevermind .

He is home!

He’s finally home.

This is where he belongs. Here, in this place, this timeline, here where he’s in now.

“Mr. Bang?” he carefully replied. Afraid this is all just a dream.

“What are you doing here, Jiminnie?” the old man walked up to him and greets him with his signature warm smile, tilting his head on the side wondering why Jimin is looking at him like the young man was about to cry.

Or maybe he knows.

“Mr. Bang!” Jimin ran towards his butler, with the forgotten book now laying on the ground and he greets him with a big, tight hug. Tears running down his cheeks.

No, this can’t be just a dream! This feeling… everything feels so real. I can feel it! Mr. Bang is here! Seeing him dying in my arms must have been just a bad dream of mine. It’s not real! Aidios is not real, he tells himself.

“There, there,” says Mr. Bang, caressing Jimin’s back, to stop him from his crying. A sad smile plastering on his lips accompanied with a deep sighed. Oh how he wishes Jimin’s thoughts were true.

“Just for a while, Jimin.” he whispered.

“Huh? What did you say, Mr. Bang?” Jimin asks, sniffing.

The butler just shook his head, heart breaking just by seeing Jimin’s longing for him. Of course, he understands. He was more than just a butler to his eyes. He was his family, his only family but the witch does not belong here. Well, atleast for now.

“Why are you here, Jimin?”

“I— uh, I don’t know. Why?” Jimin replied, curious why a question like that was asked to him by his butler.

Is there something that he was supposed to do? Or be at?

It’s not like he’s forgetting that he needs to be somewhere right now er, today, right?

“Are you not forgetting something? You sure?” Mr. Bang tries again.

“Uhm, no? I don’t think so?” of course, it was a lie. He remembers everything that had happened before he woke up from his ‘dream’. Here, in his big, old library that he owns but of course, he is not going to tell that to Mr. Bang as Aidios for him was just a dream and everything that had happened before he got into that place. None of it was real , he tells himself. No one from the place, from that dream will miss him ,or so he tries to tell himself. Yeah, right.

Mr. Bangs nods.

“Then, shall we?”

“Where?”

“To the theatre room. I thought we’re gonna watch a movie like you said we were?”

“Oh, right! What are we going to watch again?”

“You said you wanted to watch a movie about witches.”

Jimin’s eyes widened in surprise (what a coincidence!) but then frowned afterwards.

“Can we just watch a different one, please?”

“What about?”

“I don’t know. Whatever series or movie that’s just got released. Anything but witches.”

Mr. Bang nods again, and just before Jimin could enter the theatre room, he asks the young man again. To remind him of something that he’s forgetting or trying to, at least is what he thinks the young was doing.

“You sure you’re really not forgetting anything, Jimin?”

Jimin looks at Mr. Bang confused. This was the second time he asked him if he was forgetting anything and he tries to set aside his dream about Aidios and the people in it because again, none of it was real , he tries to repeatedly tells himself inorder not to feel the guilt slowly creeping in his chest.

Mr. Bang hums in response.

“Then, perhaps just little more while with you won’t hurt,” he mutters to himself, afraid that the young might crash out once he finds out about the truth of this ‘dream’ of his with his butler in it.

“What was that, Mr. Bang?”

“Nothing,” he answered with a warm smile.

Chapter 29

“Don’t worry, hyung. I’m sure Jimin will wake up soon,” says Hoseok, a bit enthusiastic, given Jimin’s condition. He stood beside Yoongi across the library where Jimin had been lounging himself since he starts living in the Palace as Yoongi’s captive.

The King was caught off guard by Hoseok’s sudden appearance. He thought no one will be around Jimin’s library at this time. Perhaps it was because of the burning torch outside, making everyone know somebody is inside the library and with Jimin still unconscious, perhaps Hoseok wondered who could it be that was inside the library.

Yoongi came to the conclusion that perhaps, the once abandoned library can now be called as Jimin’s, seeing he’s the only one that was able to stay here for hours without being bothered by the library’s presence. He wonders why the library doesn’t feel the same as before although, right now, the library feels empty but not eerie or sad.

It was already late in the evening. Everyone was already resting in their respective chambers, but perhaps not Hoseok. He’s the General anyway, so it was natural for him to be awake around this hour, along with the other Palace guards.

Yoongi cleared his throat, trying to maintain his ‘calm and unbothered’ composure. Hoseok just smiled and pretended he didn’t noticed what the other was doing.

“As he should! That’s my bed he’s laying on for Aidios sake! I haven’t been able to sleep properly for days now. My body had been sore since, and I’m not even joking about it! I think I’ll have Jin call a masseur for me.”

Hoseok smirks, but pities Yoongi too.

However, he thinks it’s mostly Yoongi’s fault why he hadn’t been able to sleep well for days now. Even Jin, was surprised to hear that his brother, the King himself, decided to sleep on the ground with only a mattress and few pillows on, beside his ‘real’ bed in his chamber, where Jimin lies, still unconscious with Boongi who somehow keeps him warm day and night.

Honestly, it wasn’t on their ‘to-do’ lists the King himself will do. When asked why Yoongi did it, his answer was (only) because he needs to make sure Jimin isn’t pulling some type of tricks towards them, pretending he is in the verge of dead and not trying to run away again for what, the second time, perhaps? It was, as if, Jimin had never tried escaping from the Palace in the first place when he has the chance but always fails to do so, seeing how he still comes back to his chambers at night.

The King has also stopped working and going to his study room and temporarily moved all his work to his chambers instead to watch over the witch 24/7, making sure he’ll be the first one to know once Jimin wakes up. Hoseok wonders what the other will think once he finds out about the King’s craziness. To him, it’s like Yoongi’s protective, er, possessive over the young, which was unusual given the fact that Yoongi and Jimin always bicker.

Man, he remembers how Jimin looks so scared when Yoongi held him as captive. He doesn’t look like the powerful, confident and unbothered ‘witch’ at all, that saved them from falling on the hand of Erebos.

That was exactly why he hid himself away from everyone’s eyes. Especially to Yoongi. But the King doesn’t seem to get the fact that Jimin was trying to put Yoongi on arms length to save his own life, seeing how the King loves to break whatever wall the bookkeeper was trying to put between them.

Hoseok laughs to himself in his head. Jimin and Yoongi, they seemed to have this ‘weird’ kind of relationship going on between them.

He wonders when it’ll start to ‘bloom’, or if its already blooming without any of them knowing. What Hoseok was sure of though was, he had never seen Yoongi as clingy as this with Jimin. Not with Irene, who was his ‘first love’ or whatever, or any of the woman who tried wooing the King.

Perhaps the King himself may have had noticed his odd behavior with Jimin already, or perhaps not. Who knows? And it doesn’t seem like Jimin’s that type of witch who will put a spell onto their King to get whatever favor he wants to get from him, seeing how Jimin always try not to get himself attached to anyone that’s living in the Palace. Just doing ‘things’ to help them, but that’s it. Perhaps, it was an automatic response from him being a bookkeeper in his previous life.

“But,”

“…”

“.. But do you think the reason why Jimin’s still there on your bed, lying unconscious was because… I mean, the spell he and Taehyung did work, yes? We were cured from what they did, but what if , it was also the reason behind why he’s fighting for his life, just like what the healers said he was? What if the spell took a toll on his body and, you know…”

“Then, why was Taehyung not affected? They both did the spell. How come it was only him unconscious right now, hmm?”

Hoseok silently gulped in fear when he saw Yoongi’s subtle, but not-so-subtle anger.

The King’s really ‘something’ else with Jimin.

“He probably did something. Perhaps before or during, might be after they performed the spell without Taehyung knowing, I don’t know, hyung! What I do now is, between him and Taehyung, Jimin knew what he was doing and I’m sure both of us knew it,”

“Perhaps he knew what was going to happen, in exchange of healing us who had fallen ill from the hex. How strong or how bad it’ll be so, perhaps he did something to lessen the effect to Taehyung. Perhaps he did something so he won’t be affected at all. We all knew he’s a beginner witch anyway, and Jimin… he is a bookkeeper. He knew what’s going to happen if they proceed and perhaps, he did not want the both of them, or rather just Taehyung to be the one in the position he’s in right now because he’s not as rounded as Jimin is with spells.”

Yoongi clenched his jaw.

“So instead, he embraced the idea of being the one unconscious and fighting for his life, all because he wants to heal everyone from the hex, even when he doesn’t have to. So now, here we are.”

“None of us knows when he’s going to wake up, or if he will still wake up as his body’s gradually weakening as the day goes by,” exclaimed Yoongi, being the one to say the words Hoseok can’t bear to say directly.

“What’s the spell they did anyway? Do you know? Did Taehyung told any of you?”

Hoseok nods.

“From what Taehyung knew, it was just a combination of sickness and protection spell but Jimin’s way of doing it was ‘different’ from the rest of the witches. He said it was very different as he had never seen that kind of approach before. Perhaps because there’s a lot of people that was sick at the time, he wasn’t sure. He said even the incantation they spoke wasn’t in the books that he has, or that Irene has in her old library, when he tried to checked it the other day.”

Yoongi sighed deeply, before excusing himself from his and Hoseok’s conversation.

The King tries to avoid blaming Taehyung being inexperienced as a witch. In reality, he was thankful for him for staying with them at the Palace and continue learning to be one, even with his little knowledge and materials the Palace could offer. Even when he’s not a ‘true’ witch that the Erebos witches reminds the younger every opportunity they could. Despite the fact that most of the time, before Jimin came, his spells had been pretty much a failure. Still he didn’t give up and leave them behind.

But he can’t help not to think that if only , Taehyung knew what kind of tweak Jimin did on the spells they did, Jimin wouldn’t end up lying unconscious on his bed for days now, not knowing truly when or if he will still wake up.

He quickly shook his head when a familiar event was trying to get through him. Trying to make him mad. More vulnerable. More unforgiving of the witches because he can’t. He has Taehyung, and now he has Jimin. Well, barely. The idea of Jimin dying sickens him even when at first, he was really considering of killing him just like he did with the witches before him if he can’t get any use of him in the Palace.

Truthfully, he was thankful that the two were able to cure the people of Leukos from the illness they unjustifiedly received from the Erebos witches, as expected, having someone like Jimin. He was grateful to realised that although he always threaten and bicker with Jimin, he still managed to help them. To let Taehyung accompany him, and perhaps not doubt the younger’s ability.

In his mind, Yoongi was already planning to annoy Jimin a bit more after proving to him and to everyone that, indeed, Jimin’s a witch not a bookkeeper that they’d been constantly arguing about. And yet, instead of killing him, was wanting to accept Jimin. Slowly trying to overcome his madness with witches. To try to trust another of their kind and yet, this happened.

Now, Yoongi isn’t sure why this has to happen. The thing is, it had been hard for him to accept new people, more importantly a witch. Especially near him, and when he decided he will try to befriend a witch not just because of the things Jimin could provide to them, Aidios took that chance away from him.

Like Aidios was punishing him from what he had done before. It’s not like he wants to do what he did in the first place, but it also was not like he will change his decision either way so it wasn’t a surprise when he saw Jimin on his bed, unmoving, healers nervously looking at each other, hesitant to say a word to him.

The past haunts him like a cold bucket of water from winter being ceremoniously poured over his head, unforgiving.

It was like he was being reminded of the past, but more painful this time. He wish this is all just temporary. That Jimin is just dreaming. That he will wake up soon and annoy him once again which of course, Yoongi initially started, because right now, he thinks he needs to have an orange witch by his side a little longer than he expects them be together.

On the seventh day, Jimin was still unconscious. And there awaits at the Palace gates was his friends. It wasn’t like someone told them what happened to their friend but it was weird to them that Jimin hasn’t even visited nor give them a quick wave at their workplace that he usually does everytime he’s out of the Palace. So it was only natural for them to worry about their friend.

“Palace witch!” whisper-shouts Minhyun after spotting Taehyung walking nearby, not far from them and wanting to get anyone else’s attention aside from the young witch, they think Jimin is friends with.

“Hey, I told you to call him Taehyung-nim! Not palace witch! Are you trying to get our heads hang?” Jackson scolds Minhyun, while Jae can’t help but giggle to his friends silly fight.

Fortunately, Taehyung was quick to realised who they were after seeing their faces.

He couldn’t contain the happiness he felt seeing Jimin’s friends and realising they are good people just like him, to check on Jimin when he haven’t been out of the Palace for a few days now.

But would he let them know what happened to their friend? Will they care more? Worry? Will they blame them? Him? For not taking good care of Jimin?

“See! I told you there’s nothing to worry about. If he’s friends with Jimin, surely he’s a good person!” Minhyun defends to Jackson before facing Taehyung again, “Hi, Taehyung-nim! Is everything okay in the Palace right now? We haven’t seen Jimin for a few days now. He didn’t caught the illness running around these past few days, right?”

“Uh, he…” he looks at Jimin’s friends, wondering if it’s the right thing to do, to lie to them about the witch’s well-being but in the end, he cannot. Jimin had been nothing but welcoming and kind to them, especially him to him, when all witches had turn their backs on him for not being a ‘real’ witch.

Plus, his conscience is eating him. What if Jimin decides not to continue living, knowing the King, perhaps might kill him anyway right after proving to him and everyone that he’s not just a ‘bookkeeper’ but a witch as well?

How will the people of Leukos know it was mainly him who cured them? To save them from dying? Jimin doesn’t deserve to be forgotten. They haven’t even thank him properly yet for the help he did to them.

Jimin’s friends doesn’t deserve not to know what happened to him. Even if they become mad and blame them or mostly him, he will accept it. They deserve to know the truth.

Just as he was about to asks them to join him inside the Palace, Jin beats him to it.

Taehyung failed to notice the Prince’s presence until the three greeted him with a bow and Jin, being himself, was pleased with a smile written on his lips and without a second thought, invited them to come inside and visit Jimin. Something that Taehyung is sure Yoongi will disapprove if he was with them. Luckily, the King was out of sight right now, especially in his chamber, where the King had been lounging in since that night.

They were about to join them when Jae noticed Balam and Sera not far from them, waving and walking towards them, not noticing Taehyung and Jin’s presence.

Balam declined the offer when Jin offered her and her granddaughter to join, thinking it was too much of an offer but when he heard the Prince telling them that it’ll be best to have all of them to visit Jimin without telling them the witch’s true state, Balam had the hunch that it really might be worth joining them.

“Jimin hyung!” Jae excitedly greets, as soon as they went in the King’s chamber, thinking it was Jimin’s and was amazed how big it was and comfortable his living condition is.

A bit envious of course, but they agreed Jimin deserved it, to live in the Palace. He’s good looking, a well-versed and kind person. However the moment they all realised Jimin wasn’t just sleeping, they all looked at Jin and Taehyung in unison. Worry bubbling up for their friend’s state.

“What happened to him?” Jackson asks, getting on Jimin’s side to feel his hand.

“He got sick, did he?”

Taehyung shook his head which confused his friends.

“Then why is his hands cold then? His face pale? Surely, he got the sickness running around the Palace a few days before, right?”

“And why is his breathing uneven? As far as I remember, sick people breath deeply not uneven,” Minhyun adds.

“Is Jimin hyung going to be okay?” Sera asks the important question, hurriedly getting to the other side to caress Jimin’s forehead.

Jin and Taehyhung looks at each other before responding a quiet “We don’t know,” which angered Jackson.

“How come you don’t know? You have access to all the good healers Leukos has! You even have the scholars here to help cure him! How come you don’t know when he’s going to be okay?”

“Jackson,” Balam warned.

“But…”

“I understand you’re worried about Jimin’s state but it’ll be unfair for you to put the blame to them. They did nothing to Jimin. Rather it was Jimin himself or perhaps, what he and Taehyung did that made him fell to this kind of state. They were the ones who get rid of the illness that ran around for days done by Erebos witches. Am I right, your highness?” exclaimed Balam, pausing to glance at Jimin before continuing, surprising Jin and Taehyung a bit.

Did Balam knew what or who Jimin really was, even before Jungkook figured that he, infact was the orange witch who had helped Leukos to win against Erebos?

“We don’t know if Jimin himself was aware this was going to happen to him when he countered their hex. Perhaps he knew. Perhaps not. None of us will know unless Jimin’s the one to tell us. The only thing we can do right now is to keep our trust in Jimin that he will come back to us. It might be selfish to say, but we need him back because we just simply need him to be here, not because of what help he can contribute to Leukos or to our beloved King Yoongi.”

Jackson and Minhyun shared a look.

“What do you mean, Halmeoni?” it’s not like they don’t have an idea what she was talking about, but they need to confirm if what they were thinking was exactly what Balam said.

“Hyungs! Jimin hyung was that orange witch who had helped to win against Erebos! He, primarily, may have been the one too who cured you, Minhyung hyung, and the rest of the people outside the Palace who mysteriously got sick. Didn’t you notice how it ‘magically’ went away after that night?”

Jae turns to look at Jackson.

“Do you remember how Jimin hyung had reacted when he heard Minhyun hyung got sick that night when he was supposed to have dinner with us? He quickly cancelled his plan to eat with us and excused himself, telling us that he needs to do something important and to keep an eye on Minhyung hyung and to everyone while he works. He didn’t tell us what kind of work he needs to do that night, but it was obvious that Jimin hyung can’t just sit and watch us, especially a friend of him get sick and do nothing.”

“And look, I think hyung’s hair’s slowly turning back to its authentic form. We can now see a few hair strands of orange mixed with his coal black hair, and we all know how rare it is to have a different hair color other than black. Even the Erebos witches, no matter how powerful they think they are, and how well-rounded they are with spells, can’t change their hair to be like his or our King. It’s exactly the same colour as the witch that had helped us that night, the first time we all saw him.” Jae exclaimed, jutting his lips and trying not to cry, “For all I know based on what I see now, Jimin hyung might have taken the big blow when he and Taehyung-nim did the spell to cure the sick and that was why he ended up like this!”

Jae could no longer hold his tears back and cry his heart out, hugging Jimin’s waist like the witch is a close relative of his.

Well, it wasn’t a secret to them that Jae had always been treated like a younger brother by Jimin and vise versa. Jae saw Jimin as his lovely older brother besides Jackson and Minhyun, but they were more on the tough and rough side so to say. Jimin has this motherly side about him that Jae loves.

“H-how… since when did you figured?”

“It was really easy to notice but unlike you two, I didn’t brushed aside the fact that perhaps, Jimin hyung’s not a performer like he said he was but instead a witch. There was a lot of things that he does that was unusual. I knew I should have told you, forced you to listen to me about this but I couldn’t bring myself to. Jimin hyung had nothing but kind to us.”

“He took such good care of us, even our neighbors, when he was still living with us, that I noticed no one had gotten sick the whole time he’s with us when we usually already should have been. And when we think that he was doing something odd, he will just laugh it off and tell us to wait for the outcome and he always ends up being right, never been wrong.”

“It’s always been obvious from the start that Jimin hyung was that witch. Remember the first time we met him at the Avgrund?”

Jin and Taehyung looks at each other.

“You first met him where?” asks Jin.

“At the Avgrund,” Minhyun replied, “It was a few days after the battle with Erebos. While everyone was recovering to what we had just faced. It was almost to sunrise then. It was really surprising how calm the Avgrund was at the time, even with Jimin being on its body and telling us that he was looking for a fish.” he smirks a little to himself before continuing, “But we all knew how Avgrund had never produced any living being since then that King Yoongi started killing witches. That ocean had never been but aggressive. Living up to its role as the barrier between two Kingdoms who do nothing but battle.”

Jackson nods.

“Jae’s right. We should have had realised by then. Ever since Jimin had started living with us, we noticed how quiet he was most of the times. Observing everything and anything so he could better understand Aidios and Leukos, including Erebos. Like he was not born and raised in this world.”

Jae sniffed, wipping off his runny mucus from his nose like a child, “I want Jimin hyung back! Please, help him and cure like he did to us. I want him back, please!”

“Jae hyung’s right. I missed Jimin hyung too! I missed talking to him and playing with him too. He still also have some stories that he’s meaning to tell me that he promised me he would.” Sera adds.

Seeing Sera and Jae, the youngest people in the room crying makes everyone’s heart ache, even the ones that were outside the chamber hearing their pleas, including the King himself was moved.

However it doesn’t mean he’s not glaring how Jae was hugging Jimin like’s his lover or something. He gets he’s close with Jimin but really? Does he have to hug him like that? Sera’s not a big deal of course, because she’s a little girl who perhaps thinks Jimin’s like her older brother or so, but with Jae…

He sighs.

“We’re doing everything we can. Really. We also want him back,” says Jin, wipping off the tear from his eyes.

“Instead of just keeping our hopes up for Jimin to wake up soon, we also need to put our utmost trust to him. That he will come back to us because he wants to. Even if all the healers and scholars combined, if Jimin himself do not wish to come back, he will not. Let’s all hope that him being unconscious right now is just the effects of what he and Taehyung did.”

“Otherwise it’ll be hard for Taehyung himself to counter the spell alone if there’s another hex underlying to what made Jimin this state that we are unaware of. That perhaps he’s silently battling of.”

“What do you mean, Halmeoni?” asks Jackson.

Balam turns to looked at Jin. The Prince’s breath hitched upon realising what she meant. Why of course, he hadn’t thought of that. This, with Jimin, had been very familiar. Perhaps it was the reason why Yoongi got upset and decided to be with an unconscious Jimin 24/7, with no guarantee of him waking up anytime soon.

Yoongi, who remained outside his chamber, listening to the conversation, with Hoseok and Namjoon beside him, can’t help but to clenches his fists. In an attempt not to barge in and interrupt their conversation and tell everyone to get lost.

“Let’s just hope that I may be wrong, but given that it’s been days since everyone had been cured from the hex and him lying unconscious here, I’m pretty sure he’d been dreaming since then. Let’s hope he isn’t dreaming of someone that’s really dear to him otherwise we had already lost him even before the battle had even started.”

Jae’s eyes widened.

“Bang nim!”

“Who?”

“Bang nim! The one who took care of Jimin hyung since he was little! He’s the only person I believed hyung will listen to if he’s dreaming about him now.”

“Then let’s all wish Bang nim to enlighten Jimin that we all need him back to us. May he show us friends of Jimin some mercy.”

Chapter 30

Reach into the chasm

To find yourself within

Tell the young to be brave

And when they shall begin

To venture alone

Hold onto what you can let go

Jimin woke up from a familiar voice singing a song to him and that was when he fully realised, that was Mr. Bang whisper-singing to him as he caressed Jimin’s hair.

He have no idea when and how he fell asleep but perhaps the movie they had watched bored the hell out of him and the last thing he wants to do rather than asking his butler to change the movie midway was to just continue watching it until he falls asleep, which he did.

He pressed his head against Mr. Bang’s thigh as deep as he can, if that is even possible, allowing for the butler to know that Jimin was already awake. He smiled softly at him even when the young one wasn’t aware of it.

“Have you slept well, my dear?”

Jimin nods.

“I’m hungry,” he murmured, pouting.

“There’s nothing to cook,”

“What do you mean? We never ran out of food,” replied Jimin, surprised what his butler had just told him. It’s true though. They never ran out of food. Mr. Bang always makes sure there’s food always in stock and ready for them to eat.

Surely, Mr. Bang’s just kidding, right?

“We just did.”

“What?” Jimin rose and looks at him, “You’re not kidding me, are you?”

Mr. Bang shook his head.

Uh-oh.

Jimin sighed. Perhaps Mr. Bang was so tired and forgot that there’s no more food for them to eat. He’ll just ask him to join him do the grocery later. He’ll just have to prepare first before they go out. It’s not a big of a deal that this is the first time this happened. It’s not like Mr. Bang is getting younger anyways. He giggles at the thought of it.

“Let’s go to the grocery then! I’ll just wash my face and change my clothes, yeah?”

Mr. Bang shook his head with a chuckle.

“Did I say something funny?”

“You were never a fan of the outside world, Jimin but today you seem enthusiastic to go out. I wonder if something happened while I was away,”

“Nothing much. As you can see, I was taking my nap when you found me in the library. Change can be good sometimes.”

“I know, and it suits you. I wish I was there to see it first hand.”

Jimin’s smiling face quickly turns to a frown.

Why does he speak to me like he’s not real right now? Jimin asked himself.

It can’t be that he’s dreaming, right?

Oh, if Jimin only realised from the beginning, but where’s the fun in that?

“Anyways, I’m going to prepare now, okay? I’ll just be quick!” he says before running out of the theatre room, leaving Mr. Bang with a heavy sighed escaping his lips.

The more Jimin stays, the more it is hard to make him go back but Mr. Bang knows better. Jimin does not belong here.

He is destined to be in a place where he can hone and spread his knowledge and to be love by the people around him not just him.

Jimin deserves what he wasn’t able to experience in his previous life. He now got people who truly misses him and needs him, not just him. Jimin is not alone anymore and will never be alone even if he is not with him. He has faith to Jimin’s fate.

Meanwhile, Yoongi was softly caressing Jimin’s face with his hands. Hoping the heat coming from his palm will warm his seemingly cold, unconscious state. He sighs.

Jimin had become much paler now than he previously was. The King doesn’t understand what’s taking Jimin to wake up.

He can’t shrug the idea Balam said earlier that day, that perhaps, like the healers said to them before, Jimin’s truly fighting for his life right now. Not just because this was caused by the after effects of the spell he and Taehyung did. That perhaps, history is repeating itself. That it must have been his reason why he decided to be with Jimin and check on him personally when he could have just ignore or have his servants do it for him. Because it reminded him of the past.

Jimin’s now on his seventh day of ‘sleeping’. A regular mortal, not even a true-blood witch can surpass more than five days of being unconscious. It’ll only take three days before one could declare that the person has died. Just like what happened to his Eomma.

But Jimin, even with jaggered breathing, is still giving them hope that he will live.

Well, he probably might as well, as the King by now is going crazy. Asking for a miracle to happen, which is something that even Yoongi himself didn’t see himself doing except for his Eomma, especially to someone he considered once an enemy. Again and again, he truly hates the witches but perhaps, not Taehyung and Jimin. Not them.

“Can you even hear me talking while you’re here, sleeping like a princess than a Prince or a King like I would?”

“Do you really like my bed that much? Was it that soft that you keep pretending to be asleep or was it my scent that you like so much? Perhaps me being a little nice to you? Tell me,” he says, talking to the witch like he’s going to answer him.

Yoongi chuckles.

Well, yeah. He might as well really be going crazy doing all these just for him to wake up and banter with him like they usually do.

Yoongi unconsciously snuggled his head towards Jimin’s neck, smelling him.

Fuck, it’s been days and yet Jimin smelled like tangerine, honey and flowers. He hasn’t had a proper bath since just partial and yet, his smell comforts Yoongi in some way.

He can’t help not to blushed by the inappropriate thought that suddenly got into his head. Fuck.

A skin so soft and smell so nice. Fuck it.

He gulped and try to think of something that will ruin his horniness against Jimin. Luckily, there really was something to ruin the moment.

He remembered how Jae latched himself onto Jimin. Between him and Sera, and his other two male friends, he was the one that really had a hard time letting go of Jimin earlier and he hates it for someone.

Something’s telling him it couldn’t be just brotherly affection. Even Jungkook who heard about it during dinner made a comment about it. That perhaps, Jae’s confused and is not just seeing Jimin just a friend or someone he looks up to.

He absentmindedly hold on to Jimin’s waist a little too hard. Jimin didn’t react thou.

“There’s no way I’m letting you live outside the Palace, back to your friends house ever again.” he uttered, annoyed.

He went back staring at Jimin’s face again.

“Will you wake up if I kiss you on your lips just like one of the stories you once told Boongi that you thought only he was able to hear?” Yoongi can’t help not to hide his mischievous grin as he asks an unconscious Jimin that question.

The king can’t help not to licked his lips as he stares at the witch’s lips far too long than he did with Irene’s.

It isn’t like he wants to pry Jimin’s privacy but sometimes he was just curious of what he’s like when he is by himself. Luckily, everytime Yoongi will check up on either Boongi or Jimin, he hasn’t caught him yet using his magic, otherwise we cannot say for sure how the King would have reacted or done if he found out earlier than expected.

Jimin, whenever he decides not to work on with the hourglass, or learn about his magic secretly, besides sneaking outof  the Palace to see his friends, will often tell tales of the stories that he had once read and watched in his previous life to Boongi like they are his child.

One of the tales that Jimin told Boongi, the first time Yoongi was able to pry successfully was of The Sleeping Beauty and it caught the King’s attention on how fascinating it was hearing the witch tell tales, especially to a creature Yoongi didn’t think no one else’s appreciates truly except him and the people close to him.

As said before, Boongi, although was created by witches, don’t like the creature itself. They only created the blob for the sole purpose of having Yoongi killed flawlessly without getting their hands dirty, which unfortunately didn’t happen as it seemed to have taken a liking to the King and has a soul of an innocent kid, scared to hurt anyone.

He remembers how absorbed he was the first time, that he almost forgot he got a lot of things to finish that day, that he just wants to continue listening to Jimin’s telling tales to Boongi.

Kind of jealous too, that only the blob could enjoy that side of the witch which he hopes he can too. Perhaps, once Jimin wakes up he could. He’ll asks him to tell him tales too before they go to sleep or whenever he’s bored to do anything except from listening to Jimin.

Yoongi held Jimin’s right hand and warm it with his two hands, rubbing it, as he continously stare at the witch’s pale face.

“Nevermind the things I had once told you before. Forget it, if you may. If you decide to wake up, which I truly hope you do, I’ll grant whatever pleas you will asks me to do for you. Except, of course living outside the Palace,” Yoongi had to quickly dismissed thinking of the scenario again with Jae before continuing, “If I have to bow before you, I will. I just need you here, Jimin. No one else I want right now but you. “

Chapter 31

“Tae?” asks Jin, surprised to see Taehyung coming out from Irene’s old library, which made Jin wonder why Yoongi hasn’t order to have it taken down yet if it’s just the books Taehyung needs that he’s preserving.

Perhaps, he needs to raise this concern once again to his brother, seeing that like the previous abandoned library where Jimin silently claimed as his, since he starts living with them in the Palace, no one really wants to go here too because the vibe here is different.

Perhaps Irene has something to do with it so no one could stay here more than one should. Perhaps because she only wants a true-blood witch to access her library. Who knows. However there’s still some like Taehyung who could shrug the feeling just to find what they need from here that is not available to the scholar or healers shelves.

“Ah, hyung,” he quickly bows to Jin, cheeks flushed, “Going somewhere?”

Jin nods.

“I was actually planning to visit you in your chamber, seeing that you didn’t eat dinner with us last night. I thought you’re not feeling well or something,”

“I… uhm, took consideration of the conversation we had yesterday with Jimin hyung’s friends, especially the one that Halmeoni said and it got me thinking. Perhaps, it doesn’t hurt to check and make sure there’s no other things that’s making it hard for Jimin hyung to wake up from his slumber,” he exlaimed.

Jin nods again. Understanding Taehyung’s. Perhaps it was the reason why Yoongi acted the way he did the past few days ever since Jimin lost his consciousness and had no idea when the bookkeeper will wake up.

“And did you find something interesting, seeing that you might have probably stayed here the whole night last night?”

Taehyung quickly nods.

“But I didn’t stayed here the whole night though. I actually just returned the book I was reading yesterday and took a new one just now.”

The two starts walking back to Taehyung’s chambers.

“I think Halmeoni’s assumption yesterday was actually right. Although I don’t want to bring back any bad memories to our King, but I believe he has the right to know about what’s truly going on with Jimin hyung,” Taehyung starts, as soon as they sat right across each other on the table. The young witch flipped the book to a specific page and showed it to Jin.

Jin’s breath hitched seeing the contents of the specific page Taehyung just showed him.

Dream Spell .

Everything about it sounds familiar to what had happened to Yoongi’s Eomma. The root cause why the King despised the race of witches. If it wasn’t because of that spell, that certain witch did to her, she should have been still alive by now and was able to meet her grandson or Jimin, for that matter.

“I think you should really tell my brother,” he agrees with Taehyung, nodding, “Although, does it say there how we will be able to counter the spell they put on him? I can’t believe they really did a double hex on us. First, the sickness, and then this shit.”

Jin was indeed annoyed. He wonders if it was Irene’s idea to do this kind of thing to Jimin, knowing how his brother’s Eomma died years ago. However Jin realised that perhaps the witches thought it was Taehyung who countered their hex and not Jimin, or perhaps not. Who knows?

They’re really that desperate to overthrow his brother from his throne. Wanting Yoongi to doubt himself for being the King, and the people around him too.

Taehyung hesitantly nods at Jin.

“There is, but it would mean that person will have the same situation as Jimin hyung. The dream spell they did isn’t like the good ones witches give to kids to have a good dream since this one is a hex.”

“This means, the dreamer will think the good dream they’re having is the reality when the truth is, it’s a nightmare covered with false promises. The ‘dream’ will persuade the dreamer to stay and once they did, their physical body will pass away.”

“That is why, I believe what Halmeoni said yesterday was the best option for all of us. We just have to put our trusts in him that he will choose us instead of staying in his dream. Because if the other person trying to connect to Jimin hyung’s dream isn’t as determined as they were before, seeing what they longed for on their own dream, then they won’t be able to save Jimin hyung. Both of them could die and none of us wants that.”

Jin sighs.

“But you should still tell my brother about this. He could asks Namjoon’s advise if there’s another way they could think of to help Jimin realise that he’s dreaming,”

Taehyung nods.

“I will,”

What Jin and Taehyung missed to realise was, Yoongi had already heard what he needed to know before Taehyung could tell him later in the day. Accidentally eavesdropping to their conversation before he could even reach the young witch’s chamber to discuss with him his findings about Jimin’s condition.

He couldn’t help but angrily turn his hand to a fist, knuckles turning white, and veins tracing on his whole right arm.

He was fighting the urge not to commit any unjustified bloodbath all because he was affected of this whole ordeal happening to Jimin, reminding him of his past.

He stormed back to his chamber to hopefully crashed out there instead of doing it in the open, where everyone could see him and scare them off but when he reached his chamber and saw Jimin’s peacefully sleeping state, his mind went black.

Madness turns to worry.

He heaved a deep sighed before flopping on to the side of the bed and with shaky hands, carressed Jimin’s face.

“For Aidios’s sake, Jimin, would you please wake up now,”

But just like the previous days, Yoongi got no response from the witch. No hum. No lifting of one of his finger. Eyes still closed, unmoving. Breathing was uneven.

“Fuck them witches except you and Tae,” he inhaled between his teeth, unconsciously leaning his head onto Jimin’s and whispered, “If you still don’t wake up for the next few hours, I don’t care if I have to refuse staying with my Eomma if she dares me stay because I will not approve you dying on me. Not again. Not this time around when I could do something so you won’t end up like what happened to her.”

Meanwhile, Jimin noticed a small smile crept to Mister Bang’s lips. He curiously looked at him but he just shook his head when Jimin asked him what made him smile.

“Jimin, what’s the two kingdoms again in Aidios?” he asks, like it was a country.

“Leukos and Erebos,” he quickly replied, eyes widening when he realised what he just replied and what Mr. Bang had just asked.

“Erm, sorry?”

“What?” Mr. Bangs looks at him like he didn’t asked him just now about the fictional world. Well, is it really just a fictional world?

“You just asked me about… Aidios , did you not?”

Mr. Bang nods.

“I did. What about it?”

“How… how did you know about Aidios?”

“Well, how did you know about it?” Mr. Bangs looks at him expectantly.

Jimin was stunned. He don’t know what to say, what to react. Aidios, can’t be real, right? It was just a product of my dream unless…

“Is there something you want to tell me, or that you remembered, darling?”

Jimin exhaled deeply and shook his head.

“No. Nothing,” he lied.

Mr. Bangs nods and turns to look at the door behind Jimin, like he’s waiting for someone to show up but who else could that be, right?

Chapter 32

“Your Majesty,” Taehyung quickly bowed upon Yoongi’s arrival. Namjoon, surprised of his arrival, quickly bowed too. Yoongi just nods at them in acknowledgement.

“We were just about to head to your chambers to discuss some things with you,” says Namjoon.

“I know,”

“You know?” both the advisor and the young witch tilt their heads in unison, surprised how the King knew before Taehyung could even tell to the King what state Jimin’s in.

Yoongi nods again and sat on the vacant spot between Taehyung and Namjoon. He faced Taehyung with an unreadable expression in his eyes.

“Tell me, will I be fully able to get Jimin to wake up if I get into his dream and get him myself?”

Taehyung and Namjoon was stunned when they realised, this is the very first time the King mentioned the witch’s name and it made their skin rise. Because it’s weird how Jimin’s name rolled smoothly and sweetly from Yoongi’s lips like it’s the King’s favorite world and Namjoon could attest, hearing the witch’s name roll from his tongue is much better than him saying Irene’s name before.

He’s not being biased. He’s just stating facts.

“Well, it should, as stated in the book but the risks, your Majesty… it could—”

“That’s all I need to hear, Taehyung.” replied Yoongi in finality. But Namjoon didn’t let the King decide so hastily. It’s not like he doubt Yoongi, especially when the King had already proved a couple of times how he gets what he wants when he’s determined to get it but this… this is different. They could loose him and loosing him means everything. Not just because he’s their King but Yoongi’s also his friend, Jin’s younger brother and Jungkook’s father.

He can see determination in Yoongi’s eyes. He’s happy to know that somehow the King still has a heart, even if Jimin’s technically a witch, which Yoongi hates, and afterall the killings he had done before to their race, but he also can’t help himself not to worry because he knew how vulnerable Yoongi is when it comes to his childhood years and doing the thing that could possibly save Jimin means Yoongi is also bargaining his vulnerability just to save Jimin which none of them can confirm if the witch himself wants to be saved by anyone from Leukos, not by the King himself who had always been transparent on hating their kind.

“ Hyung ,“ Namjoon used his informal tone, the one he uses to speak to the people he’s closed with. To speak to them as ‘Namjoon’ and not as the King’s advisor or Seonsang .

“Namjoon,” Yoongi countered. Knowing what the younger was trying to do. Good thing, Hoseok’s not here because he’s sure he and Namjoon will team up to make him surrender from his plan. Talk about supportive friends.

“Hyung, I’m serious…”

“And I’m not?” he smirks.

“That’s not what I’m saying! What I’m saying is, like Taehyung’s trying to tell you, the risks is too high! What if you were able to surpass whatever the dream you will have and get to Jimin and he does not want to come with you? Worse is, he does not want to go back? How are you going back? You can’t start a fight with him in his own dream especially if he’s in a place where he thinks he truly belongs or with the person he wants to be with,” Namjoon reasons.

As always, Namjoon knows how to throw him realistic and logical questions that sometimes makes Yoongi wants to fight his bestfriend/advisor because why does he have to be so on point and annoying at the same time?

“I’ll get him back no matter what. Besides, I’m not going to loose Taehyung’s possible Seonsang,” Yoongi looked at a surprised Taehyung. The youg witch realised how badly the King wants him to learn from Jimin. Not that he’s refusing. He’s just surprised how open Yoongi is, although the two always bicker, he’s comfortable with the fact Jimin to teach Taehyung.

“I’m not one to turn a blind eye to someone who had helped my people twice without asking anything in return or doubting to help another when they knew I could kill them. Jimin and I may argue most times, I may hate their race, sometimes I doubt he’s playing nice just to get to my good side and betray me later on however if I’m going to compare how Jimin act around everyone versus the late Queen (Irene), I figured he’s shying away from the fact that he’s a witch and just wants to live a normal life and help people around him without the need to use spells or telling people that he’s one.”

Yoongi sighs, and heaved a deep sigh as he stare at the ceiling. The King don’t like comparing people but in the short span of time Jimin has been living at the Palace he has heard nothing but mostly good things about Jimin versus when he was with Irene before. Although the only negative thing Yoongi thinks people say about Jimin is that he always likes to hide from lots of people or chitchat with them. That Jimin likes to be left alone but when needed, he doesn’t shy away to help. Which is true if he’s being honest.

“… and I know real kindness when I see one. Those friends of his will not be mad and worry about Jimin like he’s part of their family if he’s just someone who’s trying to act nice just so he get a roof over his head during his stay here in Leukos. They wouldn’t cry, visit him during the day and even have their neighbors gift Jimin things to help him recover from his ‘sickness’.”

He licked his lips and continues.

“That’s why I will get him back no matter what. If I have to start a fight just to get him back, if I have to fight whatever that dream of his is trying to give him to stay, I will. He have to understand, that dream of his doesn’t need him. He doesn’t belong there. He belongs here. He belongs to a place where everyone accepts him for who he is, who loves him regardless they know he’s a witch or not and that is just because they’re happy he exists in this world.”

Taehyung and Namjoon was stunned but smiled regardless hearing Yoongi’s heartfelt words which they didn’t think of hearing from him.

It seemed that the King had always been observing Jimin. Something that they didn’t expect he will do, knowing how he acts around the orange witch.

“But hyung, you have to understand it will not be easy,” says Namjoon after awhile, “Jimin’s in a place, probably with the person that once made him feel accepted, loved and safe. Something that all of us might have experienced before and perhaps right now, and you know how stubborn one could be when they’re closed off.”

“Jimin had openly talked this once with Jungkook before which I unintentionally heard and perhaps he did with you too. The reason why he does not want to get attach with so many people and keep his circle small was because of what happened from his previous life. He had always helped anyone who needs his knowledge. Of course, with the right amount because that’s how things works from where he came from but didn’t expect that when he, for once shied away from helping them because of the morals he stands for, they killed the person he cared deeply for, almost killing Jimin too but he did it himself just so they couldn’t get the satisfaction of doing so.”

“… yes, Jimin does help but with precaution. I’ve notice this since he first helped us. The day where he helped us defeat Kai and his witches. He could’ve just helped us the moment they appeared but he didn’t. He’s hesitating. Perhaps because he was reminded of his previous life. So when he vanished and recovered, when he met us again, he was afraid he’ll be killed again.”

“Threatening of killing him because he’s a witch when he kept telling us he’s a bookkeeper didn’t help too. Then, when the sickness happened, Jimin could’ve easily helped us, given how knowledgable he is like us scholars, and well, as a witch but he didn’t. He hesitated again just like before.”

“He hesitated because he’s afraid things that happened to him previously will happen again if he’s not cautious enough. It seems like he’s kind of living with fear of death although he tries to make it like he doesn’t.”

Taehyung nods.

“Jimin hyung doesn’t mind helping people but he also weighs their intention at the same time. So, excuse my question to you, your Majesty, but how would you make him feel safe, that when he comes back there’s no need for him to feel like his one foot is on the grave? That when he’s back you will accept him for who he is and not mock him for being a witch or a bookkeeper? The main reason why I think he’s afraid to help is because of you , Yoongi hyung. You remind him of the very people who killed the person he loved. The very people who also indirectly killed him in his previous life.”

Namjoon nods, please with what Taehyung had just said and looked at Yoongi that somehow looked like he was shot with Jin’s arrow in the chest.

“Then I have to show him the real me. That I’m not who he thinks I am. That I’m just like him, wanting to live a peaceful but was challenged by life.”

“ Please, we don’t have much time left. I need to get him back before it’s too late. Before what happened to my Eomma happens to Jimin, and I will not forgive myself if another person dear to everyone I love died when I could’ve done something.“

Yoongi had to close his eyes and his fists to calm himself when he realised how heavy his chest was, that he couldn’t breath properly. That it makes his eyes watery.

“ Please, don’t be hard to yourself, hyung. Both you and Jimin don’t deserve to feel guilty for something uncontrollable. You were young and vulnerable way back then. None of you deserved it but there’s always chance for us to make up for what was lost.“

Namjoon smiled and offered a pat on the King’s shoulders while Taehyung was just happy to have this kind of talk with them.

Chapter 33

“Don’t forget, hyung, once you close your eyes to sleep, once you open it again, you’re already inside your dream. That you’re dreaming. The moment they try to make you stay, try your very hardest to leave. To remember Jimin hyung. That you’re in your dream to get into him and bring him back with you. Do you understand?” Taehyung reminds, worried but firm.

Although he agrees to help the King, together with Namjoon’s persuasion, to get Jimin back, he can’t help not to worry too much than Jungkook. Because what they’re about to do is not something that could be undone if Yoongi fails to connect to Jimin’s dream and bring him back with him.

“Stop worrying, Tae. Just focus on casting the spell to me. I’m confident you’re not going to hex me like they did to Jimin. I’m counting on you that this plan of ours will work. I’m not just the one doing the work here, remember?” Yoongi smiled.

Taehyung sighs.

“I know, I know. I’m just… scared .”

“Everyone gets scared sometimes. I, sometimes still do, believe it or not. But this certainly wasn’t the first time you casted a spell and didn’t work. Most times it did worked. You have to believe on yourself, Tae, and perhaps be confident enough exactly how Jimin trusted you when you two unhexed those innocent people whom didn’t deserved to be hexed by those witches in the first place.”

“I trusts you, Taehyung. Always has been. Even when you think you’ve failed me. Not just me, but the people around you too. We all do. So, please do yourself a favor and put trust to yourself a bit more,” leaning just a bit to the young witch’s ear, enough only for Taehyung to hear, “Just like how my son, Jungkook, looks at you like the sun and moon revolves around you.”

“Y-your Majesty,” Taehyung cheeks flushed deep red, and Jungkook, curiously looks at the two with a frown. Worried that his Father might have threatened the young witch in way which he’s sure of.

“Appa! When will you stop the habit of threatening people?” Jungkook barks.

“The majesty’s not threatening me, your highness,” Taehyung quickly dismissed.  Although he can’t look directly onto the Prince’s eye which Jungkook noticed.

“Then why can’t you look me in the eye then as you say that?”

Yoongi smirks. Taehyung turns to look at the King like he’s asking him to help him. To be the one to respond to his son’s interrogation.

“Is that a way to treat your Appa, Kookie? Knowing I can die from my dream if I fail to get to your precious hyung and bring him back with me?” he jokes, but Jungkook’s having none of it. He snorts.

“ Please… “ he starts, rolling his eyes and somehow it reminded him of Jin. Perhaps it was the result of him hanging too much with him besides the others and Taehyung. Yoongi tries not to smile.

“The only thing I should be afraid of, is you dreaming of her instead of Halmeoni,” says Jungkook, meeting his eyes, judging him, and was waiting for his reaction that didn’t arrive as expected because it was the truth.

When he learned what the three of them was planning to do later that night, Jungkook quickly thought of his Mother.

Those almost forgotten ugly years hugged his memory like it was once something dear to him, which perhaps may be true as those were the years he was most vulnerable as the child he once was, trying to get Irene’s approval of everything he does.

He deeply remembered how Yoongi’s eyes that were once filled with colors, dulled and dimmed the moment he learned Irene’s true intentions after all those years she was with him. With them.

How Yoongi stared at anything but his mind drifts elsewhere. How, perhaps, Yoongi had wished he never learned about the truth. How they could have lived a happy, peaceful life beside each other as they watch Jungkook grow to a beautiful, young man. Watch him get married, have his own family and be the next righteous King of Leukos.

It’s been years, and yet the image of seeing his Father more than once, staring outside the window from his study room didn’t diminished from Jungkook’s memory. It stood out greater than the memories they have three as a family. 

“You think I’ll stay because of her and forget about Jimin that you adored so much since the first time you saw him?”

Jungkook cheeks flushed but sighed, deep.

“Who knows? I mean, I get it. He was your first love. Once married too, and the one who birthed me but I rather have the one you are right now than you are back then after you learned what she truly are,” he exclaimed, eyes watery but trying to keep himself together.

“I’m not trying to disrespect her either, but Jin-samchon, the other eldery Palace women and even Jimin hyung, they had been more of an Eomma to me than she or you thought she was. I think that’s more of a reason for you to choose and stick to the plan you three agreed of doing.”

“I will forever be grateful to you more than I already am if you choose, Jimin hyung, our bookkeeper, that you refer as a witch that you hate than spending it with her under the illusion of your dream that she’s whatever you thought she once was. We all know Jimin hyung deserves to hear that thank you from you more than her.”

Yoongi smirks. Surprised how petty but mature Jungkook speaks. He’s proud of the man he’s becoming, and to himself too. That he was here to witnessed it, front seat. Although a bit sad knowing Irene’s not here to see it, but perhaps she wouldn’t care either if she was, because it’s Yoongi’s duty after all to train him being born as a man and the next heir to the King’s throne.

Before they left Yoongi’s chamber, so he could now prepare himself to sleep, so Taehyung could cast the spell, Jin didn’t hesitate to threaten his younger brother at the last minute that if, even just for a tiny bit, he senses Yoongi will sabotage their plan, he will get into his dream with, or without Taehyung’s casting, helping him, and will hit Yoongi hard in the head just so he could remind him of Jimin.

Whereas Namjoon just gave Yoongi a thumbs up, and Hoseok hugging him like it’s his last day breathing in Aidios.

Jungkook was just now chill about the situation. Perhaps confident Taehyung will be able to casts the spell perfectly and Yoongi to bring Jimin back as he’s expecting. He already had knocked some senses to Yoongi earlier anyway during their Father-and-son talk which should be enough for both of them.

While Taehyung reminded him again of the do’s and don’t while he’s dreaming just so he can easily get to connect to Jimin’s dream.

Before he closes his eyes, so he could finally sleep and get on to his and Jimin’s dream, so Taehyung’s spell that he’s casting on right now works, Yoongi took one last glance to the orange witch beside him and admired his features.

Yes, exactly. That’ll do.

A faint smile traced the King’s lips before he laid down beside Jimin and drifted off to sleep. Hoping his own dream will be as quick as possible, so he can get to Jimin before the other decides to stay in his own. Leaving Aidios, and them behind.

But just as Namjoon and Taehyung had predicted, the dream isn’t one to be easy to escape to, because it’ll show you what you longed for. The people, the what ifs you could have had that slipped through your fingers and right now, it’s trying to make Yoongi feel like his dream is the reality.

“ Fuck, “ he uttered, seeing the sight infront of him. There stood infront of him was Irene, carrying a seemingly baby Jungkook in her arms while his parents admiringly stares at their grandson, proud and excited for Jungkook to grow up like or greater than their own son.

“Aish, Yoongi! Why are you just standing there? Come here and join us,” his Eomma said, smile so bright that it blinds him than Hoseok’s own ‘sunshine’ smile.

“Coming,” he replied, as he walks towards Irene and his parents with hesitation but he can’t missed the chance to see how Jungkook looks like before when he was still a baby. The chance to see how his Mother looks like, as he recalls her when he was young and naive. The chance to see his Father again before he had hated him and died knowing Yoongi despised him, blaming him for his Mother’s death. The chance to see Irene being a mother to their child.

Just for a bit , he said to himself. Breaking his unofficial promise to his son and Taehyung.

Chapter 34

“Yoongi?”

The King’s head snapped back to the person calling him. He embarassingly smiled as he was caught daydreaming again by his wife, as she holds their baby into her arms.

“I’m sorry, dear. Just thinking of some things,”

“Mind sharing it to me?”

Yoongi shook his head.

“Nothing special. Just silly things.”

“Like?”

“How lucky I was to have met you and be wed with you?” he exclaimed, looking at Irene like she’s the most beautiful thing that had happened to him besides having their son, Jungkook, and growing up in a loving home.

However, there’s just this one, tiny, little tingling sensation he can’t decipher that he kept on feeling whenever he think of these “things” with Irene, and his parents. Like, they weren’t real.

He’s sure they are real.

These things happening around him are real.

Because he can’t seem to remember why he wouldn’t. But the pain… it’s really not that painful, but it makes him feel empty. Lonely . And missing things. Sort of.

“Yoongi?” Irene calls out again, sighing.

“I’m so—”

“Enough, Yoongi.” she replied, impatient. She walks towards him and handed baby Jungkook over to him, which he gladly took with trembling hands. Afraid to drop and hurt him.

“Why don’t you take a walk with Jungkook while I get a rest, hmm?”

“Of course, dear.” he replied, kissing her forehead. Taking one last lingering look at Irene before leaving their chambers with his son in his arms.

He sighed. Seeing how moody she had become these past few days. Probably it was because of him and his daydreaming problems. He don’t understand it though. He should be happy that he has everything a man could wish for in life but to him, it seems like it’s all too good to be true.

Like something’s off about this whole ordeal but he can’t exactly pinpoint what it is or how it’s even possible because again, this , and everything around him that he’s feeling is real . Maybe, just maybe, he needs something that’ll remind him, or wake him up from this sweet dream.

Well, only if this was just a dream.

“Hush, my love, “ whispers Yoongi, trying to calm a crying Jungkook as they walk towards the cherry blossom tree near the old, mysterious library that no one knew when, or for whom it was built for, but no King had ever tried putting it down because it seemed to be doing fine on its own. Perhaps, just waiting for someone to turn said library upside down and claim it as their own despite its reputation and the weird, calm feeling it gives to those who needs it, and the opposite to those who don’t.

The sun’s almost down, while the moon’s time to shine has finally come. The breeze touching their skin was cool but not enough to make them both shiver, as Jungkook was well-wrapped with his baby blanket. He can’t help not to smile, while staring at his son, thinking and wondering, excited too, as he pictures him in his mind on how he would grow to be a man more of what Yoongi had become. Kind, gentle, and understanding.

“I think you’re hungry. Are you, my love?” he asks, like Jungkook could reply. Silly . Jungkook didn’t stop crying though. His cries only gets louder when Yoongi stood, almost leaving their spot to go back inside the Palace. He was pointing at something or someone.

At first, he thought it was just nothing until, he saw a familiar figure from nearby. Slowly wagging its long tail from opposite sides. It was doing its own thing until their eyes met.

That suddenly hit something familiar to Yoongi. It feels like looking into the mirror.

One hand slowly reaching to his chest, trying to stop that unfamiliar feeling of guilt constrincting his heart, while the other still closely wrapped Jungkook.

Yoongi can’t remember seeing that cat roaming the Palace grounds before. There had been no stray animals inside where he grew up since his Father don’t like the idea of animals roaming around except for the horses, of course, so how come there’s one that had missed the Palace guards and maids eyes?

He and the cat just stared back at each other while Jungkook cries in the background.

Disappointed that the King wasn’t doing anything to him, he turned his back at him and starts walking away. This alarmed Yoongi. Because he couldn’t afford the cat to be seen and thrown out just because his Father doesn’t like them.

He wants to save it.

Without realising, his legs started walking towards where the cat’s trying to head to, as he tries to calm Jungkook down, humming a seemily familiar tune. Like he had it heard it from someone besides his Mother and Irene.

He just can’t figure who it was.

“Oh,” he uttered, realising he is now standing infront of the old library. His heart beating fast he couldn’t figure why, but it was in a good way. Like there’s someone behind the library he’s excited to see which was odd because this wasn’t where Irene burn her time away but to the one where Yoongi had built just for her. Because she doesn’t like being here. She doesn’t like how the old library seemed to her.

“There you two are,” he was interrupted to slid the door open when his Father appeared before them.

“It’s almost dinner, why are you two still out bere instead of being with your wife and mother?” he asks.

“I was about to, but then I saw something, uh… unexplanaible so I went here to, uh, check it?”

“With Jungkook in your arms, son?” he challenges.

“You’re not getting my grandson hurt,” he huffs, “If you want to check whatever the unexplainable thing you might have saw, do it alone or asks General Jung.”

“Sorry, Appa,” he uttered, like a kid.

His Father just shook his head and smiled, “It’s okay, I just don’t want either of you to get hurt and leave Aidios early. Especially you. Just leave that library behind and join us to dinner. I’m sure we’re all hungry anyway.”

“Right,” he agreed.

Before he turned his back away from the old library, there it was again. That pain. That lingering guilt creeping into his chest and he don’t know why, but as he followed his Father and Jungkook behind, it seemed to him there could be something important inside that he needed to see, or vise versa but for now, perhaps, his Father is right. It’s already dinner and they needed to eat. Maybe some other time to see what’s inside.

Hopefully, it’s not too late yet for him by the time he returns. By the time he remembers.

The cat from earlier was seen again, sitting outside the old library, getting impatient, as it listens to Jungkook cries from afar who can’t do anything but to wait for Yoongi to wake up from this impossibly real dream.